JP7023015B1 - Game table - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game table having new characteristics in alerting a player who plays a game with an unrecommended number of bets. SOLUTION: The operation means is set by an operation means, a bet number setting means capable of setting a bet number of either a first bet number and a second bet number smaller than the first bet number, and a bet number setting means. The first bet number game is recommended for the game console provided with the game execution means for executing the game based on the number of bets and the effect means capable of executing the first effect, and the effect means is the first. It is a means that can execute the first effect suggesting whether or not to shift to a game state advantageous to the player in the bet number game, and the first effect is an operation promotion effect that encourages the operation of the operation means. It is an effect including an operation response effect executed in connection with the operation of the operation means, and the effect means is one game from the next game in which the first effect is started to the second bet number game. If the above is executed, the operation response effect may not be executed. [Selection Diagram] FIG. 28

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a slot machine (rotary body game machine) and a pachinko machine (ball ball game machine).

Conventionally, for example, a slot machine is known as one of the game consoles. In this slot machine, the reel is rotated by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, the winning combination is internally determined by an internal lottery, and when the reel is stopped by operating the stop button, it is placed on the reel window. It is configured so that a combination is established when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed according to an internal decision. Then, when a winning combination with the payout of medals is established, a predetermined number of medals corresponding to the established winning combination are paid out.

In order to increase the interest of the game, such a game table is given a right that is advantageous to the player (for example, an AT right) by lottery, and is in an advantageous state until the number of continuous games of the advantageous right is exhausted. A game table controlled to (for example, AT state) has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-188098

In the above game table, the player can select one of a plurality of bets to play the game, but there are some bets that are not suitable for the game, that is, not recommended. .. Therefore, it is necessary to alert players who play games with an unrecommended number of bets, but there is still room for improvement in the notification of alerts.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game table having new characteristics in calling attention to a player who plays a game with an unrecommended bet number.

In order to achieve the above object, the game console according to the present invention is, as one aspect thereof.
Multiple reels with multiple types of patterns and rotational drive,
The start lever that starts the rotation of the plurality of reels and
An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
A bet number setting means capable of setting any bet number among a plurality of bets including a first bet number and a second bet number smaller than the first bet number, and a bet number setting means.
A game execution means for executing a game based on the bet number set by the bet number setting means, and a game execution means.
It is a game console equipped with a production means that can at least execute the first production and the second production .
The game table is recommended to be a game in which the first bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "first bet number game").
The effect means is a means capable of executing the first effect in the first bet number game.
The first effect is an effect that is started in connection with the stoppage of all reels.
The first effect is a judge effect that suggests whether or not to shift to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.
The judge effect is configured to include an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the operation means and an operation response effect that is executed in connection with the operation of the operation means.
The second effect is an effect of notifying that a game in which the second bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "second bet number game") has been executed.
The effect means is a means for executing the operation response effect when the operation promotion effect is started as the first effect in a certain game and the operation means is operated.
In the effect means, the operation promotion effect is started as the first effect in a certain game, the operation means is not operated, and then the second bet number game is executed in the next game of the certain game . When this is done (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), it is a means for not executing the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect in the first effect.
In the second bet number game in the first case, after all the reels are stopped, the first effect not including the operation promotion effect is executed, and the following of the second bet number game is executed. In the first bet number game in which the start lever is operated, there is a case where the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player without performing the judge effect (hereinafter referred to as "second case").
In the second case, the effect is different from that of the judge effect, and the effect of recognizing that the player has moved to a favorable gaming state is started.
The gist is that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game table having new features in alerting a player who plays a game with a non-recommended bet number.

It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention in a plane, and (b) is the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, the payout and the operation. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing of the main control part of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt process of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the 1st sub-control unit timer interrupt processing of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. Flow of second sub-control unit main process, second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and second sub-control unit image control process of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows. It is a figure explaining the production outline of the three-card betting game and the two-card betting game in the embodiment C1 of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the outline of the effect when the slot machine executes a pseudo-bonus confirmation notification in Example C1 and then executes a three-card betting game. It is a figure explaining the outline of the effect when the slot machine executes the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification in Example C1 and then executes the two-card betting game. It is a figure explaining an example of the continuous production in Example C2 of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining another example of the continuous production in Example C2 of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the modification of the continuous effect shown in FIG. It is an example of the effect displayed on the effect image display device in the embodiment C3 of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the transition of the effect mode of the effect image display device when the two-card betting game is executed in the embodiment C3 of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a modification of the effect displayed on the effect image display device in the embodiment C3 of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the transition of the effect mode displayed on the effect image display device when the button effect is executed in the embodiment C4 of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a change in the effect mode of the effect image display device when one game of a two-card bet game is executed in the next game after the button effect shown in FIG. 17 is started, and then a three-card bet game is executed. It is a figure explaining the notification period of the double bet notification in Example C5 of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the modification of the notification period of the two-card bet notification shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the modification of the effect performed in Example C5 of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. In the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows the progress of the game when a power failure occurs while the two-card betting game is being executed after the three-card betting game in the normal state is executed. It is a time chart, and (b) is an effect displayed on the effect image display device when a power failure occurs while executing a two-card bet game after executing a three-card bet game in a normal state. It is a figure which showed an example. In the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, in (a), after executing the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification in the normal state, the game progress time when a power failure occurs while executing the two-card betting game. It is a chart, and (b) is an example of the effect displayed on the effect image display device when a power failure occurs while executing a two-card betting game after executing a pseudo bonus confirmation notification in a normal state. It is a figure shown. In the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, after executing the pseudo bonus confirmation notification in the normal state, the two-card betting game, the first three-card betting game, and the second three-card betting game are sequentially executed, and the first time. It is a time chart of the game progress when a power failure occurs while executing the three-card betting game. In the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, after executing the pseudo bonus confirmation notification in the normal state, the two-card betting game, the first three-card betting game, and the second three-card betting game are sequentially executed, and the first time. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect displayed on the effect image display device when a power failure occurs while executing the three-card betting game. In the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, (a) is a diagram showing the transition of the production image displayed on the production image display device in the two-card betting game, and (b) is the production image in the three-card betting game. The figure showing the transition of the effect image displayed on the display device and explaining the outline of the first notice, (c) shows the transition of the effect image displayed on the effect image display device in the three-card betting game. It is a figure explaining the outline of the 2nd notice notice. In the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, (a) executes the first notice notification in the three-card betting game, and is displayed on the effect image display device when the next game is the two-card betting game. The figure showing the transition of the image, (b) shows the transition of the effect image displayed on the effect image display device when the second advance notice is executed in the three-card bet game and the next game is the two-card bet game. It is a figure. In the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, in (a), after the button effect is started in the three-card betting game, the effect button is not operated, and the two-card bet game is executed in one game in the next game. After that, the figure showing the change in the effect mode of the effect image display device when the three-card bet game is executed, (b) shows the privilege that the effect button is operated after the button effect is started in the three-card bet game. It is a figure which shows the change of the effect mode of the effect image display device when one game is executed by a two-card bet game in the next game. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention in a plane, and (b) is the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, the payout and the operation. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing of the main control part of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt process of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the 1st sub-control unit timer interrupt processing of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. Flow of second sub-control unit main process, second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and second sub-control unit image control process of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows. It is a figure explaining the outline of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in AT game in Example N1 of one Embodiment of this invention, and is the figure explaining the effect example when the effect button is operated once. It is a figure explaining the outline of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the bonus winning game in Example N1 of one Embodiment of this invention, and is the figure explaining the effect example when the effect button is operated once. In Example N1 of the Embodiment of this invention, it is a figure explaining the outline of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in a bonus winning game, and is the figure explaining the effect example when the effect button is pressed and held. It is a figure which made the production outline of one game shown in FIGS. 36 to 38 into a higher-level conceptual. It is a figure which shows the outline of the modification of the operation request effect and the operation response effect explained in Example N1, and is the figure which shows the image example of the effect image display device of the first game. It is a figure which shows the outline of the modification of the operation request effect and the operation response effect explained in Example N1, and is the figure which shows the image example of the effect image display device of the 2nd game. It is a figure explaining the outline of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in a bonus winning game in Example N2 of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in a bonus winning game in Example N2 of one Embodiment of this invention (variant example). In Example N3 of the Embodiment of this invention, it is the time chart about the volume change of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in a bonus winning game, and the operation with respect to the effect button (the operation with respect to the effect button before the predetermined time TA elapses. If done). In Example N3 of the embodiment of the present invention, it is a time chart regarding the volume change of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the bonus winning game, and the operation for the effect button (the operation for the effect button after the predetermined time TA has elapsed). If done). In Example N4 of the Embodiment of this invention, it is a figure which shows the light emitting mode of the bet button while performing the operation request effect and the operation response effect in a bonus winning game, and after the start lever operation of the next game. When the medal is inserted based on the operation for the bet button). In Example N4 of the Embodiment of this invention, it is a figure which shows the light emitting mode of the bet button while performing the operation request effect and the operation response effect in a bonus winning game, and after the start lever operation of the next game. When inserting medals based on the operation of inserting three medals from the medal insertion slot). It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment A1 of this invention. It is a front view in the state which the front door of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment A1 of this invention is opened. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment A1 of this invention. (A) It is a figure which expands and shows the arrangement of the design applied to each reel of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment A1 of this invention in a plane. (B) It is a figure which shows the winning line of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment A1 of this invention. (A) It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the three-card betting game. (B) It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the two-card betting game. (A) It is a transition diagram of the game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. (B) It is a transition diagram of the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. (A) It is a figure which shows the lottery table used for the internal lottery processing of a winning combination. (B) It is a figure explaining the correct operation order of the push order combination of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment A1 of this invention. It is a figure which associates the display data with the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. (A) The image of the effect table provided in the first sub-control unit 400 is illustrated. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the judge state production table. (C) It is a figure which showed an example of the LMT state production table. (D) is a figure which showed the modification of the LMT state effect table. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt processing. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (A) (1) to (a) (4) It is a figure which showed the example which started the 1st effect (total notification) in the continuous hit effect in time series. (B) (1) to (b) (3) It is a figure which showed the example which starts the second effect (privilege effect) in the continuous hit effect in chronological order. (C) It is a figure which showed the other example of the operation request display. (A) (1)-(a) (8) It is a figure which showed the example which starts the 3rd effect (result notification effect) in the judge effect in chronological order. (B) (7) to (b) (8) An example of the effect when the button image (operation request display) is displayed during the judge effect but the effect button (first operation means) is not operated is shown. It is a figure. It is a figure which showed the example which started the 2nd effect (result notification effect) while the 1st effect (total notification) is executed in the continuous hitting effect in chronological order. (A) (1) to (a) (8) It is a figure which showed the example which starts the operation response effect after displaying the operation request display in the judge victory effect in chronological order, FIG. 62 (a) (1). It is a figure corresponding to the figure (a) (8). (B) (1)-(b) (2) It is a figure which showed an example of the judge defeat production (the production when the AT lottery in CZ is not won). It is a figure which showed the effect example in chronological order when the operation request display is not displayed (the second case) in a judge revival effect. It is a figure which showed the effect example in chronological order when the operation request display is not displayed in the judge revival effect (the second case), and the operation means is operated and the operation response effect is started (the third case). .. In the figure showing an example of the effect in chronological order when the operation request display is not displayed in the judge defeat effect (second case) and the operation means is operated but the operation response effect is not started (fourth case). be. An example of an effect in which the operation response effect is started when the operation means is operated while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating when the operation request display is not displayed in the judge revival effect (second case). It is a figure shown in time series. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment A1 of this invention. It is a front view in the state which the front door of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment A1 of this invention is opened. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment A1 of this invention. (A) It is a figure which expands and shows the arrangement of the design applied to each reel of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment A1 of this invention in a plane. (B) It is a figure which shows the winning line of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment A1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination. (A) It is a transition diagram of the game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. (B), (c) is a transition diagram of the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. (A) It is a figure which shows the lottery table used for the internal lottery processing of a winning combination. (B) It is a figure explaining the correct operation order of the push order combination of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment A1 of this invention. It is a figure which associates the display data with the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt processing. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the initial setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the setting-related processing at the time of power-on. It is a figure which showed an example of various notifications. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of setting change in a normal time when an error does not occur in a game table. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of setting confirmation in a normal time when an error does not occur in a game table. It is a figure which showed an example of various notifications. It is a figure which showed an example of a certain effect (pseudo-bonus) in which the first effect (the first button effect) is executed in chronological order. It is a figure which showed an example of a certain effect (pseudo-bonus) in which the first effect (the first button effect) is executed in chronological order. It is a figure which showed an example of a certain effect (pseudo-bonus) in which a second effect (second button effect) is executed in chronological order. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of the slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view in the state which the front door of the slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention is opened. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which showed an example of the switching display performed at the start of AT in chronological order. It is a figure which showed an example of the information display in the switching display performed during an AT game in chronological order. It is a figure which showed an example of the information display after the end of the switching display performed during an AT game in chronological order. It is a figure which showed an example of the mode of the notification means in a normal game in time series. It is a figure which showed an example of the mode of the notification means in a two-step error notification in time series. (A)-(d) It is a figure which showed an example of the mode of the notification means in the case of executing the third error notification in the two-step error notification in time series. (G) It is a figure which showed the modification of the 1st error notification. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of the slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view in the state which the front door of the slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention is opened. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which showed the transition example of the inspection pattern in the setting change / setting confirmation mode. (A) It is a figure which showed the detail of the transition condition of the inspection pattern. (B) It is a figure which showed the detail of the operation pattern of the effect means in each pattern 0-4. (A) It is a figure which showed the state which the sub liquid crystal 163 has moved to the initial position (fully open state). (B) It is a figure which showed the state which the sub liquid crystal 163 is moving to the fully closed state. (C) It is a figure which showed the state which the sub liquid crystal 163 is moving to the half-open state. It is a figure which showed the operation pattern of the effect means in (d)-(f) pattern 0. It is a figure which showed the operation pattern of the effect means in (g)-(h) pattern 1. FIG. It is a figure which showed the operation pattern of the effect means in (a)-(b) pattern 2. It is a figure which showed the operation pattern of the effect means in (c)-(f) pattern 3. It is a figure which showed the operation pattern of the effect means in (a)-(b) pattern 1. FIG. It is a figure which showed the operation pattern of the effect means in (c)-(d) pattern 2. It is a figure which showed the operation pattern of the effect means in (e)-(g) pattern 4. It is a figure which showed the continuation of the operation pattern of the effect means in (a)-(c) pattern 4. (D)-(g) It is a figure which showed an example of the interrupt 1 of the inspection pattern. It is a figure which showed an example of the interrupt 2 of a check pattern. It is a figure which showed the operation pattern of the effect means in (a)-(c) pattern 0. (D) It is a figure which showed the operation pattern of the effect means after the setting change is completed. It is a figure which showed the example which changed from the pattern 0 of the setting change / setting confirmation mode to the mute mode. It is a figure which showed the example which changed from the setting change / setting confirmation mode pattern 0 to the mute mode, and returned to the setting change / setting confirmation mode again.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[First Embodiment]
The slot machine of the present embodiment starts rotation when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if they do not match, the game medium is used. It is a game table that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which multiple types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the reel window 113, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each reel 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit of this optical sensor is provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 114. The valid winning line 114 is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 114. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line will be valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line will be added to the three medals. If three bets are placed, the five lines to which the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line are added may be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 114 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a down winning line and an upper right winning line, may be set as valid winning lines, or the same number of winning lines may be set as valid winning lines regardless of the number of bets.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in the internal lottery for the winning combination, which will be described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. be. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, a maximum of three bets are inserted, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 121 lights up. Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, a game in which three medals are inserted may be referred to as a “three-card betting game”, and a game in which two medals are inserted may be referred to as a “two-card betting game”.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. The payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an effect device for notifying information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 110 to 112. .. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be pressed. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation may be referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation may be referred to as a third stop reel. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 as a stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111 is called "forward push operation order". The operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 and the stop operation is called "middle push operation order" or simply "middle push" is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is on the front side of the slot machine 100 (player side). It has a structure that appears.

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an effect device for executing an effect described later.

The effect button 192 is a button that can be operated when performing a predetermined effect. In the present embodiment, an effect suggesting the granting of a privilege may be executed based on the operation of the effect button 192.

It should be noted that the device may be configured to be capable of displaying various production images and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, or a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of an internal lottery for a winning combination, and a reel stop. ROM 306 for storing positions, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 every interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor or the like and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 starts when the power is turned on and the random number value generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main process of the main control unit described later). To start).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor to be paid out from the medal payout device 180, index sensor of reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, the effect button 192 sensor, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number value generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register storing the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 sensor are installed in the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect the input operation of the case. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, L Become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. Drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game medal insertion lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the display 126 and the payout number display 127) is provided, respectively.

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted in an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output. Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 has a voltage value of the power supply set to a predetermined value (this implementation). In the embodiment, when the voltage is less than 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. is doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stores a ROM 406 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various indicators, and the like are stored. It is provided.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and the speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via the output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is provided with various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input / output interface. 123 etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and bases the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
The symbol arrangement applied to each of the above-mentioned reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 3A. It should be noted that the figure is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in a plane-developed manner.

On each reel 110 to 112, a plurality of types (8 types in the present embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the figure are arranged in a predetermined number of frames (21 frames of numbers 0 to 20 in the present embodiment). Further, the numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, in the present embodiment, the number 1 frame on the left reel 110 has a "replay" symbol, the number 0 frame on the middle reel 111 has a "bell" symbol, and the number 2 frame on the right reel 112 has a "replay" symbol. The "watermelon" design is arranged respectively.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 3 (b). The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination. Of the winning roles in this embodiment, the big bonus (BB1, BB2) and the regular bonus (RB) are the bonus roles for shifting to the bonus game, and the replay is the replay without inserting a new medal. As a role that enables a game, it may be called a "working role" to be distinguished from a winning role, but the "winning role" in the present embodiment includes a big bonus, a regular bonus, and a re-game that are the operating roles. Is included. In addition, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operator without the distribution of medals (without the payout of medals) is displayed on the valid line, for example, big bonus, regular. Includes bonuses and winning replays.

The winning roles of the slot machine 100 include big bonuses (BB1, BB2), regular bonuses (RB), small roles (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replay. It goes without saying that the types of winning combinations are not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

The "big bonus (BB1, BB2)" (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "BB") is a special role (actuating role) in which a big bonus game (BB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combinations are "BB1 symbol (also referred to as white 7) -BB1 symbol-BB1 symbol" and BB2 "BB2 symbol (also referred to as blue 7) -BB2 symbol-BB2 symbol". Also, for BB1 and BB2, the flags are carried over. That is, when BB1 and BB2 are internally won, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a predetermined area of RAM 308 of the main control unit 300), but even if BB1 and BB2 are not won in the game, the prize is won. The flag indicating the internal winning is maintained until the game is completed, and even after the next game, BB1 and BB2 are internally winning, and the symbol combination "white 7-white 7-white 7" corresponding to BB1 and the symbol corresponding to BB2 are displayed. The combination "Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7" is in a state of winning all together.

The "regular bonus (RB)" (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "RB") is a special role (actuating role) in which a regular bonus game (RB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combination is "RB symbol (also referred to as bonus) -RB symbol-RB symbol". As for RB, the flag is carried over in the same manner as the above-mentioned BB. However, in the big bonus game (BB game), the big bonus game is started without the start condition that the regular bonus game (RB game) is internally won and the symbol combination is displayed on the winning line. The regular bonus game may be started later, and when one regular bonus game is completed, the regular bonus game may be automatically started so that the next regular bonus game is started immediately.

"Small role (cherry, watermelon, bell) (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as" cherry "," watermelon "," bell ") is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol. The combination is "cherry symbol-ANY symbol-ANY symbol" for cherry, "watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol" for watermelon, and "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" for bell. The corresponding payouts are as shown in the figure, with 4 cherries, 12 watermelons, and 8 bells. In the case of "cherry symbol-ANY symbol-ANY symbol", the symbol of the left reel 110 may be a "cherry" symbol, and the symbols of the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol.

"Replay" is a winning combination (operating role) that allows a game to be played without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize, and the medal is not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination is "replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol" for the replay game.

Here, the internal winning probability of the winning combination will be outlined.

The internal winning probability of each combination is the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each combination, and the numerical data in the range of the random number value acquired at the time of the internal lottery described later (65536 in this embodiment). It is calculated by dividing by. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each combination or loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process described later, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is the value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to any combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. Actually, this lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6 having different winning probabilities for at least one role, and a game store clerk or the like can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. ..

In the present embodiment, the watermelon and the cherry each win a prize when the winning combination is internally won in the internal lottery process and the operation timing of the stop operation is suitable. Hereinafter, watermelon and cherry are also referred to as chance roles. In addition, the bell wins a prize when the winning combination is internally elected in the internal lottery process and the stop operation is performed in the correct stop operation order. Hereinafter, the bell is also referred to as a push order role.

The AT state is a gaming state in which information (stop operation content) that is advantageous to the player is notified when the chance combination or the push order combination is internally won. In the AT state, the effect image display device 157 and the payout number display device 127 are used to execute an operation navigation for notifying the stop operation content to assist the winning. Specifically, when the push order combination is internally won in the AT state, the stop operation order is notified, and when the chance combination is internally won in the AT state, the stop operation timing (suggestion of the internally won combination) is notified. Since the operation navigation is executed, the player can easily win a predetermined small winning combination by following the stop operation content of the operation navigation. That is, the AT state is a state in which a large profit is given to the player by the operation navigation.

On the other hand, in the normal state, the operation navigation is not executed even if the chance combination or the push order combination is internally won.

In the present embodiment, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state, the state shifts to the AT state. In the AT lottery, for example, the winning or losing of the winning may be determined based on the result of the winning combination internal lottery. Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of digested games in the normal state after the end of the AT state reaches a predetermined threshold value (hereinafter referred to as the number of ceiling games), the game shifts to the AT state. That is, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state or when the number of digested games in the normal state reaches the number of ceiling games, the game shifts to the AT state and a predetermined number of AT games is given. In the AT state, an AT additional lottery is performed in which the number of AT games is added, and when the AT additional lottery is won, a predetermined number of AT games are added. On the other hand, in the AT state, when all the assigned AT games are exhausted, the AT state ends and the normal state is entered.

<Operation of slot machine>
Next, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, with reference to FIG. 4, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

When the power is turned on to the slot machine 100, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the operation is permitted to the WDT 314, and the initial setting is performed. Set the value, etc.

In step S102, the medal insertion / start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, it is determined by detection by the sensor circuit 320 whether or not there is an electronic medal insertion operation by the bet buttons 130 to 132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141, and when the insertion operation is performed. Turns on the winning line indicator lamp 120 according to the number of inserted medals. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a medal insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted to the first sub-control unit 400. If the player wins the re-game combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals.

Further, a check as to whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated is performed based on the detection of the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start operation has been performed, the number of inserted medals is determined and the first sub-control unit 400 determines. On the other hand, preparations are made to send a start lever reception command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, a valid winning line is determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number value generation circuit 316 is acquired.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for the winning combination is performed. In the internal lottery process of the winning combination, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and the internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value acquired in step S104. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the condition device (flag) for the internally winning combination is activated (the flag of the winning combination is turned ON). Further, in step S105, preparations are made for transmitting an internal winning command indicating the result of the winning combination internal lottery to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, when the watermelon is internally won, an internal winning command indicating that the watermelon has been internally won is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the result of the internal lottery for the winning combination is lost (the winning combination). In the case of non-winning), an internal winning command indicating a loss is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the result of the winning combination internal lottery in step S105. The operation conditions are also set for the reel stop data of the winning combination whose stop operation order is questioned, and when the reel stop data corresponding to these is selected, the operation conditions are also set.

In step S107, a reel rotation start process for starting the rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is executed based on the start operation.

In step S108, the reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is input in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Refer to it and stop any of the reels 110 to 112 according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop data. If all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S109. In this step S108, the stop button reception command relating to the stop buttons 137 to 139 for which the stop operation was performed for each stop operation (specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command and the second stop operation). Prepare to send the stop button reception 2 command for the third stop operation, and the stop button reception 3 command for the third stop operation) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel. Reel stop command related to the stop position (specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop for the third stop operation) 3 Command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, the winning determination process is performed. In the winning judgment process, the winning judgment of the symbol stopped by pressing the stop buttons 137 to 139 is performed, and when the symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, the winning is won. It is judged that the role has been won. For example, if "watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the watermelon has won a prize. Further, in this step S109, preparations are made for transmitting a display determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, the medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. Further, in step S110, preparations are made for transmitting a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, the game state control process is performed. In this game state control process, control for shifting the game state is performed. For example, in the case of a BB prize, preparations are made so that the BB game can be started from the next time. Further, in this step S111, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control unit 400.

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-mentioned process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 5) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger for the main control unit timer interrupt. The process is started in a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit.

In step S203, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S205, the timer update process is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in each time unit.

In step S206, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S207, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, the error is detected. (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S211. When the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each of the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 6A.

When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing the internal winning information, which is information representing the result of the internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state.

In step S302, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S303.

In step S303, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, the effect control process (details will be described later) is performed. Here, the production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing a process such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S305, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, the lamp control process is performed based on the process result of step S305. For example, if there is an instruction to various lamps 420 in the effect data read in step S305, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the effect data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 424.

In step S309, information output processing for setting to send a command to the second sub-control unit 500 is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S305, a setting to output this control command is made, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 6A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S502, a command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, an effect random number value is updated, and the like are performed.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. Note that FIG. 7A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 500.

First, in step S3001 of FIG. 7A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S601. In this initialization process, input / output port initial setting, initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, initialization process of the storage area in the VRAM 518, and the like are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S605, the effect control process is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S604, the process corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading the effect data for controlling the image of the background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading out the production data from ROM 506 other than this is included, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S606, image control processing (details will be described later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S605, the image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding a display image (notification image, background image) is executed. When this image control process is completed, the process returns to step S602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 7A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S802, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process of step S4006 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (d). The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 536 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on a table such as position information, and then an image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S903. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

In step S903, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transparency, etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of drawing the image is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S906, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for to be entered.

In step S906, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Playability>
Next, the playability common to the following Examples C1 to C5 will be described. In the present embodiment, the two-card betting game is more disadvantageous to the player than the three-card betting game. Here, the disadvantage means that, specifically, in the two-card betting game, the process for granting the privilege advantageous to the player is not executed. For example, in a two-card betting game, an AT lottery for granting the number of AT games executed in the normal state, an AT additional lottery for granting the number of additional AT games in the AT state, a lottery for shifting to a special zone, etc. It may not be executed, or in the two-card betting game, the number of games in the normal state after the end of the AT state may not be updated. For this reason, in the two-card betting game, "two-card betting notification", which is an effect of notifying that the two-card betting game is performed, is executed to alert the player that the game is being executed with a demerit. ing. As described above, the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is a game table on which a three-card betting game is recommended.

<Example C1>
First, with reference to FIG. 8, the production of the three-card betting game and the two-card betting game in Example C1 will be described. FIG. 8A shows an example of the effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the three-card betting game, and FIG. 8B is displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the two-card bet game. An example of the production is shown.

As shown in FIG. 8A, in the three-card betting game, the game number display d1 is updated based on the start lever operation while the predetermined effect image is displayed. For example, the predetermined effect image may be an effect that reflects the result of the winning combination internal lottery process. The game number display d1 is an effect of displaying the number of games in the normal state after the AT state ends. In the C1 embodiment, as described above, when the number of games in the normal state after the end of the AT state reaches the number of ceiling games, the game is configured to shift to the AT state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the two-card betting game, the two-card betting notification d2 is started to be displayed based on the start lever operation. As described above, the two-card bet notification d2 is a warning effect for notifying that the two-card betting game is a two-card betting game. The two-card bet notification d2 is, for example, an image effect displayed on the entire surface of the effect image display device 157, and is displayed from the start lever operation to the third stop operation. That is, while the two-card bet notification d2 is displayed, the predetermined effect image is not displayed. Further, after the third stop operation, the original effect image is returned, but the game number display d1 is not updated. This is because the number of games in the normal state is not updated in the two-card betting game. The game number display d1 is updated when the start lever operation is performed in the next three-card betting game.

In the example shown in FIG. 8A, the two-card bet notification d2 was executed from the start lever operation to the third stop operation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first bet notification d2 is executed after the start lever operation. It may be continued until the stop operation or the second stop operation, or may be continued until the bet operation of the next game. Further, the two-card bet notification d2 may be continued for a predetermined time from the start lever operation.

In the following, the case where the start lever operation is performed in the 3-card betting game is referred to as "when the 3-card betting game is executed", and the case where the start lever operation is performed in the 2-card betting game is referred to as "2-card betting". When you play a game. "

FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an outline of the effect when a three-card betting game is executed after the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 is executed in the normal state. Specifically, FIG. 9 (a) is a time chart of the game progress when the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 is executed in the normal state and then the three-card betting game is executed, and FIG. 9 (b) is the pseudo-bonus confirmation in the normal state. An example of the effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 when the three-card betting game is executed after the notification d3 is executed is shown. The pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 is, for example, an image effect displayed on the effect image display device 157, and is an effect of notifying the grant of a privilege. Specifically, the pseudo-bonus is the AT state of 30 games, and the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 is an effect suggesting that the state shifts to the AT state.

In the C1 embodiment, when the three-card betting game is executed in the next game after the pseudo bonus confirmation notification d3 is executed, the slot machine 100 executes the reel action based on the start lever operation. The reel action is an effect relating to the rotation and stop of the reels 110 to 112. The slot machine 100 displays a special symbol combination (for example, a bonus symbol) on the effective line based on the execution of the reel action, and executes the symbol alignment notification d4. The symbol matching notification d4 is, for example, an image effect displayed on the effect image display device 157, and is an effect of notifying that a special symbol combination has been prepared by a reel action, that is, notifying that a privilege has been given. ..

Next, the slot machine 100 starts the rotation of the reels 110 to 112, and executes the effect d5 indicating that the AT state has been entered. The effect d5 indicating the transition to the AT state is, for example, an image effect displayed on the effect image display device 157, and when the push order combination is internally won in the game, the operation navigation indicating the order of the stop operations. Display the image of.

FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an outline of an effect when a two-card betting game is executed after executing the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 in a normal state. Specifically, FIG. 10A is a time chart of the game progress when the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 is executed in the normal state, the two-card betting game is first executed, and then the three-card betting game is executed. (B) is an example of the effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 when the pseudo bonus confirmation notification d3 is executed in the normal state, the two-card bet game is first executed, and then the three-card bet game is executed. Shows.

In the C1 embodiment, when the two-card betting game is executed in the next game after the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 is executed, the slot machine 100 does not execute the reel action based on the start lever operation, and the two-card betting notification d2. Is to start executing.

As described above, in the embodiment C1, the reel action is reserved and set in the game in which the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 is executed, but is not executed when the two-card betting game is executed in the next game. It is designed to be executed when a three-card betting game is executed.

Therefore, when the three-card betting game is executed after the two-card betting game is executed, the slot machine 100 executes the reel action based on the start lever operation. Based on the execution of the reel action, the slot machine 100 displays a special symbol combination (for example, a bonus symbol) on the effective line, ends the two-card bet notification d2, and executes the symbol matching notification d4. That is, as shown in FIG. 10B, the two-card bet notification d2 is continuously executed from the start lever operation of the two-card bet game to the execution of the symbol alignment notification d4 of the three-card bet game. Will be done.

As described above, in the embodiment C1, there is a period in which the two-card bet notification d2 is executed even in the three-card bet game, and the two-card bet executed in the previous two-card bet game in the three-card bet game is executed. After the effect of notifying is continuously executed for a part of the period (in Example C1, the period immediately before the symbol matching is notified by the reel action), the effect of notifying the privilege grant is executed. ..

After the reel action is completed, the slot machine 100 starts the rotation of the reels 110 to 112, and executes the effect d5 indicating that the AT state has been entered.

As described above, according to the embodiment C1, since the notification of the two-card betting game is executed in the game for notifying the privilege grant, which is a production that attracts a high degree of attention of the player, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the two-card betting game. ..

In Example C1, the case of a pseudo-bonus was given as an example in which the privilege is given, but in other cases, for example, when an AT game is added, or when the number of acquired cards is added, the special zone is used. Of course, it may be applied in the case of rushing.

Further, in the embodiment C1, the reel action is executed when the three-card betting game is executed after the pseudo bonus confirmation notification d3 is executed, but the effect to be executed is not limited to this. For example, a freeze effect may be executed. The freeze effect is an effect that does not accept the operation of the player for a predetermined time, for example, an effect that the reels 110 to 112 do not start rotating for a predetermined time even if the start lever is operated.

Further, in the embodiment C1, one type of two-card bet notification d2 is executed, but a plurality of types of two-card bet notification d2 are provided, and any one of the two-card bet notification d2 is executed according to the situation. May be good.

Further, the two-card bet notification d2 of the embodiment C1 is only an image effect, and the audio effect that outputs the sound is not executed, but the sound effect may be executed.

<Example C2>
Next, the continuous production of Example C2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 (a) is a time chart showing the flow of continuous production in the three-card betting game, and FIG. 11 (b) shows the production mode of the continuous production displayed on the production image display device 157 in the three-card betting game. An example is shown.

The continuous effect d10 executed in the embodiment C2 is an effect developed over three games, and is an effect expected to give a privilege. Specifically, the continuous effect d10 is executed in the introduction effect d11 executed in the first game of the continuous effect, the drinking comparison effect d12 executed in the second game of the continuous effect, and the third game of the continuous effect. The result effect d13 and the result effect d13. Note that FIG. 11 shows an aspect of continuous effect as an image display effect, but the continuous effect also includes a sound effect for outputting sound and a lamp effect accompanied by lighting of a lamp.

In the first game of the continuous effect d10, as shown in FIG. 11B, in the three-card betting game, for example, the game number display d1 is updated based on the start lever operation. Further, in the result effect d13 of the third game of the continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 11B, the result (win or lose) of the drink comparison effect d12 is displayed, and if the drink comparison is won, the privilege is given. It is supposed to be granted. For example, when the continuous effect d10 is executed in the normal state, the privilege may be a transition to the AT state.

FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating another example of the continuous effect in the embodiment C2. FIG. 12A is a time chart showing the flow of continuous production when a 3-card betting game and a 2-card betting game are mixed, and FIG. 12B is a time chart showing a flow of a continuous production, and FIG. 12B is a mixture of a 3-card betting game and a 2-card betting game. In this case, an example of the effect mode of the continuous effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 is shown. Specifically, FIG. 12 shows, assuming that the game in which the continuous production is started is the first game, the first game and the fourth game are three-card betting games, and the second and third games are two-card betting games. It shows the case when it is executed.

Since the first game in which the continuous production is started is the same as the example shown in FIG. 11, the description thereof will be omitted. The second game is a two-card betting game, but the slot machine 100 executes the drinking comparison effect d12 as in FIG. That is, the slot machine 100 does not execute the two-card bet notification d2 even in the two-card bet game, and develops a continuous effect. However, in the drinking comparison effect d12 in this case, no sound is output and only the effect image is displayed. This is to give a penalty to the player who has played the two-card betting game.

As a penalty, the example of the continuous production shown in FIG. 12 shows a case where the player wins in the drinking comparison effect d12 and shifts to the AT state. The player has suffered a loss for the game. Further, although not shown in FIG. 12, if the game is defeated in the drinking comparison effect d12 and the normal state continues, the number of games in the normal state is not updated as described above, so the number of medals inserted is simply used. Not only will it be lost, but the number of ceiling games will be delayed.

Next, the slot machine 100 executes the two-card bet notification d2 in the third game. That is, when two betting games are executed in succession for two games, the continuous production is executed in the first game, and the two-card betting notification d2 is executed in the second game. Specifically, the two-card bet notification d2 is executed from the operation of the start lever in the third game to the operation of the third stop. That is, the continuous production is not executed in the third game.

Next, in the fourth game, the slot machine 100 executes the result effect d13 corresponding to the third game of the continuous effect. When the two-card betting game is executed while the continuous production is being executed in this way, the two-card betting notification d2 for calling attention is executed, and as a result, the period for executing the continuous production is extended.

In the two-card betting game, as described above, the number of games in the normal state after the end of the AT state is not updated. We are trying to make adjustments to prolong the period of fanning the player.

As described above, according to the second embodiment, since the notification of the two-card betting game is executed during the execution of the continuous production, the player can be given a sense of discomfort, and the attention of the two-card betting game can be emphasized.

FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the continuous effect in the embodiment C2. FIG. 13 shows a modified example of the effect mode of the continuous effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 when the three-card bet game and the two-card bet game are mixed.

In the example shown in FIG. 12, the slot machine 100 executes the two-card bet notification d2 in the third game, but the period for executing the two-card bet notification d2 is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 13, the slot machine 100 may execute the two-card bet notification d2 after the second stop operation of the second game. That is, a part of the drinking comparison effect d12 may be executed in a part of the period of the second game, and then the two-card bet notification d2 may be executed in the remaining period of the second game. In this case, there is a part in which the drinking comparison effect d12 is not executed in the second game.

As described above, according to the modified example of the embodiment C2, since the continuous effect d10 and the two-card bet notification d2 coexist in one game, it is possible to further emphasize the attention of the two-card bet game.

<Example C3>
Next, the two-card bet notification d2 executed in the embodiment C3 will be described with reference to FIG. In the embodiment C3, there are two types of two-card bet notification d2. One is a two-card bet notification d2A executed in a state where the bonus role has not been internally won and there is no possibility of winning the bonus role (hereinafter referred to as the first state), and the other is. This is a two-card bet notification d2B executed in a state in which the bonus combination is internally won and there is a possibility of winning the bonus combination (hereinafter referred to as the second state).

FIG. 14 (b) shows an example of the display mode of the two-card bet notification d2A displayed on the effect image display device 157, and FIG. 14 (c) shows the two-sheet bet displayed on the effect image display device 157. An example of the display mode of the notification d2B is shown. The two-card bet notification d2A and the two-card bet notification d2B are at least partially the same (for example, the display wording "! Two-card betting game in progress!"), But the display mode, color, and size are displayed. , The display area, etc. are different. For example, the two-card bet notification d2A may be an effect image displayed over the entire screen, and the two-sheet bet notification d2B may be an effect image displayed in a part of the screen. Further, the colors of the background images may be different while the contents of the background images of the two-card bet notification d2A and the two-card bet notification d2B are the same.

By the way, in the embodiment C3, if a winning combination is won in a two-card betting game, the game shifts to a disadvantageous bonus game. The disadvantageous bonus game is, for example, if the AT lottery is not executed during the bonus game, the AT additional lottery is not executed during the bonus game, or the bonus game ends with the specified number of medals paid out, the number of medals paid out becomes the specified number. It is a bonus game that requires a large number of medals to be inserted before reaching it, the medals do not increase substantially, and a large number of digestion games are required to finish the bonus game.

Therefore, when the two-card bet notification d2B is executed in the second state in the second embodiment, the chance combination notification d21 is executed in order to avoid the bonus combination winning, as shown in FIG. 14 (c). The chance combination notification d21 is one of the above-mentioned operation navigations.

Here, to explain the chance combination notification d21, when the chance combination (specifically, cherry, watermelon) is internally won in the AT state, the slot machine 100 notifies the chance combination as shown in FIG. 14A. Execute d21. The chance combination notification d21 is a production image suggesting that the chance combination has been internally elected. By recognizing this effect image, the player performs a stop operation aiming at the cherry pattern. As a result, it is configured to facilitate the winning of the chance role.

On the other hand, the chance combination notification d21, which is executed together with the two-card bet notification d2B in the second state, is also executed in order to make the player perform a stop operation aiming at the cherry symbol. This is because the player aims at the cherry pattern by recognizing the effect image of the chance combination notification d21 as in the case of FIG. 14A. As a result of this stop operation, it is possible to avoid winning the bonus role.

FIG. 15 (a) is a diagram showing a transition of the effect mode of the effect image display device 157 when the two-card betting game is executed in the first state, and FIG. 15 (b) is a diagram showing the transition of the effect mode in the second state. It is a figure which shows the transition of the effect mode of the effect image display device 157 when the piece betting game is executed. In either case, from the start lever operation of the two-card betting game to the third stop operation, the two-card bet notification d2 (in the first state, the two-card bet notification d2A, in the second state, the two-card bet notification d2A). , 2 bet notification d2B) is displayed.

While the two-card bet notification d2 is being displayed, the original effect image (hereinafter referred to as a background image) is not displayed on the effect image display device 157.

As described above, according to the embodiment C3, since the two-card bet notification d2B can be conspicuous in the two-card betting game that avoids winning the bonus role, the game that requires special attention in the two-card betting game is emphasized and notified. be able to.

FIG. 16A shows an image of a modified example of the two-card bet notification d2A. As shown in FIG. 16A, the background image may be left and the two bet notification d2A may be displayed on the background image. That is, it is not necessary to display the two-card bet notification d2A over the entire screen of the effect image display device 157.

FIG. 16B shows an image of a modified example of the two-card bet notification d2B. As shown in FIG. 16B, the background image may be left and the two-card bet notification d2B and the chance combination notification d21 may be displayed on the background image.

Further, as in the case of adopting the two-card bet notification d2A shown in FIG. 16A and the two-card bet notification d2B shown in FIG. 16B, the contents (wording, color, size, etc.) of both notification images are used. May be the same, and the display positions of the two may be different.

The two-card bet notification d2B as shown in FIG. 16C may be adopted. That is, if a part of the wording of the two-card bet notification d2A and the two-card bet notification d2B are the same (for example, two), the wording of both may not be completely the same.

<Example C4>
Next, the button effect of Example C4 will be described with reference to FIG. In the embodiment C4, a button effect may be executed in a three-card betting game in a normal state. The button effect is an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 192 after the third stop operation, and when the operation to the effect button 192 is performed, the result suggesting that the privilege is won or not won is displayed. be. In addition, the privilege grant in Example C4 specifically means the transition to the AT state.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a transition of the effect mode of the effect image display device 157 when the button effect is executed in the three-card betting game.

As shown in FIG. 17, the button effect includes a start display d30, an operation promotion display d31, and an operation response display d32. The start display d30 is a display for notifying the start of the button effect, and is displayed after the third stop operation. The operation promotion display d31 is displayed after the end of the start display d30 after the third stop operation, and is a display prompting the operation of the effect button 192. The operation response display d32 is a display suggesting the result of granting the privilege based on the operation of the effect button 192. The operation response display d32 includes an operation response display d32A that suggests winning of the privilege grant and an operation response display d32B that suggests that the privilege grant is not won. If the effect button 192 is not operated, the operation response display d32 is not executed.

When the operation response display d32A is displayed in the button effect, that is, when the privilege is given, the AT start displaying the wording indicating the privilege grant (for example, "bonus confirmation") based on the start lever operation of the next game. Image d33A is displayed.

On the other hand, when the operation response display d32B is displayed in the button effect, that is, when the privilege is not given, the normal image d33B, which is the background image in the normal state, is displayed based on the start lever operation of the next game.

FIG. 18 shows a change in the effect mode of the effect image display device 157 when one game is executed in the next game after the button effect is started in the three-card bet game, and then the three-card bet game is executed. It is a figure which shows. Note that FIG. 18 shows an example in which the effect button 192 is not operated in the button effect and the privilege is given.

When the next game in which the operation promotion display d31 is displayed in the button effect is a two-card betting game, the slot machine 100 executes the two-card betting notification d2 based on the start lever operation. The two-card bet notification d2 is displayed from the start lever operation to the third stop operation.

Next, the slot machine 100 executes the start display d30 after the third stop operation of the two-card betting game. The start display d30 is continuously displayed until the start lever operation of the three-card betting game, which is the next game.

Next, the slot machine 100 displays the AT start image d33A based on the start lever operation of the three-card betting game, which is the next game. That is, the start display d30 is continuously displayed until the start lever operation of the three-card betting game after the third stop operation of the two-card betting game, but after that, the operation promotion display d31 and the operation response display d32A are not displayed. , AT start image d33A is suddenly displayed.

As described above, in the embodiment C4, the start display d30 is continuously displayed until the start lever operation of the three-card betting game after the third stop operation of the two-card betting game, but the operation promotion display d31 is not executed. Even if the effect button 192 is operated during the period from the third stop operation of the two-card bet game to the start lever operation of the three-card bet game, the operation on the effect button 192 is not effective and the operation response. The display d32 is also not executed.

As described above, according to the embodiment C4, when the next game after the button effect is executed is a two-card bet game, even if the three-card bet game is executed thereafter, a part of the button effect is not executed. It is possible to emphasize the attention of the two-card betting game.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the two-card bet notification d2 was executed from the start lever operation of the two-card bet game to the third stop operation, but the two-card bet notification d2 was operated by the start lever of the two-card bet game. You may execute up to the third stop operation of the three-card betting game. Further, it is not necessary to execute the two-card bet notification d2 in the two-card bet game. That is, a configuration without the second two-card bet notification d2 shown in FIG. 18 may be adopted so that a part of the button effect is not executed. Not executing a part of the button effect functions as a warning notification that the game is a two-card betting game.

Further, in the embodiment C4, the operation response display d32 is not executed when the next game after the button effect is executed is the two-card betting game, but the operation response display d32 is executed after the button effect is executed. The case of not doing so is not limited to this. For example, it may be applied to the case of opening the door (for example, the case where the clerk opens the door or the case of fraudulent activity), and the operation response display d32 may not be executed.

Further, when a plurality of types of button effects having different execution triggers are provided, the operation response display d32 may not be executed when the two-card betting game is executed for any of the button effects. Of the plurality of types of button effects, some of the button effects may execute the operation response display d32 in the subsequent three-card bet game even when the two-card bet game is executed.

<Example C5>
In the fifth embodiment, the notification period of the two-card bet notification d2 will be described in detail. FIG. 19 (a) is a time chart showing the notification period of the two-card bet notification d2 in the two-card betting game, and FIG. 19 (b) shows the effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the two-card bet game. It is a figure which shows an example of the production mode.

Although it has been described that the two-card bet notification d2 is executed from the start lever operation of the two-card bet game to the third stop operation in the above Examples C1 to C4, to be exact, FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (b). As shown in the above, the two-card bet notification d2 is executed from the time when a predetermined time elapses to the third stop operation after the start lever operation. After the third stop operation, an image of the effect executed before the start lever operation of the two-card bet game, that is, an image of the effect displayed in the three-card bet game (hereinafter referred to as a normal image) is displayed. To. Since the two-card bet notification d2 is displayed over the entire screen of the effect image display device 157, when the two-card bet notification d2 is executed, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the normal image.

In the two-card betting game in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 19B, the game number display d1 is performed, but the game number display d1 is not updated. The number of games shown in the number of games display d1 is the number of games in the normal state after the end of the AT state, and when the number of games reaches the number of ceiling games (for example, 700 games), the AT state is given as a pseudo bonus. The migration takes place. Therefore, the game number display d1 that is not updated can be said to be a penalty notification regarding the granting of benefits to the player.

Here, the notification timings of the game number display d1 and the two-card bet notification d2 in the two-card bet game are different. Specifically, in the two-card betting game, after the start lever is operated, the game number display d1 is first executed, and then the two-card betting notification d2 is executed. As a result, the player has the effect of easily recognizing the penalty notification.

As shown in FIG. 19B, the display area of the two-card bet notification d2 is configured to be larger than the display area of the game number display d1.

As described above, according to the embodiment C5, in the two-card betting game, the execution timings of the two-card betting notification d2 for notifying that the two-card betting game is used and the game number notification d1 for notifying the number of games in the normal state are different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking each notification and to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game has been given a penalty.

Next, a modified example of the notification period of the two-card bet notification d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 20 (a) and 20 (b) are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode displayed on the effect image display device 157 in a two-card betting game.

As shown in FIG. 20A, the two-card bet notification d2 is executed from the time after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start lever operation of the two-card bet game until the three-card bet is made in the next game. You may.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20B, the two-card bet notification d2 may be started immediately after the start lever operation of the two-card bet game and may end when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start lever operation. After that, as shown in FIG. 20B, the game number display d1A (for example, the display area, display position, color, etc. are different from the game number display d1) that emphasizes that the number of games has not been changed is stopped for the third time. The operation may be executed. That is, in the two-card betting game, after the start lever is operated, the two-card betting notification d2 may be executed first, and then the game number display d1 may be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20B, the two-card bet notification d2 may be executed again from the third stop operation until the three-card bet is made in the next game. That is, the two-card bet notification d2 and the game number display d1 may be repeatedly displayed.

Next, a modified example of the display area of the two-card bet notification d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 21 (a). FIG. 21A is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode displayed on the effect image display device 157 in a two-card betting game.

As shown in FIG. 21A, the two-card bet notification d2 may be displayed on a part of the screen of the effect image display device 157. In this case, the normal image and the number of games display d1 may be displayed in the display area outside the two-card bet notification d2. That is, the two bet notification d2 and the game number display d1 may be simultaneously displayed in different display areas of one display device. Further, in this case, the display area of the two-card bet notification d2 and the display area of the game number display d1 may be displayed so as to overlap each other.

Next, a modified example in which the two-card bet notification d2 and the game number display d12 are displayed on different display devices will be described with reference to FIG. 21 (b). FIG. 21B is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode displayed on the effect image display device 157 and the sub effect image display device 195 in the two-card betting game.

FIG. 21B shows a modified example in which the two-card bet notification d2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 and the game number display d1 is displayed on the sub effect image display device 195. In this case, during the period from the start lever operation to the third stop operation of the two-card betting game, the highlighted game number display d1A (for example, the color and wording are different from the game number display d1) is displayed as a sub-effect image display device 195. It may be displayed in.

Although the execution end timings of the game number display d1 and the two-card bet notification d2 are different as shown in FIGS. 19 to 21, they may be the same.

Although the embodiments C1 to C5 of the present embodiment have been described above, the embodiments of the present embodiment are not limited to this, and each embodiment may be combined and configured.

<Summary of embodiments>
(1) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, Example C1),
It is possible to set any bet number among a plurality of bets including a first bet number (for example, 3 bets) and a second bet number less than the first bet number (for example, 2 bets). Bet number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion port 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception process S102).
A game execution means (for example, a main control unit 300, a main control unit main process, a main control unit timer interrupt process) that executes a game based on the bet number set by the bet number setting means.
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, first sub control unit main process, second sub control unit). Main processing etc.) and
It is a game table equipped with
The game table
A game in which the first bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "first bet number game") is recommended.
The effect means is the first to notify that the game is the second bet number game in the game in which the second bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "second bet number game"). It is a means that can execute a production (for example, a two-card bet notification d2).
The effect means is a case where the first effect is executed for at least a part of a period of a certain first bet number game (hereinafter, referred to as "predetermined game") (hereinafter, "first case"). (For example, FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b)),
This is the first basic configuration.

According to this first basic configuration, in a certain first bet number game, the first effect of notifying that the bet number is the second bet may be executed, so that the second bet number game may be executed. Attention can be emphasized.

In the first basic configuration above,
The effect means is a means capable of performing a second effect (for example, symbol alignment notification d4) in the predetermined game.
In the first case, the effect means executes the second effect after executing the first effect (for example, FIGS. 10A and 10B).
This is the first suitable configuration.

According to the first preferred configuration, the attention of the second bet number game can be emphasized by continuously executing the first effect and the second effect.

In the first preferred configuration above
The predetermined game is a game involving a reel action, and is a game.
The effect means executes the first effect during the execution of the reel action in the predetermined game, and starts executing the second effect in connection with the end of the reel action (for example, FIG. 10 (for example, FIG. 10). a) and (b)),
This is the second preferred configuration.

According to the second preferred configuration, the execution of the reel action can emphasize the alerting of the second bet number game.

In the second preferred configuration above
The reel action is reserved for execution in a game prior to the predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as "reserved game").
When the game set as the reserved game is the second bet number game, the reel action is not executed, and then the game that becomes the first bet number game is the reel action in the predetermined game. Is executed (eg, FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b)),
This is the third preferred configuration.

According to the third preferred configuration, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the second bet number game and notify that the first bet number game is the recommended game.

In the first basic configuration, the first suitable configuration, the second suitable configuration, or the third suitable configuration.
The predetermined game is a game for notifying a player of advantageous benefits (for example, transition from a normal state to an AT state, addition of an AT game, etc.).
This is the fourth preferred configuration.

According to the fourth preferred configuration, it is possible to call attention to the second bet number game in a game that is important to the player.

In the first basic configuration, the first suitable configuration, the second suitable configuration, the third suitable configuration, or the fourth suitable configuration.
The first case occurs in at least a part of the game immediately after the second bet number game (for example, FIGS. 10A and 10B).
This is the fifth preferred configuration.

According to the fifth preferred configuration, since the first effect is executed immediately after the second bet number game, it can be clearly understood that it is a reminder for the second bet number game.

(2) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, Example C2),
It is possible to set any bet number among a plurality of bets including a first bet number (for example, 3 bets) and a second bet number less than the first bet number (for example, 2 bets). Bet number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion port 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception process S102).
A game execution means (for example, a main control unit 300, a main control unit main process, a main control unit timer interrupt process) that executes a game based on the bet number set by the bet number setting means.
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, first sub control unit main process, second sub control unit). Main processing etc.) and
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is recommended to be a game in which the first bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "first bet number game").
The effect means is a first effect of notifying that the second bet number is the second bet number in a game in which the second bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "second bet number game"). (For example, a two-card bet notification d2) is a means that can be executed.
The effect means executes a second effect (for example, a drink comparison effect d12 of the continuous effect d10) during at least a part of the period of a certain second bet number game (hereinafter, referred to as “predetermined game”). (Hereinafter referred to as "first case") (for example, FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b)).
This is the second basic configuration.

According to this second basic configuration, since the second effect may be executed in a certain second bet number game, the attention of the second bet number game can be emphasized.

In the second basic configuration above,
The effect means is a means capable of performing a continuous effect (for example, continuous effect d10) over a plurality of games (for example, three games).
The game immediately before the predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as “immediately before game”) is the first bet number game.
When the immediately preceding game and the predetermined game are performed during the execution of the continuous effect, the effect means executes a part of the continuous effect over a plurality of games in the immediately preceding game, and the predetermined game. It is a means for executing the second effect as a part of the continuous effect for at least a part of the period (for example, FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b)).
This is the sixth preferred configuration.

According to the sixth preferred configuration, the second effect may be executed during the execution of the continuous effect, so that the attention of the second bet number game can be emphasized.

In the sixth preferred configuration above,
When the game next to the predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as "next game") is the second bet number game, the effect means executes the first effect in the next game, and the effect is described. It is a means that does not execute the second effect (for example, FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b)).
This is the seventh preferred configuration.

According to the seventh preferred configuration, since the first effect is executed and the second effect is not executed during the continuous effect, the attention of the second bet number game can be emphasized.

In the sixth preferred configuration or the seventh preferred configuration, the continuous effect is an effect including at least a display effect for displaying an image and an audio effect for outputting sound.
In the first case, the effect means is a means for executing the display effect and not executing the voice effect during a part of the continuous effect.
This is the eighth preferred configuration.

According to the eighth preferred configuration, since the voice effect is not executed during the continuous effect, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the second bet number game as a penalty.

Benefits advantageous to the player in the second basic configuration, the sixth preferred configuration, the seventh preferred configuration, or the eighth preferred configuration (eg, transition from normal state to AT state, AT game). It is provided with a privilege-related processing means (for example, a main control unit 300, etc.) that executes a process related to (addition, etc.) (hereinafter referred to as a privilege-related process).
In the first case, the privilege-related processing means is a means that does not execute the privilege-related processing in the predetermined game.
This is the ninth preferred configuration.

According to the ninth preferred configuration, in the first case, since the privilege-related processing is not executed, it is possible to call attention to the second bet number game.

(3) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, Example C3),
It is possible to set any bet number among a plurality of bets including a first bet number (for example, 3 bets) and a second bet number less than the first bet number (for example, 2 bets). Bet number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion port 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception process S102).
A game execution means (for example, a main control unit 300, a main control unit main process, a main control unit timer interrupt process) that executes a game based on the bet number set by the bet number setting means.
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, first sub control unit main process, second sub control unit). Main processing etc.) and
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is recommended to be a game in which the first bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "first bet number game").
The effect means is the first to notify that the game is the second bet number game in the game in which the second bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "second bet number game"). It is a means capable of executing the effect (for example, the two-card bet notification d2A) or the second effect (for example, the two-card bet notification d2B) for notifying that the second bet number game is used.
The first effect is at least partially the same as the second effect (for example, FIGS. 14 and 15).
This is the third basic configuration.

According to this third basic configuration, since the first effect or the second effect is executed in the second bet number game, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the second bet number game.

In the third basic configuration above,
In the case of the second betting number game and the first state (for example, a state in which the bonus combination cannot be won), the effect means can execute the first effect.
In the case of the second betting number game and the second state (for example, a state in which a bonus combination can be won), the effect means can execute the second effect.
This is the tenth preferred configuration.

According to the tenth preferred configuration, since the first effect or the second effect is executed depending on the state of the second bet number game, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the second bet number game. can.

In the tenth preferred configuration above
The first effect and the second effect are display effects for displaying an image.
The first effect and the second effect are effects that are partially different in at least one of a display mode, a display area, a color, or a size.
This is the eleventh suitable configuration.

According to the eleventh preferred configuration, since the first effect and the second effect have different effect modes, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the second bet number game.

In the tenth preferred configuration or the eleventh preferred configuration.
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate,
An internal winning result determining means (for example, main control unit 300, winning combination internal lottery process S105) that determines the result of the internal winning based on the lottery information.
A winning determination means (for example, a main control unit 300, a winning determination process S109) that determines a winning based on the result of the internal winning result determining means and the stopping mode of the plurality of reels.
Equipped with
The first state is a state in which there is no possibility that a certain internal winning combination (for example, a bonus combination) will win in the second betting number game.
The second state is a state in which the certain internal winning combination (for example, a bonus combination) may win in the second betting number game.
If a player wins a certain internal winning combination in the second state, a game state that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, an AT lottery is not executed, the number of games is not updated, medals are not increased, or the like is a bonus game. ) Occurs,
This is the twelfth suitable configuration.

According to the twelfth preferred configuration, it is possible to emphasize a game that requires special attention in a two-card betting game.

(4) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, Example C4),
It is possible to set any bet number among a plurality of bets including a first bet number (for example, 3 bets) and a second bet number less than the first bet number (for example, 2 bets). Bet number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion port 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception process S102).
A game execution means (for example, a main control unit 300, a main control unit main process, a main control unit timer interrupt process) that executes a game based on the bet number set by the bet number setting means.
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, first sub control unit main process, second sub control unit). Main processing etc.) and
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is recommended to be a game in which the first bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "first bet number game").
The effect means is a means capable of executing the first effect (for example, a button effect) in the first bet number game.
The effect means is a game (hereinafter, "second game") in which the second bet number is set and executed from the next game (hereinafter, referred to as "next game") in which the first effect is started to be executed. When one or more games (hereinafter referred to as "bet number game") are executed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), it is a means for not executing a part of the first effect (for example, FIGS. 17 and 18). ),
This is the fourth basic configuration.

According to this fourth basic configuration
In the fourth basic configuration, by not executing a part of the first effect, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the second bet number game.

The first effect is an effect that suggests whether or not to shift to a gaming state (for example, AT state) that is advantageous to the player.
This is the thirteenth suitable configuration.

According to the thirteenth preferred configuration, some of the first effects that are advantageous to the player are not performed, so that the alerting of the second bet number game can be emphasized while giving a penalty.

In the thirteenth preferred configuration above
A predetermined operating means (for example, an effect button 192) provided at a position where the player can operate is provided.
The first effect is an operation promotion effect (for example, operation promotion display d31) that prompts an operation for the predetermined operation means, and an operation response effect (for example, an operation response) that is executed based on the operation in the operation promotion effect. It is a production including display d32) and.
In the first case, the effect means is a means that does not execute the operation response effect (for example, FIG. 18).
This is the 14th preferred configuration.

According to the fourteenth preferred configuration, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the second bet number game while giving a penalty that the operation response effect is not executed.

In the above 14th preferred configuration,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate,
A stop operation receiving means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that accepts a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels, and
Equipped with
The effect means is a means capable of executing a second effect (for example, a two-card bet notification d2) for notifying that the second bet number game is a part of the period of the second bet number game. can be,
In the first case, the effect means executes the second effect until the final stop operation (for example, a third stop operation) for the plurality of reels is received in the second bet number game. After the final stop operation, the first effect is executed, but the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect, which are part of the first effect, are not executed, and then the first bet. It is a means for notifying the result of whether or not to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player in several games (for example, FIG. 18).
This is the fifteenth suitable configuration.

According to the fifteenth preferred configuration, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the second bet number game while giving a penalty that the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect are not executed.

In the fifteenth preferred configuration above
The effect means is a means for executing the operation promotion effect after receiving the last stop operation in the first bet number game (for example, FIG. 17).
This is the 16th preferred configuration.

According to the sixteenth preferred configuration, the player's expectation can be improved after the final stop operation of the first bet number game.

(5) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, Example C5),
It is possible to set any bet number among a plurality of bets including a first bet number (for example, 3 bets) and a second bet number less than the first bet number (for example, 2 bets). Bet number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion port 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception process S102).
A game execution means (for example, a main control unit 300, a main control unit main process, a main control unit timer interrupt process) that executes a game based on the bet number set by the bet number setting means.
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, first sub control unit main process, second sub control unit). Main processing etc.) and
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is recommended to be a game in which the first bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "first bet number game").
The effect means is a game in which the second bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "second bet number game"), and the first effect regarding the penalty (for example, the game number display d1). , A second effect (for example, two-card bet notification d2) for notifying that the second bet number game is performed, and a means capable of executing the second effect.
The execution start timing of the first effect is different from the execution start timing of the second effect (for example, FIGS. 19 to 21).
This is the fifth basic configuration.

According to this fifth basic configuration, in the second bet number game, the execution start timing of the execution start timing of the first effect regarding the penalty and the second effect notifying that the second effect is the second bet number game is set. Since it is different, it is possible to notify that it is a penalty for the second bet number game and to call attention to the second bet number game from the next time onward.

In the fifth basic configuration above,
A game count updating means for updating the game count (for example, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, etc.) and
When the number of games updated by the game number update means reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of ceiling games), a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, transition from a normal state to an AT state) is given. Benefit granting means (for example, main control unit 300, etc.) and
Equipped with
The first effect is a notification effect (for example, game number display d1) for notifying the number of games.
The game number update means is a means for not updating the game number when the second bet number game is executed.
The effect means executes the first effect in which the number of games is not updated when the second bet number game is executed (for example, FIGS. 19 to 21).
This is the 17th preferred configuration.

According to the seventeenth preferred configuration, it can be clarified that it is a penalty for the second bet number game.

In the 17th preferred configuration above
A game start means (for example, a start lever 135, a main control unit 300) that accepts a game start operation is provided.
The game number update means is a means for updating the game number in connection with the game start operation.
In the second betting number game, the effect means is provided with a period during which the game start means does not update the number of games as the first effect after the game start operation is accepted. Performing the second effect (eg, FIGS. 19-21),
This is the 18th preferred configuration.

According to the eighteenth preferred configuration, the attention of the second bet number game can be emphasized by continuously executing the first effect and the second effect.

In the fifth basic configuration, the seventeenth preferred configuration, or the eighteenth preferred configuration.
The effect means is a means capable of executing the first effect using the first effect device (for example, effect image display device 157, sub effect image display device 195).
The effect means is a means capable of performing the second effect using a second effect device (for example, an effect image display device 157).
The first effect device and the second effect device are the same or different effect devices.
This is the 19th preferred configuration.

According to the nineteenth preferred configuration, the first effect and the second effect can be conspicuous.

In the fifth basic configuration, the seventeenth preferred configuration, the eighteenth preferred configuration, or the nineteenth preferred configuration.
It is equipped with a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) which are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven.
The effect means ends the second effect being executed after all the plurality of reels have stopped in the second bet number game.
This is the 20th preferred configuration.

According to the twentieth preferred configuration, the second effect is executed until all the reels are stopped, so that the second effect can be conspicuous.

<Other game consoles>
The slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, and the game medium in this case includes electronic data corresponding to medals, and is a game medium. Insertion is performed from a predetermined external device (an electronic storage device having a function of storing the number of rented medals electronically and a function of storing the number of medals won by winning an electronic method). , The input of the digitized data is included, and the payout of the game medium includes the output of the digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

[Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

In this embodiment, the two-card betting game adopts the game property which is a disadvantageous game as compared with the three-card betting game, and is based on the above-mentioned first embodiment (embodiments C1 to C5). Therefore, the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted. That is, in the following, only the configurations, functions, and processes different from those of the first embodiment will be described, and the same parts will be designated by the same reference numerals with respect to other configurations, functions, and processes, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Electricity>
FIG. 22 (a) is a time chart of the game progress when a power failure occurs while executing the two-card bet game after executing the three-card bet game in the normal state, and FIG. 22 (b). Is a diagram showing an example of an effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 when a power failure occurs while executing a two-card bet game after executing a three-card bet game in a normal state. .. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the 3-card betting game or the 2-card betting game is started based on the start lever operation.

In the two-card betting game, as shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b), the two-card bet notification d2 is started to be executed based on the start lever operation (see FIG. 8 (b)). If a power failure occurs while the two-card bet notification d2 is being executed, a blackout image (hereinafter referred to as a power failure image) d41 at the time of the power failure is displayed on the effect image display device 157. After that, when the power is restored, the power failure recovery notification d42 is started to be executed. The power failure recovery notification d42 is an effect indicating that the power has been restored from the power failure. The power failure recovery notification d42 is, for example, an image effect displayed on the entire surface of the effect image display device 157, and is a recovery image (for example, together with a character display) from after the power is restored until the start lever operation of the next game is performed. An image that displays the words "Return from the next game") is displayed.

FIG. 23 (a) is a time chart of the game progress when a power failure occurs while executing a two-card betting game after executing the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 in the normal state, and FIG. 23 (b). Is a diagram showing an example of an effect displayed on an effect image display device when a power failure occurs while a two-card betting game is being executed after the pseudo bonus confirmation notification d3 is executed in a normal state. In addition, in detail, both FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b) show the case where the three-card bet game is executed after the two-card bet game in which the power failure occurs. That is, FIG. 23 shows a case where a power failure occurs during the two-card betting game shown in FIG. 10 of Example C1.

In the present embodiment, as described in the embodiment C1, when the two-card betting game is executed in the next game after the pseudo bonus confirmation notification d3 is executed, the slot machine 100 performs a reel action based on the start lever operation. The two-card bet notification d2 is started to be executed without being executed. Then, if a power failure occurs during the execution of the two-card bet notification d2, the power failure image d41 is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and if the power is restored thereafter, the power failure recovery notification d42 is displayed. Is executed and the restored image is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

Next, when a three-card betting game is executed as the next game, the slot machine 100 executes a reel action based on the start lever operation. The slot machine 100 stops and displays a special symbol combination (for example, a bonus symbol) on the valid line based on the execution of the reel action.

On the other hand, in the effect image display device 157, the restored image started to be displayed after the power is restored is continuously displayed even when the three-card betting game is started. That is, the effect image display device 157 displays the restoration image d42 even during the reel action.

Next, the slot machine 100 in which the reels 110 to 112 are temporarily stopped starts the rotation of the reels 110 to 112, and executes the effect d5 indicating that the AT state has been entered. That is, in the effect image display device 157, the restoration image is displayed from the reel action until the reels 110 to 112 are temporarily stopped and then the reel rotation start is started, and the image of the effect d5 is displayed based on the reel rotation start. Is displayed.

In this way, when a power failure occurs while executing a two-card betting game after executing the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 in the normal state, the next game of this two-card betting game is referred to as a three-card betting game. If so, the reel action is executed in the three-card betting game of the next game, and the special symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the valid line. However, as in the case of FIG. 10 of the embodiment C1, the image of the symbol alignment notification d4 is Do not show.

This is because the event of power failure is far more important than the event of betting two cards (for example, the risk of fraudulent activity), so the recovery image is displayed for a long time and the recovery image is restored to the production image during the game. It is the one that delayed the timing to do.

FIG. 24 shows a two-card betting game, a three-card betting game (hereinafter referred to as the first three-card betting game), and a three-card betting game (hereinafter referred to as the second three-card betting game) after executing the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 in the normal state. It is a time chart of the game progress when a power failure occurs while executing the first three betting games in sequence (referred to as a betting game), and FIG. 25 is a pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 in a normal state. When a power failure occurs while executing the two-card betting game, the first three-card betting game, the second three-card betting game in sequence, and the first three-card betting game. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect displayed on the effect image display device 157. That is, it shows a case where a power failure occurs during the reel action of the three-card betting game shown in FIG. 10 of Example C1.

In the present embodiment, as described in the embodiment C1, when the two-card betting game is executed in the next game after the pseudo bonus confirmation notification d3 is executed, the slot machine 100 performs a reel action based on the start lever operation. The two-card bet notification d2 is started to be executed without being executed.

Next, when the first three-card betting game is executed as the next game, the slot machine 100 executes a reel action based on the start lever operation, but the effect image display device 157 uses the two-card betting notification d2. The image of is continuously displayed.

Then, when a power failure occurs during the execution of this reel action, the power failure image d41 is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and then, when the power is restored, the power failure recovery notification d42 is executed. The restored image is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

The reels 110 to 11 that were rotating due to the reel action are stopped by the electric power failure, but the special symbol combination (for example, the bonus symbol) is not stopped and displayed on the effective line.

Next, when the second three-card betting game is executed after the power is restored, the slot machine 100 executes a reel action based on the start lever operation. On the other hand, in the effect image display device 157, the restored image started to be displayed after the power is restored is continuously displayed even when the second three-card betting game is started. That is, the effect image display device 157 displays the restored image even during the reel action of the second three-card betting game.

Next, the slot machine 100 displays a special symbol combination (for example, a bonus symbol) on the effective line based on the execution of the reel action, and the effect image display device 157 ends the display of the restored image. The symbol matching notification d4 is executed.

After the reel action is completed, the slot machine 100 starts the rotation of the reels 110 to 112, and executes the effect d5 indicating that the AT state has been entered.

In this way, after executing the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 in the normal state, the two-card betting game, the first three-card betting game, the second three-card betting game are sequentially executed, and the first three-card betting game is executed. If a power failure occurs while the game is running, the special symbol combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective line in the reel action of the first 3-card betting game, and it is on the effective line in the reel action of the second 3-card betting game. A special symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Then, the return image is displayed from the restoration of the first three-card bet game to the end of the reel action of the second three-card bet game, and the time to return from the recovery image to the production image during the game is delayed. There is.

This is to delay the timing of displaying the restored image for a long time and returning from the restored image to the effect image during the game in consideration of the event of power failure (for example, the risk of fraudulent activity).

<Notice of notice>
FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram illustrating the advance notice of the present embodiment. The notice notification is an effect of notifying the internal winning combination, which is the result of the winning combination internal winning process, after the third stop operation, and displays the animation preview image on the effect image display device 157. The preview image shows the internal winner by the color of the clothes of the character that appears and the things that he possesses. For example, in the case of winning the cherry, the character that appears is wearing red clothes or has a cherry. Or something. As will be described in detail later, the advance notice notification of the present embodiment includes a first advance notice notification d43 and a second advance notice notification d44.

FIG. 26A is a diagram showing a transition of an effect image displayed on the effect image display device 157 in a two-card betting game. In detail, the transition of the production image is shown when the previous game is a 3-card betting game and the current game is a 2-card betting game. In the two-card betting game, the two-card betting notification d2 is executed, and the advance notice is not executed.

In the two-card betting game, as described above, the two-card betting notification d2 is displayed from the start lever operation to the third stop operation. Here, the image displayed after the third stop operation of the two-card betting game is the image before the start lever operation of the two-card betting game, that is, the image after the third stop operation of the three-card betting game. As described above, in the present embodiment, as a general rule, the image displayed after the third stop operation of the two-card betting game is the same as the image after the third stop operation of the three-card betting game, in other words, 3 The image returns to the image after the third stop operation of the betting game.

In the two-card betting game, as described above, the process for granting a privilege advantageous to the player is not executed (for example, in the two-card betting game, for granting the number of AT games executed in the normal state). The AT lottery, the AT additional lottery for granting the number of additional AT games in the AT state, the transition lottery to the special zone, etc. are not executed, or in the two-card betting game, the game in the normal state after the end of the AT state. The number may not be updated). Further, since the image displayed after the third stop operation of the two-card betting game returns to the image after the third stop operation of the three-card betting game, the two-card betting game, in other words, the predetermined game progress. It can be said that it is a stopped game.

FIG. 26B is a diagram showing the transition of the effect image displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the three-card betting game, and is a diagram showing the outline of the effect when the first notice notification d43 is executed. .. In detail, the outline of the production in the case where the cherry is internally won in the internal lottery process of the winning combination of the three-card betting game and the first notice notification d43 is executed is shown.

As an example, the first notice notification d43 is an effect of displaying an animation image in which a princess character dressed in red appears after the third stop operation and continues until the medal insertion operation of the next game. That is, the first notice notification d43 is an effect in which once the princess character appears on the screen, the princess character is displayed on the screen until the end.

FIG. 26C is a diagram showing a transition of the effect image displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the three-card betting game, and is a diagram showing an outline of the effect when the second notice notification d44 is executed. .. In detail, the outline of the production in the case where the cherry is internally won in the internal lottery process of the winning combination of the three-card betting game and the second notice notification d44 is executed is shown.

The second notice d44 is, for example, an effect of displaying an animation image in which a ninja character appears with a red cherry after the third stop operation and runs through from the right side to the left side of the screen. That is, the second notice d44 is an effect in which even if the ninja character appears on the screen once, it disappears from the screen after that, and finally the ninja character is not displayed on the screen.

FIG. 27A is a diagram showing the transition of the effect image displayed on the effect image display device 157 when the first notice notification d43 is executed in the three-card bet game and the next game is the two-card bet game. .. Note that FIG. 27 (a) shows a case where the cherry is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the three-card betting game and is lost in the winning combination internal lottery processing of the next two-card betting game. ..

When the three-card betting game is started, the slot machine 100 executes the first notice notification d43 indicating the winning of the cherry after the third stop operation.

Next, when the two-card betting game is started, the slot machine 100 starts executing the two-card betting notification d2 based on the start lever operation, and ends the execution of the two-card betting notification d2 based on the third stop operation. After the third stop operation, the final image of the previous game (three-card betting game), that is, the final image of the first notice notification d43 is displayed. In this case, the final image of the first notice d43 is an image in which a princess character dressed in red appears. That is, the final image of the first notice notification d43 indicating the winning of the cherry is displayed even though the lottery process inside the winning combination of the two-card betting game was lost. This is based on the principle that the image displayed after the third stop operation of the two-card betting game described with reference to FIG. 26A returns to the image after the third stop operation of the three-card betting game. As a result, a notification that contradicts the result of the internal lottery process for the winning combination of the two-card game is performed.

FIG. 27B is a diagram showing the transition of the effect image displayed on the effect image display device 157 when the second notice notification d44 is executed in the three-card bet game and the next game is the two-card bet game. .. Note that FIG. 27 (a) shows a case where the cherry is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the three-card betting game and is lost in the winning combination internal lottery processing of the next two-card betting game. ..

When the three-card betting game is started, the slot machine 100 executes the second notice d44 indicating the winning of the cherry after the third stop operation. The ninja character is not displayed in the final image of the second notice d44.

Next, when the two-card betting game is started, the slot machine 100 starts executing the two-card betting notification d2 based on the start lever operation, and ends the execution of the two-card betting notification d2 based on the third stop operation. After the third stop operation, the final image of the previous game (three-card betting game), that is, the final image of the second notice notification d44 is displayed. In this case, the final image of the second notice d44 is an image in which the ninja character having a cherry does not appear. That is, it is a loss in the internal lottery process of the winning combination of the two-card betting game, and the final image of the second notice d43 indicating the winning of the cherry is displayed, but the final image of the second notice d43 is a ninja. Since the character is not displayed, as a result, the notification consistent with the result of the winning combination internal lottery process of the two-card game is performed. This is based on the principle that the image displayed after the third stop operation of the two-card betting game described with reference to FIG. 26A returns to the image after the third stop operation of the three-card betting game.

As described above, according to the advance notice of the present embodiment, when the first advance notice d43 is executed in the three-card betting game, the first one executed in the three-card betting game in the subsequent two-card betting game. The final image of the notice notification d43 is displayed again, but the content of the displayed final image may be inconsistent with the internal winning combination of the two-card betting game, while the second notice notification d44 in the three-card betting game. In the subsequent two-card betting game, the final image of the second notice notification d44 executed in the three-card betting game is displayed again, but the content of the redisplayed final image is 2. Since the contents of the internal winning combination of the card betting game and the second notice d44 do not indicate the internal winning combination, there is no apparent inconsistency.

<Button production>
In FIG. 28A, after the button effect is started in the 3-card bet game, the effect button 192 is not operated, the 2-card bet game is executed in the next game, and then the 3-card bet game is executed. It is a figure which shows the change of the effect mode of the effect image display device 157 in the case. Note that FIG. 28A shows a case where the effect button 192 is not operated in the button effect, but the privilege is given, which has already been described in FIG. 18 of the embodiment C4.

In this way, if the effect button 192 is not operated after the button effect is started in the 3-card bet game, one game is executed in the 2-card bet game in the next game, and then the 3-card bet game is executed. After the third stop operation of the two-card betting game, neither the operation promotion display d31 nor the operation response display d32 is executed.

According to the above-mentioned principle of the two-card betting game, the image displayed after the third stop operation of the two-card betting game returns to the image after the third stop operation of the three-card betting game. However, since the operation validity period of the effect button 192 is from the third stop operation of the three-card betting game to the medal insertion operation of the next game, the operation of the effect button 192 is performed after the third stop operation of the two-card bet game. It is out of the valid period, the operation promotion display d31 is not displayed, and the start display d30, which is the background image of the operation promotion display d31, is displayed.

On the other hand, FIG. 28B shows a case where the effect button 192 is operated after the button effect is started in the three-card betting game and the privilege is given, and the two-card bet game is played in one game in the next game. It is a figure which shows the change of the effect mode of the effect image display device 157 when it is executed.

When the operation promotion display d31 is displayed in the button effect, the operation for the effect button 192 is performed, and the privilege is given, the AT start image is based on the operation for the effect button 192 as shown in FIG. 28 (b). d33A is displayed. That is, even if the effect button 192 is operated, the operation response display d32A is not displayed.

Next, when the next game is a two-card betting game, the slot machine 100 executes the two-card betting notification d2 based on the start lever operation. The two-card bet notification d2 is displayed from the start lever operation to the third stop operation.

Next, the slot machine 100 displays the AT start image d33A again after the third stop operation of the two-card betting game. This is by principle. When the next game is a three-card game, the AT start image d33A displayed by operating the start lever of the three-card game is displayed as shown in FIG. 28 (a).

<Summary of embodiments>
(1) As described above, according to the game console of the above embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100),
It is possible to set any bet number among a plurality of bets including a first bet number (for example, 3 bets) and a second bet number less than the first bet number (for example, 2 bets). Bet number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion port 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception process S102).
A game execution means (for example, a main control unit 300, a main control unit main process, a main control unit timer interrupt process) that executes a game based on the bet number set by the bet number setting means.
Effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, first sub control unit main process, second sub control). It is a game table equipped with (main processing of the department, etc.)
The production of one of the plurality of types is the first production.
The production of one of the plurality of types is the third production.
The game table is recommended to be a game in which the first bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "first bet number game").
The first effect means notifying that the second bet number is the second bet number game in a game in which the second bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "second bet number game"). (For example, a two-card bet notification d2) is a means that can be executed.
The effect means executes the first effect for at least a part of a period of a certain first bet number game (hereinafter referred to as "predetermined game") performed after the second bet number game. (Hereinafter referred to as "first case") (for example, FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b)).
When a power failure occurs in the second bet number game executed before the predetermined game, the third effect (for example, the power failure recovery notification d42) is performed during at least a part of the predetermined game. (Hereinafter referred to as "second case") (for example, FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b)),
The third effect is an effect that is started in connection with the occurrence of a power failure (for example, a power failure recovery notification d42).
That is the first basic configuration.

According to the first basic configuration, in a certain first bet number game performed after the second bet number game, the first effect of notifying that the bet number is the second may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the alert of the second bet number game, and if a power failure occurs in this second bet number game, the third bet number game is started in connection with the power failure. Since the effect is executed, it is possible to further emphasize and notify the event of power failure, which is more important than the event of two-card betting game.

In the first basic configuration above
When a power failure occurs during the execution of the first effect, the effect means executes the third effect instead of the first effect.
This is the first suitable configuration.

In the first preferred configuration above
The effect of one of the plurality of types is a second effect (for example, an effect of the symbol alignment notification d4 or later, a symbol alignment notification d4, an effect d5 indicating the transition to the AT state, etc.).
The effect means is a means capable of executing the second effect in the predetermined game.
In the first case, the effect means is a means for starting the second effect after executing the first effect (for example, FIGS. 10A and 10B).
This is the second preferred configuration.

According to the second preferred configuration, the attention of the second bet number game can be emphasized by continuously executing the first effect and the second effect.

In the second preferred configuration above
In the second case, the effect means is a means for starting the second effect after executing the third effect (for example, FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b)).
This is the third preferred configuration.

According to the third preferred configuration, even if a power failure occurs, the second effect is executed after the power is restored, so that the player can enjoy the second effect regardless of the presence or absence of the power failure.

In the second preferred configuration or the third preferred configuration,
The predetermined game is a game involving a reel action, and is a game.
The effect means is a means for starting execution of the second effect in connection with the end of the reel action in the predetermined game (for example, FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b), FIG. 23 (a) and (B)),
This is the fourth preferred configuration.

According to the fourth preferred configuration, the alerting of the second bet number game can be emphasized by performing the reel action.

In the fourth preferred configuration above
The effect means is related to the fact that the first effect is executed during the execution of the reel action in the predetermined game in the first case, and the predetermined pattern combination is temporarily stopped and displayed by the reel action. It is a means for starting the execution of the second effect (for example, FIGS. 10A and 10B).
This is the fifth preferred configuration.

According to the fifth preferred configuration, since the second effect is executed based on the stop display of the predetermined pattern combination by the reel action, the expectation of the player can be improved.

In the fourth preferred configuration or the fifth preferred configuration,
The effect means executes the third effect during the execution of the reel action in the predetermined game in the second case, and the reel is temporarily stopped and displayed after the predetermined pattern combination is temporarily stopped and displayed by the reel action. It is a means for starting execution of the second effect in relation to restarting (for example, FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b)).
This is the sixth preferred configuration.

According to the sixth preferred configuration, since the execution start timing of the second effect is different as compared with the case where there is no power interruption, it is possible to notify the player that a different rare event has occurred.

In the fourth preferred configuration, the fifth preferred configuration, or the sixth preferred configuration,
The reel action is reserved for execution in a game prior to the predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as "reserved game").
When the game set as the reserved game is the second bet number game, the reel action is not executed, and then the reel action is executed in the game which is the first bet number game (for example,). , FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b), FIGS. 23 (a) and (b)),
This is the seventh preferred configuration.

According to the seventh preferred configuration, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the second bet number game and notify that the first bet number game is the recommended game.

The first basic configuration, the first suitable configuration, the second suitable configuration, the third suitable configuration, the fourth suitable configuration, the fifth suitable configuration, the sixth suitable configuration, Or in the seventh preferred configuration
The predetermined game is a game for notifying a player of advantageous benefits (for example, transition from a normal state to an AT state, addition of an AT game, etc.).
This is the eighth preferred configuration.

According to the eighth preferred configuration, it is possible to call attention to the second bet number game in a game that is important to the player.

(2) As described above, according to the game console of the above embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100),
It is possible to set any bet number among a plurality of bets including a first bet number (for example, 3 bets) and a second bet number less than the first bet number (for example, 2 bets). Bet number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion port 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception process S102).
A game execution means (for example, a main control unit 300, a main control unit main process, a main control unit timer interrupt process) that executes a game based on the bet number set by the bet number setting means.
Effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, first sub control unit main process, second sub control). It is a game table equipped with (main processing of the department, etc.)
The production of one of the plurality of types is the first production.
The production of one of the plurality of types is the third production.
The game table is recommended to be a game in which the first bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "first bet number game").
The first effect means notifying that the second bet number is the second bet number game in a game in which the second bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "second bet number game"). (For example, a two-card bet notification d2) is a means that can be executed.
The effect means executes the first effect for at least a part of a period of a certain first bet number game (hereinafter referred to as "predetermined game") performed after the second bet number game. (Hereinafter referred to as "first case") (for example, FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b)).
When a power failure occurs during reel rotation in the predetermined game, the third effect (for example, power failure recovery notification d42) is executed for at least a part of the predetermined game (hereinafter, "No. 1". In the case of "three" (for example, FIGS. 24 and 25),
The third effect is an effect that is started in connection with the occurrence of a power failure.
The second basic configuration is to be characterized by this.

According to this second basic configuration, in a certain first bet number game performed after the second bet number game, the first effect of notifying that the bet number is the second may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the alert of the second bet number game, and if a power failure occurs during the reel rotation of this certain first bet number game, it is related to the power failure. Since the third effect is executed, the event of power failure, which is more important than the event of two-card betting game, can be further emphasized and notified.

In the second basic configuration above
When a power failure occurs during the execution of the first effect, the effect means executes the third effect instead of the first effect.
This is the ninth preferred configuration.

In the ninth preferred configuration above,
The effect of one of the plurality of types is a second effect (for example, an effect of the symbol alignment notification d4 or later, a symbol alignment notification d4, an effect d5 indicating the transition to the AT state, etc.).
The effect means is a means capable of executing the second effect in the predetermined game.
In the first case, the effect means is a means for starting the second effect after executing the first effect (for example, FIGS. 10A and 10B).
This is the tenth preferred configuration.

According to the tenth preferred configuration, the attention of the second bet number game can be emphasized by continuously executing the first effect and the second effect.

In the tenth preferred configuration above
In the third case, the effect means is a means for starting the second effect after executing the third effect (for example, FIGS. 24 and 25).
That is the eleventh suitable configuration.

According to the eleventh preferred configuration, even if a power failure occurs, the second effect is executed after the power is restored, so that the player can enjoy the second effect regardless of the presence or absence of the power failure.

In the tenth preferred configuration or the eleventh preferred configuration
The predetermined game is a game involving a reel action, and is a game.
The effect means is a means for starting execution of the second effect in connection with the end of the reel action in the predetermined game (for example, FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b), FIGS. 24 and 25). ,
That is the twelfth suitable configuration.

According to the twelfth preferred configuration, the alerting of the second bet number game can be emphasized by performing the reel action.

In the twelfth preferred configuration above
The effect means is related to the fact that the first effect is executed during the execution of the reel action in the predetermined game in the first case, and the predetermined pattern combination is temporarily stopped and displayed by the reel action. It is a means for starting the execution of the second effect (for example, FIGS. 10A and 10B).
That is the thirteenth suitable configuration.

According to the thirteenth preferred configuration, since the second effect is executed based on the stop display of the predetermined pattern combination by the reel action, the expectation of the player can be improved.

In the twelfth suitable configuration or the thirteenth suitable configuration,
The reel action is reserved for execution in a game prior to the predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as "reserved game").
When the game set as the reserved game is the second bet number game, the reel action is not executed, and then the reel action is executed in the game which is the first bet number game (for example,). , FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b), FIGS. 24 and 25),
That is the fourteenth suitable configuration.

According to the fourteenth preferred configuration, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the second bet number game and notify that the first bet number game is the recommended game.

In the above fourteenth preferred configuration,
The effect means executes the third effect and does not execute the reserved reel action during the execution of the predetermined game in which the power is turned on in the third case, and is next to the predetermined game. Is a means for executing the reel action when the game of 1 is the first bet number game (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth case”) (for example, FIGS. 24 and 25).
In the fourth case, the effect means executes the third effect while the reel action is being executed, and the second effect is related to the fact that the predetermined pattern combination is temporarily stopped and displayed by the reel action. Is a means of initiating execution (eg, FIGS. 24 and 25).
That is the fifteenth suitable configuration.

According to the fifteenth preferred configuration, since the execution start timing of the second effect is different as compared with the case where there is no power interruption, it is possible to notify the player that a different rare event has occurred.

The second basic configuration, the ninth suitable configuration, the tenth suitable configuration, the eleventh suitable configuration, the twelfth suitable configuration, the thirteenth suitable configuration, and the fourteenth. In a suitable configuration, or in the fifteenth suitable configuration,
The predetermined game is a game for notifying a player of advantageous benefits (for example, transition from a normal state to an AT state, addition of an AT game, etc.).
That is the sixteenth suitable configuration.

According to the sixteenth preferred configuration, it is possible to call attention to the second bet number game in a game important to the player.

(3) As described above, according to the game console of the above embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100),
It is possible to set any bet number among a plurality of bets including a first bet number (for example, 3 bets) and a second bet number less than the first bet number (for example, 2 bets). Bet number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion port 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception process S102).
A game execution means (for example, a main control unit 300, a main control unit main process, a main control unit timer interrupt process) that executes a game based on the bet number set by the bet number setting means.
Effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, first sub control unit main process, second sub control). It is a game table equipped with (main processing of the department, etc.)
The game table is recommended to be a game in which the first bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "first bet number game").
The production of one of the plurality of types is the first production.
The effect of one of the plurality of types is a notification effect (for example, a two-card bet notification d2).
The first effect is an effect including a notice (for example, the first notice d43).
The notification effect is an effect of notifying that the game is the second bet number game in the game in which the second bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "second bet number game"). ,
The effect means is a case where the first effect including a notice is executed in a certain first bet number game (hereinafter, referred to as "predetermined game") (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"). It ’s a means,
In the first case, when the game following the predetermined game is the second bet number game, the effect means provides a part of the first effect including a notice in the second bet number game. When it is executed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), it is a means (for example, FIG. 27 (a)).
This is the third basic configuration.

According to this third basic configuration, it is possible to further emphasize that the two-card betting is not recommended because the effect including the advance notice is executed in the two-card betting game in which the alert is notified.

In the third basic configuration above
Equipped with an internal winning result determining means (for example, main control unit 300, winning combination internal lottery processing, etc.) for determining the internal winning result based on the lottery information.
The notice in the first effect is a notice effect suggesting an internal winning combination (for example, the first notice notification d43).
In the first case, the internal winning combination suggested by the notice included in a part of the first effect executed in the second betting number game is the internal winning combination in the second betting number game. May be different (eg, FIG. 27 (a)),
That is the seventeenth suitable configuration.

According to the seventeenth preferred configuration, the content of the first effect may be inconsistent, so that it is possible to further emphasize that the two-card betting game is disadvantageous to the player.

In the third basic configuration or the seventeenth preferred configuration,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate,
A stop operation receiving means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139, main control unit 300) that accepts a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels.
Equipped with
A part of the first effect is an effect generated in connection with the final stop operation (for example, a third stop operation) of the plurality of reels.
That is the eighteenth suitable configuration.

According to the eighteenth preferred configuration, the expectation of the first production can be improved.

In the eighteenth preferred configuration above
The effect generated in connection with the final stop operation is an animation effect.
The effect means is a means for executing the final portion of the animation effect in the second bet number game in the first case (for example, FIG. 27 (a)).
That is the nineteenth suitable configuration.

According to the nineteenth preferred configuration, the exciting and tense image of the first production can be enjoyed.

In the third basic configuration, the seventeenth preferred configuration, the eighteenth preferred configuration, or the nineteenth preferred configuration,
The second bet number game is a game in which the progress of the game is stopped.
That is the twenty-seven suitable configuration.

According to the twenty-seven preferred configuration, the two-card betting game can be made to recognize that the progress is stopped.

(4) As described above, according to the game console of the above embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100),
It is possible to set any bet number among a plurality of bets including a first bet number (for example, 3 bets) and a second bet number less than the first bet number (for example, 2 bets). Bet number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion port 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception process S102).
A game execution means (for example, a main control unit 300, a main control unit main process, a main control unit timer interrupt process) that executes a game based on the bet number set by the bet number setting means.
Effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, first sub control unit main process, second sub control). It is a game table equipped with (main processing of the department, etc.)
The game table is recommended to be a game in which the first bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "first bet number game").
The effect of one of the plurality of types is the first effect (for example, the first notice d43).
The effect of one of the plurality of types is the second effect (for example, the second notice d44).
The effect of one of the plurality of types is a notification effect (for example, a two-card bet notification d2).
The first production is a production including a notice.
The second production is a production including a notice.
The notification effect is an effect of notifying that the game is the second bet number game in the game in which the second bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "second bet number game"). ,
The effect means is a case where the first effect including a notice is executed in a certain first bet number game (hereinafter, referred to as "predetermined game") (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"). It ’s a means,
In the first case, when the game following the predetermined game is the second bet number game, the effect means provides a part of the first effect including a notice in the second bet number game. It is a means that may be implemented (eg, FIG. 27 (a)).
The effect means is a means in which the second effect including a notice is executed in the predetermined game (hereinafter, referred to as "second case").
The effect means is a part of the second effect that does not include a notice in the second bet number game when the next game of the predetermined game is the second bet number game in the second case. (Hereinafter referred to as “second case”) is a means (for example, FIG. 27 (b)).
This is the fourth basic configuration.

According to the fourth basic configuration, it is possible to emphasize that two-card betting is not recommended because the production including the notice and the production without the notice are executed in the two-card betting game in which the alert is notified. can.

In the fourth basic configuration above
Equipped with an internal winning result determining means (for example, main control unit 300, winning combination internal lottery processing, etc.) for determining the internal winning result based on the lottery information.
The notice in the first effect is a notice effect suggesting an internal winning combination (for example, the first notice notification d43).
In the first case, the internal winning combination suggested by the advance notice included in a part of the first effect executed in the second betting number game is the internal winning combination in the second betting number game. May be different (eg, FIG. 27 (a)),
That is the 21st suitable configuration.

According to the twenty-first preferred configuration, the content of the first effect may be inconsistent, so that it is possible to further emphasize that the two-card betting game is disadvantageous to the player.

In the fourth basic configuration or the twenty-first preferred configuration,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate,
A stop operation receiving means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139, main control unit 300) that accepts a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels.
Equipped with
A part of the first effect is an effect generated in connection with the final stop operation (for example, a third stop operation) of the plurality of reels.
A part of the second effect is an effect generated in connection with the final stop operation (for example, a third stop operation) of the plurality of reels.
This is the 22nd preferred configuration.

According to the twenty-second preferred configuration, the expectation of the first effect and the second effect can be improved.

In the above twenty-two suitable configurations,
The effect generated in connection with the final stop operation is an animation effect.
The effect means is a means for executing the final portion of the animation effect in the second bet number game in the first case (for example, FIG. 27 (a)).
The effect means is a means for executing the final portion of the animation effect in the second bet number game in the second case (for example, FIG. 27 (b)).
The last part of the animation effect performed in the second bet number game in the first case includes a notice, while the animation effect performed in the second bet number game in the second case. The last part of is not included in the notice (eg, FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b)),
That is the suitable configuration of the 23rd.

According to the twenty-third suitable configuration, the stimulating and tense image of the first production and the second production can be enjoyed.

In the fourth basic configuration, the twenty-one preferred configuration, the twenty-two preferred configuration, or the twenty-three preferred configuration,
The second bet number game is a game in which the progress of the game is stopped.
That is the preferred configuration of the twenty-fourth.

According to the twenty-fourth preferred configuration, the two-card betting game can be made to recognize that the progress is stopped.

(5) As described above, according to the game console of the above embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100),
An operating means (for example, an effect button 192) provided at a position where the player can operate, and
It is possible to set any bet number among a plurality of bets including a first bet number (for example, 3 bets) and a second bet number less than the first bet number (for example, 2 bets). Bet number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion port 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception process S102).
A game execution means (for example, a main control unit 300, a main control unit main process, a main control unit timer interrupt process) that executes a game based on the bet number set by the bet number setting means.
An effect means (for example, an effect image display device 157, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, a first sub control unit main) capable of executing a first effect (for example, a button effect). Processing, 2nd sub-control unit main processing, etc.)
The game table is recommended to be a game in which the first bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "first bet number game").
The effect means is a means capable of executing the first effect in the first bet number game.
The first effect is an effect that suggests whether or not to shift to a gaming state (for example, AT state) that is advantageous to the player.
The first effect is an operation promotion effect (for example, operation promotion display d31) that prompts the operation of the operation means, and an operation response effect (for example, an operation response) that is executed in connection with the operation of the operation means. It is a production including display d32) and.
The effect means is a game (hereinafter, "second game") in which the second bet number is set and executed from the next game (hereinafter, referred to as "next game") in which the first effect is started to be executed. When one or more games (hereinafter referred to as "bet number game") are executed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect in the first effect may not be executed. (For example, FIG. 28 (a)),
That is the fifth basic structure.

According to this fifth basic configuration, the attention of the second bet number game is given while giving a penalty of not executing the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect which are part of the first effect advantageous to the player. Can be emphasized.

In addition, in the fifth basic configuration,
The effect means is a game (hereinafter, "second game") in which the second bet number is set and executed from the next game (hereinafter, referred to as "next game") in which the first effect is started to be executed. When one or more games are executed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect in the first effect are not executed. May be.

In the fifth basic configuration above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate,
A stop operation receiving means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that accepts a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels, and
Equipped with
The effect means is a means for executing the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect after receiving the final stop operation (for example, the third stop operation) in the first bet number game.
The effect means is a means that does not execute the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect when the operation means is not operated after starting the operation promotion effect in the first case (for example, FIG. 28). (A)),
That is the preferred configuration of the twenty-fifth.

According to the twenty-fifth preferred configuration, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the second bet number game while giving a penalty that the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect are not executed when the operation means is not operated. can.

In the preferred configuration of 25 above,
The second bet number game is a game in which the progress of the game is stopped.
The effect means is a means for executing the final effect of the effect that was executed in the first bet number game immediately before the second bet number game at the end of the second bet number game (for example). , FIG. 26 (a)),
The final effect is an effect including the image displayed at the end of the game.
In the first case, the effect means is a means for executing the background image of the last image of the game in which the first effect is executed, but not executing the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect. ,
In the effect means, the second bet number game is executed by one or more games from the next game in which the second effect, which is different from the first effect and does not include the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect, is started. It is a means to display the last image of the game in which the second effect is executed when it is performed.
That is the preferred configuration of 26.

According to the twenty-sixth preferred configuration, the player can be made aware that the game does not proceed in the second bet number game.

In the above-mentioned twenty-five suitable configuration or twenty-six suitable configuration,
The first effect is a judge effect regarding the granting of benefits or the continuation of benefits.
That is the preferred configuration of 27.

According to the twenty-seventh preferred configuration, the expectation for the result of the first production can be improved.

In the above-mentioned twenty-five suitable configuration, twenty-six suitable configuration, or twenty-seven suitable configuration,
The effect means is a means capable of executing a second effect (for example, a two-card bet notification d2) for notifying that the second bet number game is a part of the period of the second bet number game. can be,
The effect means executes the second effect until the final stop operation for the plurality of reels is received in the second bet number game in the first case, and after the final stop operation, the effect means. While executing the first effect, the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect, which are part of the first effect, are not executed, and the first bet number game executed thereafter is advantageous to the player. It is a means for notifying the result of whether or not to shift to a different gaming state (for example, FIG. 28A).
That is the preferred configuration of 28.

According to the twenty-eighth preferred configuration, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the second bet number game while giving a penalty that the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect are not executed.

(6) As described above, according to the game console of the above embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100),
An operating means (for example, an effect button 192) provided at a position where the player can operate, and
It is possible to set any bet number among a plurality of bets including a first bet number (for example, 3 bets) and a second bet number less than the first bet number (for example, 2 bets). Bet number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion port 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception process S102).
A game execution means (for example, a main control unit 300, a main control unit main process, a main control unit timer interrupt process) that executes a game based on the bet number set by the bet number setting means.
An effect means (for example, an effect image display device 157, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, a first sub control unit main) capable of executing a first effect (for example, a button effect). Processing, 2nd sub-control unit main processing, etc.)
The game table is recommended to be a game in which the first bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "first bet number game").
The effect means is a means capable of executing the first effect in the first bet number game.
The first effect is an effect that suggests whether or not to shift to a gaming state (for example, AT state) that is advantageous to the player.
The first effect is an operation promotion effect (for example, operation promotion display d31) that prompts the operation of the operation means, and an operation response effect (for example, an operation response) that is executed in connection with the operation of the operation means. It is a production including display d32).
The effect means is a game (hereinafter, "second game") in which the second bet number is set and executed from the next game (hereinafter, referred to as "next game") in which the first effect is started to be executed. When one or more games (hereinafter referred to as "bet number game") are executed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the operation response effect in the first effect may not be executed (for example,). FIG. 28 (a)),
This is the sixth basic configuration.

According to the sixth basic configuration, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the second bet number game while giving a penalty of not performing the operation response effect which is a part of the first effect which is advantageous to the player. ..

In the sixth basic configuration,
The effect means is a game (hereinafter, "second game") in which the second bet number is set and executed from the next game (hereinafter, referred to as "next game") in which the first effect is started to be executed. When one or more games (hereinafter referred to as "bet number game") are executed (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"), it may be a means for not executing the operation response effect in the first effect.

In the sixth basic configuration above
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate,
A stop operation receiving means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that accepts a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels, and
Equipped with
The effect means is a means for executing the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect after receiving the final stop operation (for example, the third stop operation) in the first bet number game.
The effect means is a means that does not execute the operation response effect when the operation means is not operated after the operation promotion effect is started in the first case (for example, FIG. 28A).
That is the preferred configuration of 29.

According to the twenty-ninth preferred configuration, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the second bet number game while giving a penalty that the operation response effect is not executed when the operation means is not operated.

In the preferred configuration of 29 above
The effect means is a means for executing the operation response effect when the operation means is operated (hereinafter referred to as "second case") after the operation promotion effect is started in the first case. (For example, FIG. 28 (b)),
The effect means is a means for executing the operation response effect when the next game in which the operation response effect is executed in the second case is the second bet number game (for example, FIG. 28B). ),
That is the thirtieth suitable configuration.

According to the thirty-seven preferred configuration, when the operating means is operated, the operation response effect is executed again in the next two-card betting game, so that the attention of the second betting number game is emphasized. Can be done.

In the 29th preferred configuration or the 30th preferred configuration,
The second bet number game is a game in which the progress of the game is stopped.
The effect means is a means for executing the final effect of the effect that was executed in the first bet number game immediately before the second bet number game at the end of the second bet number game (for example). , FIG. 26 (a)),
In the first case, the effect means is a means for executing the background image of the last image of the game in which the first effect is executed, but not executing the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect. ,
In the effect means, the second bet number game is executed by one or more games from the next game in which the second effect, which is different from the first effect and does not include the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect, is started. It is a means to display the last image of the game in which the second effect is executed when it is performed.
That is the 31st suitable configuration.

According to the thirty-first preferred configuration, the player can be made aware that the game does not proceed in the second bet number game.

In the 29 suitable configuration, the 30 suitable configuration, or the 31 suitable configuration,
The first effect is a judge effect regarding the granting of benefits or the continuation of benefits.
That is the suitable configuration of the thirty-two.

According to the thirty-second preferred configuration, the expectation for the result of the first effect can be improved.

In the 29 suitable configuration, the 30 suitable configuration, the 31 suitable configuration, or the 32 suitable configuration,
The effect means is a means capable of executing a second effect (for example, a two-card bet notification d2) for notifying that the second bet number game is a part of the period of the second bet number game. can be,
The effect means executes the second effect until the final stop operation for the plurality of reels is received in the second bet number game in the first case, and after the final stop operation, the effect means. While executing the first effect, the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect, which are part of the first effect, are not executed, and the first bet number game executed thereafter is advantageous to the player. It is a means for notifying the result of whether or not to shift to a different gaming state (for example, FIG. 28A).
That is the preferred configuration of 33.

According to the thirty-three preferred configuration, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the second bet number game while giving a penalty that the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect are not executed.

<Other game consoles>
The slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, and the game medium in this case includes electronic data corresponding to medals, and is a game medium. Insertion is performed from a predetermined external device (an electronic storage device having a function of storing the number of rented medals electronically and a function of storing the number of medals won by winning an electronic method). , The input of the digitized data is included, and the payout of the game medium includes the output of the digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and variations to the embodiments of the present invention can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. Modifications can be made and those accompanied by such modifications and alterations are also within the technical scope of the invention. Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to things.

[Third Embodiment]
The slot machine of the present embodiment starts rotation when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if they do not match, the game medium is used. It is a game table that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which multiple types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the reel window 113, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each reel 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit of this optical sensor is provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 114. The valid winning line 114 is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 114. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line will be valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line will be added to the three medals. If three bets are placed, the five lines to which the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line are added may be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 114 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a down winning line and an upper right winning line, may be set as valid winning lines, or the same number of winning lines may be set as valid winning lines regardless of the number of bets.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in the internal lottery for the winning combination, which will be described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. be. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing. The reel panel lamp 128 of the present embodiment may indicate the result of the winning combination internal lottery process depending on the lit emission color.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, a maximum of three bets are inserted, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 121 lights up. Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, a game in which three medals are inserted is a "three-card betting game", a game in which two medals are inserted is a "two-card betting game", and a game in which one medal is inserted. May be referred to as "one-card betting game".

The bet button 132 of the present embodiment may be used as a button for directing, in addition to a function as a button for inserting a predetermined number of credits.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. The payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an effect device for notifying information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 110 to 112. .. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be pressed. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation may be referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation may be referred to as a third stop reel. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 as a stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111 is called "forward push operation order". The operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 and the stop operation is called "middle push operation order" or simply "middle push" is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is on the front side of the slot machine 100 (player side). It has a structure that appears.

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an effect device for executing an effect described later.

The information display button 191 is an operation button for calling and operating a user menu (for example, a menu for setting various information by an individual player). The information display button 191 is composed of a cross key button 191a and an OK button 191b. The cross-shaped key button 191a is a selection button used when the player selects any one of a plurality of options. The cross-shaped key button 191a is composed of up, down, left, and right arrow keys, and the cursor can be moved in the direction of the arrow by operating each arrow key. The OK button 191b is a button for confirming the option in which the cursor is positioned. In the present embodiment, for example, in the case of information setting by the user menu, when the volume setting, the light amount setting, etc. are performed, it is used for selecting the character (stage) of the effect to be executed after the bonus winning.

The effect button 192 is a button that can be operated when executing an effect that prompts the operation of the button. In the present embodiment, when the effect button 192 is operated, as the response effect, an effect suggesting the granting of a privilege, notification of an internal winning combination in the winning combination internal lottery process, an effect related to character selection, and the like are executed.

It should be noted that the device may be configured to be capable of displaying various production images and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, or a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of an internal lottery for a winning combination, and a reel stop. ROM 306 for storing positions, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 every interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor or the like and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 starts when the power is turned on and the random number value generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main process of the main control unit described later). To start).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor to be paid out from the medal payout device 180, index sensor of reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, the information display button 191 sensor, the effect button 192 sensor, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number value generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register storing the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 sensor are installed in the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect the input operation of the case. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, L Become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. Drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game medal insertion lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the display 126 and the payout number display 127) is provided, respectively.

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted in an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output. Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 has a voltage value of the power supply set to a predetermined value (this implementation). In the embodiment, when the voltage is less than 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. is doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stores a ROM 406 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various indicators, and the like are stored. It is provided.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and the speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via the output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is provided with various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input / output interface. 123 etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and bases the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
The symbol arrangement applied to each of the above-mentioned reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 31 (a). It should be noted that the figure is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in a plane-developed manner.

On each reel 110 to 112, a plurality of types (8 types in the present embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the figure are arranged in a predetermined number of frames (21 frames of numbers 0 to 20 in the present embodiment). Further, the numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, in the present embodiment, the number 1 frame on the left reel 110 has a "replay" symbol, the number 0 frame on the middle reel 111 has a "bell" symbol, and the number 2 frame on the right reel 112 has a "replay" symbol. The "watermelon" design is arranged respectively.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 31 (b). The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination. Of the winning roles in this embodiment, the big bonus (BB1, BB2) and the regular bonus (RB) are the bonus roles for shifting to the bonus game, and the replay is the replay without inserting a new medal. As a role that enables a game, it may be called a "working role" to be distinguished from a winning role, but the "winning role" in the present embodiment includes a big bonus, a regular bonus, and a re-game that are the operating roles. Is included. In addition, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operator without the distribution of medals (without the payout of medals) is displayed on the valid line, for example, big bonus, regular. Includes bonuses and winning replays.

The winning roles of the slot machine 100 include big bonuses (BB1, BB2), regular bonuses (RB), small roles (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replay. It goes without saying that the types of winning combinations are not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

The "big bonus (BB1, BB2)" (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "BB") is a special role (actuating role) in which a big bonus game (BB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combinations are "BB1 symbol (also referred to as white 7) -BB1 symbol-BB1 symbol" and BB2 "BB2 symbol (also referred to as blue 7) -BB2 symbol-BB2 symbol". Also, for BB1 and BB2, the flags are carried over. That is, when BB1 and BB2 are internally won, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a predetermined area of RAM 308 of the main control unit 300), but even if BB1 and BB2 are not won in the game, the prize is won. The flag indicating the internal winning is maintained until the game is completed, and even after the next game, BB1 and BB2 are internally winning, and the symbol combination "white 7-white 7-white 7" corresponding to BB1 and the symbol corresponding to BB2 are displayed. The combination "Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7" is in a state of winning all together.

The "regular bonus (RB)" (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "RB") is a special role (actuating role) in which a regular bonus game (RB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combination is "RB symbol (also referred to as bonus) -RB symbol-RB symbol". As for RB, the flag is carried over in the same manner as the above-mentioned BB. However, in the big bonus game (BB game), the big bonus game is started without the start condition that the regular bonus game (RB game) is internally won and the symbol combination is displayed on the winning line. The regular bonus game may be started later, and when one regular bonus game is completed, the regular bonus game may be automatically started so that the next regular bonus game is started immediately.

"Small role (cherry, watermelon, bell) (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as" cherry "," watermelon "," bell ") is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol. The combination is "cherry symbol-ANY symbol-ANY symbol" for cherry, "watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol" for watermelon, and "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" for bell. The corresponding payouts are as shown in the figure, with 4 cherries, 12 watermelons, and 8 bells. In the case of "cherry symbol-ANY symbol-ANY symbol", the symbol of the left reel 110 may be a "cherry" symbol, and the symbols of the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol.

"Replay" is a winning combination (operating role) that allows a game to be played without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize, and the medal is not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination is "replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol" for the replay game.

Here, the internal winning probability of the winning combination will be outlined.

The internal winning probability of each combination is the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each combination, and the numerical data in the range of the random number value acquired at the time of the internal lottery described later (65536 in this embodiment). It is calculated by dividing by. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each combination or loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process described later, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is the value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to any combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. Actually, this lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6 having different winning probabilities for at least one role, and a game store clerk or the like can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. ..

In the present embodiment, the bonus combination is a simultaneous winning combination that is internally won at the same time as the watermelon or cherry. The bonus role may be a simultaneous winning combination with the replay, or may be a simultaneous winning combination with the chance eye. In addition, the simultaneous winning combination that internally wins the bonus role and cherry at the same time, and the simultaneous winning combination that simultaneously wins the bonus role and watermelon have a difference in winning probability for each set value, so notification of the simultaneous winning combination is provided. This helps the player to guess the setting.

In the present embodiment, the watermelon and the cherry each win a prize when the winning combination is internally won in the internal lottery process and the operation timing of the stop operation is suitable. Hereinafter, watermelon and cherry are also referred to as chance roles. In addition, the bell wins a prize when the winning combination is internally elected in the internal lottery process and the stop operation is performed in the correct stop operation order. Hereinafter, the bell is also referred to as a push order role. It should be noted that the configuration may include a so-called common bell that wins a prize regardless of the order of the stop operations.

The AT state is a gaming state in which information (stop operation content) that is advantageous to the player is notified when the chance combination or the push order combination is internally won. In the AT state, the effect image display device 157 and the payout number display device 127 are used to execute an operation navigation for notifying the stop operation content to assist the winning. Specifically, when the push order combination is internally won in the AT state, the stop operation order is notified, and when the chance combination is internally won in the AT state, the stop operation timing (suggestion of the internally won combination) is notified. Since the operation navigation is executed, the player can easily win a predetermined small winning combination by following the stop operation content of the operation navigation. That is, the AT state is a state in which a large profit is given to the player by the operation navigation.

On the other hand, in the normal state, the operation navigation is not executed even if the chance combination or the push order combination is internally won.

In the present embodiment, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state, the state shifts to the AT state. In the AT lottery, for example, the winning or losing of the winning may be determined based on the result of the winning combination internal lottery. Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of digested games in the normal state after the end of the AT state reaches a predetermined threshold value (hereinafter referred to as the number of ceiling games), the game shifts to the AT state. That is, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state, or when the number of digested games in the normal state reaches the number of ceiling games, the game shifts to the AT state, and the predetermined number of AT games or the AT game determined by the lottery or the like is entered. A number is given. In the AT state, an AT additional lottery is performed in which the number of AT games is added, and when the AT additional lottery is won, a predetermined number of AT games are added. On the other hand, in the AT state, when all the assigned AT games are exhausted, the AT state ends and the normal state is entered.

<Operation of slot machine>
Next, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, with reference to FIG. 32, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

When the power is turned on to the slot machine 100, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the operation is permitted to the WDT 314, and the initial setting is performed. Set the value, etc.

In step S102, the medal insertion / start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, it is determined by detection by the sensor circuit 320 whether or not there is an electronic medal insertion operation by the bet buttons 130 to 132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141, and when the insertion operation is performed. Turns on the winning line indicator lamp 120 according to the number of inserted medals. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a medal insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted to the first sub-control unit 400. If the player wins the re-game combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals.

Further, a check as to whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated is performed based on the detection of the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start operation has been performed, the number of inserted medals is determined and the first sub-control unit 400 determines. On the other hand, preparations are made to send a start lever reception command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, a valid winning line is determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number value generation circuit 316 is acquired.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for the winning combination is performed. In the internal lottery process of the winning combination, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and the internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value acquired in step S104. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the condition device (flag) for the internally winning combination is activated (the flag of the winning combination is turned ON). Further, in step S105, preparations are made for transmitting an internal winning command indicating the result of the winning combination internal lottery to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, when the watermelon is internally won, an internal winning command indicating that the watermelon has been internally won is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the result of the internal lottery for the winning combination is lost (the winning combination). In the case of non-winning), an internal winning command indicating a loss is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the result of the winning combination internal lottery in step S105. The operation conditions are also set for the reel stop data of the winning combination whose stop operation order is questioned, and when the reel stop data corresponding to these is selected, the operation conditions are also set.

In step S107, a reel rotation start process for starting the rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is executed based on the start operation.

In step S108, the reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is input in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Refer to it and stop any of the reels 110 to 112 according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop data. If all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S109. In this step S108, the stop button reception command relating to the stop buttons 137 to 139 for which the stop operation was performed for each stop operation (specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command and the second stop operation). Prepare to send the stop button reception 2 command for the third stop operation, and the stop button reception 3 command for the third stop operation) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel. Reel stop command related to the stop position (specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop for the third stop operation) 3 Command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, the winning determination process is performed. In the winning judgment process, the winning judgment of the symbol stopped by pressing the stop buttons 137 to 139 is performed, and when the symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, the winning is won. It is judged that the role has been won. For example, if "watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the watermelon has won a prize. Further, in this step S109, preparations are made for transmitting a display determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, the medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. Further, in step S110, preparations are made for transmitting a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, the game state control process is performed. In this game state control process, control for shifting the game state is performed. For example, in the case of a BB prize, preparations are made so that the BB game can be started from the next time. Further, in this step S111, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control unit 400.

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-mentioned process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 33) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger for the main control unit timer interrupt. The process is started in a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit.

In step S203, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S205, the timer update process is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in each time unit.

In step S206, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S207, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, the error is detected. (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S211. When the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each of the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. Note that FIG. 34A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 34B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 34 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (a).

When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing the internal winning information, which is information representing the result of the internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state.

In step S302, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S303.

In step S303, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, the effect control process (details will be described later) is performed. Here, the production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing a process such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S305, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, the lamp control process is performed based on the process result of step S305. For example, if there is an instruction to various lamps 420 in the effect data read in step S305, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the effect data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 424.

In step S309, information output processing for setting to send a command to the second sub-control unit 500 is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S305, a setting to output this control command is made, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 34A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S502, a command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, an effect random number value is updated, and the like are performed.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. Note that FIG. 35A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 35B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 35 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 35D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 500.

First, in step S3001 of FIG. 35 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S601. In this initialization process, input / output port initial setting, initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, initialization process of the storage area in the VRAM 518, and the like are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S605, the effect control process is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S604, the process corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading the effect data for controlling the image of the background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading out the production data from ROM 506 other than this is included, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S606, image control processing (details will be described later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S605, the image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding a display image (notification image, background image) is executed. When this image control process is completed, the process returns to step S602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 35 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 35 (c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 35A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S802, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process of step S4006 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 35 (d). The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 536 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on a table such as position information, and then an image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S903. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

In step S903, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transparency, etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of drawing the image is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S906, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for to be entered.

In step S906, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated, is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Playability>
Next, the playability common to the following Examples N1 to N4 will be described. In the present embodiment, an effect of urging the operation of a predetermined button (hereinafter referred to as an operation request effect) and a response effect when an operation for a predetermined button is performed when the operation request effect is executed (hereinafter, an operation response effect). It has a feature. Here, the predetermined button includes, for example, an effect button 192, a cross key button 191a, a bet button 132, and the like, but is not limited thereto. The predetermined button may be any operating means provided at a position where the player can operate it.

As an example of the operation request effect, for example, in the AT state, an operation request effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 192 may be executed after the third stop operation. In this case, as an operation response effect, the number of AT added games, which is the result of the AT added lottery, may be notified.

As another example of the operation request effect, for example, in a game in which a bonus combination is won (hereinafter referred to as a bonus winning game), an operation request effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 192 may be executed after the third stop operation. .. In this case, as an operation response effect, when the effect button 192 is operated once, a winning combination notification effect for notifying the internally won combination is executed at the same time as the bonus combination, and the effect button 192 is pressed and held for a long time. Is to execute a character selection effect of selecting and notifying a character appearing in the bonus effect executed in the bonus game. Hereinafter, as the operation response effect, the effect executed when the effect button 192 is operated once is referred to as the first operation response effect, and the effect executed when the effect button 192 is pressed and held is the second operation. It may be called a response effect.

The "one-time operation" for a predetermined button in the present embodiment means that the detection time by the sensor that detects the operation for the predetermined button (the time from the start of the operation for the predetermined button to the end of the operation) is the predetermined time. The case of less than T1 is referred to, and the “long press operation” means the case where the detection time by the sensor for detecting the operation of a predetermined button is T1 or more for a predetermined time. Whether or not the time is T1 or more is determined by whether or not the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 continuously detects the on state (pressed state) for a predetermined number of times corresponding to the predetermined time T1.

<Example N1>
The operation request effect and the operation response effect of the embodiment N1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 41.

FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the AT game, and shows an example of the effect when the effect button 192 is operated once. Since one game shown in FIG. 36 is a game in which the push order role is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process, the slot machine 100 executes the operation navigation from the start lever operation to the third stop operation and displays the effect image. The device 157 displays an image d1 showing the correct stop operation order.

After the third stop operation, the slot machine 100 executes the operation request effect and displays the image d2 prompting the operation of the effect button 192. When the player operates the effect button 192 once while the image d2 is displayed, the slot machine 100 executes the operation response effect, and the effect image display device 157 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 as a result of the AT addition lottery. The image d3 showing the number of added AT games given is displayed. That is, the first operation response effect in this case is an effect related to the privilege.

As described above, in the AT game of the embodiment N1, the slot machine 100 executes the operation request effect after the third stop operation, and the first operation response effect is based on the one operation of the effect button 192 corresponding to the operation request effect. Is supposed to be executed.

In addition, although FIG. 8 has described the case where the operation response effect is executed when the player operates the effect button 192 once, the operation response effect is executed when the player presses and holds the effect button 192 for a long time. You may.

FIG. 37 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the bonus winning game, and shows an example of the effect when the effect button 192 is operated once.

The slot machine 100 executes a bonus winning effect based on the third stop operation, and displays an image d10 indicating the bonus winning on the effect image display device 157. Next, the slot machine 100 executes the bonus blessing effect when the display of the image d10 ends, and displays the image d11 congratulating the bonus prize on the effect image display device 157.

After displaying the image d11 for a predetermined time, the slot machine 100 executes the operation request effect, and displays the image d12A prompting the operation of the effect button 192 once on the effect image display device 157. The image d12A is an image in which when the effect button 192 is operated once, a wording to notify the internally won combination (watermelon, cherry) at the same time as the bonus combination is displayed. When the player operates the effect button 192 once while the image d12A is displayed, the slot machine 100 executes the winning combination notification effect as the first operation response effect. Specifically, the winning combination notification effect displays the image d13 of the wording indicating the attention to the reel panel lamp 128 on the effect image display device 157, and displays the reel panel lamp 128 in a predetermined color suggesting the simultaneous winning combination ( For example, in the case of watermelon, it is green, in the case of cherry, it is red, etc.). That is, the first operation response effect is an effect related to the privilege. Oh, the privilege in this case is the notification of the winning combination, but the notification is not limited to this as long as it is the notification regarding the privilege of the player. For example, it may be a notification such as a pseudo bonus, a transition to an AT state, an addition of an AT game, or a transition to a specialized zone.

In the image example shown in FIG. 37, only the image d12A prompting the one-time operation is displayed, but as will be described in detail later in FIG. 38, the image d12A prompting the one-time operation of the effect button 192 is displayed. After that, the image d12B prompting the long press operation of the effect button 192 is displayed. Hereinafter, when the description includes both the image d12A and the image d12B, it may be referred to as an image d12.

Further, if the effect button 192 is operated once during the predetermined time during which the image d11 is displayed in this embodiment, the operation for the effect button 192 is not accepted. That is, the operation for the effect button 192 is effective only after the operation request effect is started to be executed.

As described above, in the bonus winning game of the embodiment N1, the slot machine 100 executes the operation request effect after the predetermined time has elapsed after the third stop operation, and operates the effect button 192 corresponding to the operation request effect once. The first operation response effect is executed based on.

FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the bonus winning game, and shows an example of the effect when the effect button 192 is long-pressed. Since the bonus winning effect is the same as that in FIG. 37, FIG. 38 shows an example of the effect after the third stop operation.

After displaying the image d11 for a predetermined time, the slot machine 100 executes an operation request effect, and causes the effect image display device 157 to perform an image d12A prompting the effect button 192 to operate once, and then a long press operation of the effect button 192. The prompting image d12B is displayed. The image d12B is an image in which when the effect button 192 is pressed and held for a long time, the wording that the character of the bonus effect is randomly drawn is displayed. When the player operates the effect button 192 once (when the pressing time is less than the predetermined time T1) in the state where the image d12A or the image d12B is displayed, the slot machine 100 performs the first operation response effect. Execute the winning combination notification effect. The winning combination notification effect is as described in FIG. 37 above.

Subsequently, when the player continuously operates the effect button 192 and presses and holds it for a long time (when the press time is T1 or more for a predetermined time), the slot machine 100 determines the first operation response effect being executed. Is terminated, and the character selection effect is executed as the second operation response effect. In the character selection effect, the effect image display device 157 displays an image d14 showing a character determined by a random lottery from a plurality of characters. Hereinafter, the character selection effect automatically selected by the random lottery may be referred to as a character selection effect by the random lottery. That is, the second operation response effect is an effect of setting information related to the game. In the character selection effect by random lottery, specifically, one character is determined by random lottery from three characters (for example, lord, princess, and grandfather).

As described above, in the bonus winning game of the embodiment N1, the slot machine 100 executes the operation request effect after the predetermined time has elapsed after the third stop operation, and the effect button 192 corresponding to the operation request effect is operated. If so, first, the first operation response effect is executed during the period when the pressing time for the effect button 192 is less than the predetermined time T1, and then the second operation is performed during the period when the pressing time for the effect button 192 is T1 or more. It is designed to execute a response effect. That is, when the effect button 192 is pressed and held for a long time, the player can enjoy both the first operation response effect and the second operation response effect.

In the operation request effect shown in FIG. 10, the image d12A prompting the one-time operation of the effect button 192 is displayed first, and then the image d12B prompting the long press operation of the effect button 192 is displayed, but the order is reversed. You may do it. That is, the image d12B prompting the long press operation of the effect button 192 may be displayed first, and then the image d12A prompting the one operation of the effect button 192 may be displayed.

FIG. 39 is a diagram in which the outline of the production of one game shown in FIGS. 36 to 38 is conceptualized. Here, the first game in FIG. 39 corresponds to the AT game, and the second game in FIG. 39 corresponds to the bonus winning game. Further, the first period indicates a period to be started immediately after the third stop operation, and the second period indicates a period to be started after a predetermined time has elapsed after the third stop operation. There is.

FIG. 39 (a) is a diagram showing an outline of the effect in the first game. FIG. 39A shows a case where the effect button 192 is operated once in the first period of the first game, that is, in the period of starting immediately after the third stop operation during the AT game. It is shown that the first operation response effect corresponding to one operation is executed in the first period (see FIG. 8).

FIG. 39B is a diagram showing an outline of the effect in the second game, and shows a case where the effect button 192 is operated once. FIG. 39 (b) shows the first period of the second game, that is, the period started immediately after the third stop operation of the bonus winning game (specifically, the period during which the bonus blessing effect is executed). When the effect button 192 is operated once, it is shown that the first operation response effect corresponding to the one operation is not executed in the first period (see FIG. 9). That is, since the slot machine 100 does not accept the operation for the effect button 192 during the period when the bonus blessing effect is being executed (not the operation valid period of the effect button 192), the slot machine 100 does not execute the first operation response effect. Further, FIG. 39B shows a second period of the second game, that is, a period started after a predetermined time of the third stop operation of the bonus winning game (specifically, the operation request effect is executed). When the effect button 192 is operated once in the period), it is shown that the first operation response effect corresponding to the one operation is executed in the second period (see FIG. 9). .. That is, since the slot machine 100 accepts the operation for the effect button 192 during the period during which the operation request effect is being executed (which is the operation valid period of the effect button 192), the slot machine 100 executes the first operation response effect.

FIG. 39 (c) is a diagram showing an outline of the effect in the second game, and shows a case where a long press operation on the effect button 192 is performed. FIG. 39 (c) shows the first period of the second game, that is, the period started immediately after the third stop operation of the bonus winning game (specifically, the period during which the bonus blessing effect is executed). , It is shown that when the long press operation for the effect button 192 is performed, the second operation response effect corresponding to the long press operation is not executed in the first period (see FIG. 10). That is, since the slot machine 100 does not accept the operation for the effect button 192 during the period when the bonus blessing effect is being executed (the first period is not the operation valid period of the effect button 192), the second operation response effect is produced. Do not execute. Further, FIG. 39B shows a second period of the second game, that is, a period started after a predetermined time of the third stop operation of the bonus winning game (specifically, the operation request effect is executed). In the second period, when the effect button 192 is pressed for a long time, the first operation response effect corresponding to the one-time press is first executed, and then the long-pressed operation is supported. It is shown that the second operation response effect is executed (see FIG. 10). That is, since the slot machine 100 accepts the operation for the effect button 192 during the period when the operation request effect is being executed (the second period is the operation valid period of the effect button 192), the first operation response effect is produced. And the second operation response effect is sequentially executed.

40 and 41 are diagrams showing an outline of a modification of the operation request effect and the operation response effect described in the embodiment N1, and show an image example of the effect image display device 157. In Example N1 described above, the first game is an AT game and the second game is a bonus winning game, but the first game and the second game are not limited to this. For example, the first game is "a game without notice", the second game is "a game with notice", there is a blank period after the third stop operation, and the first period starts after the blank period ends. It may be good (modification example 1). That is, the first game period may be a period that is started after a predetermined time has elapsed after the third stop operation. The notification of the modification 1 means, for example, notifying the result of the winning combination internal lottery process.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an outline of an operation request effect and an operation response effect in the first game of the first modification. FIG. 40 shows that after the third stop operation, the blank period is started first while the background image d20 of the game without notice is displayed, and the first period is started after the end of the blank period. There is. The first period in the first game is the period for executing the operation request effect. The operation request effect in the first modification is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 192. Specifically, after displaying the image d21A that prompts the long press operation of the effect button 192 on the effect image display device 157, the effect button. This is an effect of displaying the image d21B that prompts the one-time pressing operation of 192. In the first modification, the image d21A prompting the long press operation is first displayed, and then the image d21B prompting the single press operation is displayed.

When the effect button 192 is long-pressed in the first period, the slot machine 100 executes the stage selection effect and displays the stage selection screen d22 on the effect image display device 157. Specifically, the stage selection screen d22 is a screen for selecting one of the Yoshimune stage, the old man stage, and the princess stage based on the operation of the player. Specifically, the operation of the player is the operation of the cross key button 191a and the OK button 191b of the information display button 191. When the player selects and confirms the stage using the cross key button 191a and the OK button 191b on the stage selection screen d22, the effect of the stage selected in the bonus game is executed. That is, the stage selection effect is the second operation response effect in the first modification, and is an effect for setting information related to the game.

On the other hand, when the effect button 192 is pressed once in the first period, the slot machine 100 executes the volume / light amount adjustment effect, and the effect image display device 157 displays the volume / light amount adjustment screen. Display d23. The volume / light amount adjustment screen d23 is, specifically, a screen for setting the volume adjustment or the light amount adjustment based on the operation of the player. Specifically, the operation of the player is the operation of the cross key button 191a and the OK button 191b of the information display button 191. When the player selects and confirms the volume adjustment or the light amount adjustment using the cross key button 191a and the OK button 191b on the volume / light amount adjustment screen d23, the selected volume adjustment screen d24 or the light amount adjustment screen (shown). Z) is displayed. On the volume adjustment screen d24 or the light amount adjustment screen, the player sets a desired volume or light amount by using the cross key button 191a and the OK button 191b. That is, the volume / light amount adjustment effect is the first operation response effect in the first modification, and is an effect for setting information related to the game.

As described above, in the game without notice of the modification 1 of the embodiment N1, the slot machine 100 executes the operation request effect in the first period after the blank time after the third stop operation has elapsed, and the operation request effect is executed in the first period. When the effect button 192 corresponding to the operation request effect is operated in, the stage selection effect (second operation response effect) is executed for a long press, and the volume is performed for a single press. -Execute the light amount adjustment effect (first operation response effect).

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an outline of an operation request effect and an operation response effect in the second game of the first modification. In FIG. 41, after the third stop operation, the blank period is first started while the background image d30 and the notice image d31 of the game with notice are displayed, and the first period is started after the end of the blank period. It is shown that. The preview image d31 is an image showing the result of the winning combination internal lottery process of the game, and specifically, the color of the clothes of the characters appearing suggests the result of the winning combination internal lottery process. For example, red clothing suggests a cherry win, and green clothing suggests a watermelon win.

In the second game, unlike the first game, the operation request effect is not displayed in the first period (the operation for the effect button 192 is not effective in the first period). The first period in the second game is a period in which the image d31 is continuously displayed. That is, in the second game, in order to display the result of the winning combination internal lottery process, the image d31 is displayed for a longer period than the first game, and the notification period is set longer.

Subsequently, the second period started after the end of the first period is the period for executing the operation request effect. The operation request effect is an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 192 as in the first game. Specifically, the image d21A that prompts the long press operation of the effect button 192 is displayed on the effect image display device 157. After that, it is an effect of displaying the image d2B prompting the operation of pressing the effect button 192 once. Since the content of the operation response effect in the second game is the same as that in the first game, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the game with the notice of the modification 1 of the embodiment N1, the slot machine 100 continuously displays the notice image d31 even in the first period after the blank time after the third stop operation has elapsed. , When the operation request effect is executed in the second period after the end of the first period and the effect button 192 corresponding to the operation request effect is operated in the second period, a long press is performed. Executes a stage selection effect (second operation response effect), and executes a volume / light amount adjustment effect (first operation response effect) for a single press.

In the game with the advance notice of the first modification, even if the operation for the effect button 192 is started in the first period, the operation for the effect button 192 is continued thereafter and the operation is long-pressed in the second period. When is determined, the stage selection effect (second operation response effect) is executed in the second period. However, when the operation for the effect button 192 is started in the first period, the stage selection effect (second operation response effect) is not executed even if the long press operation is determined in the second period. May be good. That is, the stage selection effect (second operation response effect) may not be executed unless the long press operation is started in the second period.

As described above, according to the first modification, in the first game, when the operation request effect is executed in the first period and the effect button 192 is operated once in the first period, the first operation is performed. When the operation response effect of is executed and the long press operation for the effect button 192 is performed in the first period, the second operation response effect is executed. Further, according to the first modification, in the second game, when the operation request effect is executed in the second period and the effect button 192 is operated once in the first period, the first operation is performed. When the operation response effect is executed and the long press operation for the effect button 192 is performed in the first period, the second operation response effect is executed. That is, in the first modification, one of the first operation response effect and the second operation response effect is executed in one game, and neither of them is executed.

In the first modification, the demo effect may be executed at the start of the first period in the first game, and the demo screen may be displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, the stage may be selected or the volume / light intensity may be adjusted on the demo screen. Further, in the second game, the demo effect may be executed at the start of the second period, and the demo screen may be displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, the stage may be selected or the volume / light intensity may be adjusted on the demo screen.

Further, in the first modification, the game with a notice is a game in which the winning combination is notified in the winning combination internal lottery process, but the notification is not limited to this. Any notice regarding the player's benefits may be used. For example, it may be a notice of a pseudo bonus, a transition to an AT state, an addition of an AT game, a transition to a specialized zone, or the like.

In the above embodiment N1, the operation request effect (image d2, image d12A, image d12B) is executed during the entire period in which the operation for the effect button 192 is valid, but only in a part of the period, not the entire period. You may do it. In this case, even when the operation request effect (image d2, image d12A, image d12B) is not executed, the operation response effect may be executed as long as the operation for the effect button 192 is valid. ..

Further, in the above-mentioned Example N1, the operation explanation in the operation request effect is given in words (see images d12A and d12B), but the explanation image and the long press operation image of the one-time operation in the operation request effect may be changed (see images d12A and d12B). For example, the display mode of the button can be changed by one operation and a long press operation).

Although the lighting state of the effect button 192 (for example, lighting, blinking, emission color, etc.) is not mentioned in the above-mentioned Example N1, it can be appropriately designed. For example, in the first period of the second game, since the operation of the effect button 192 is not possible, the effect button 192 may be turned off. In addition, when the period during which the single press operation is possible and the period during which the long press operation is possible are separated, the effect button 192 lights up during the period during which the single press operation is possible and the period during which the long press operation is possible. The states may be the same or different.

<Example N2>
Next, the operation request effect and the operation response effect of Example N2 will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating an outline of an operation request effect and an operation response effect in a bonus winning game. In Example N2, the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the bonus winning game are partially different from those in Example N1. In the following, the functions different from those of Example N1 will be mainly described. That is, the parts having the same function and the same processing described in Example N1 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the N2 embodiment, there are three types of operation explanations for the operation request effect. The first operation explanation is an operation explanation for notifying the simultaneous winning combination by one operation of the effect button 192, and displays an image d12A prompting the one operation of the effect button 192. The second operation explanation is an operation explanation in which a character of a bonus effect is randomly drawn by a long press operation of the effect button 192, and an image d12B prompting a long press operation of the effect button 192 is displayed. The third operation description is an operation description in which a character for bonus effect can be selected by operating the cross key button 191a and the bet button 132, and displays an image d12C prompting the operation of the cross key button 191a and the bet button 132.

That is, in the operation request effect of the embodiment N2, the third operation explanation is added to the operation request effect of the embodiment N1. When the player operates the cross key button 191a (specifically, the left arrow key or the right arrow key) during the operation request effect, the effect image display device 157 displays the character to be selected. The selected image d15 in which the characters are replaced is displayed (for example, the image d12C in which the character "Den" is displayed in a large size in the foreground and is the selection target, and the image in which the character "Grandfather" is displayed in a large size in the foreground and is the selection target are displayed. Instead of d15). Then, when the player operates the bet button 132, the character to be selected is determined, and the slot machine 100 displays the image d16 notifying that the character of the bonus effect has been determined. Hereinafter, as the operation response effect, the effect executed by operating the cross key button 191a and the bet button 132 is referred to as a third operation response effect.

According to the embodiment N2, the character of the bonus effect can be selected by two kinds of methods. One is a method of automatically determining a character based on a long press operation of the effect button 192. In this case, a character selection effect by random lottery is executed. The other is a method of determining a character based on the player's selection based on the operation of the cross key 191a and the bet button 132, and in this case, the character selection effect by the player's selection is executed. In either method, the number of character choices is the same (specifically, three, lord, grandfather, and princess), but different results may occur.

Further, in the above-mentioned Example N2, the type of the character determined by the second operation response effect and the type of the character determined by the third operation response effect are the same, but may be different (they may be different). Modification 2).

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an outline of a modification of the operation request effect and the operation response effect of the modification 2. The slot machine 100 may display the image d15 for explaining the operation of the cross key button 191a and the bet button 132 on the effect image display device 157, and then display the image d16 for explaining the operation of the up arrow key. Then, when the up arrow key is operated by the player and the bet button 132 is operated, the slot machine 100 determines a rare character (for example, a premier grandfather) that does not exist in the original option, and the effect image display device. The image d17 may be displayed on the 157 to notify that the rare character has been determined.

According to the second modification, in the third operation response effect, it may be possible to determine an option that is not selected in the second operation response effect, so that the player improves the expectation by the operation request effect in the bonus winning game. be able to.

In the above-mentioned Example N2, the first operation response effect is a winning combination notification effect, and the second operation response effect (and the third operation response effect) is a character selection effect. However, the first operation response effect and the second operation response effect (and the third operation response effect) are not limited to this, and the first operation response effect and the second operation response effect (and the third operation response effect) are limited to this. The operation response effect) may be different types of effect from each other. For example, an effect in which the same type of effect is developed, such as a step-up effect of a notice, is not a different type of effect, and therefore cannot be applied to the first operation response effect and the second operation response effect. That is, the combination of the first operation response effect and the second operation response effect is not limited to the notification effect for notifying the privilege and the selection effect for selecting the option, and if they are different types, the selection effect and the selection effect. , It may be a selection effect and an explanatory effect regarding predetermined information.

In the above embodiment N2, the first operation response effect is executed when the effect button 192 is pressed once, and the second operation response effect is executed when the effect button 192 is long pressed. The operation conditions for executing the first operation response effect and the second operation response effect are not limited to this. For example, (1) the first operation response effect may be executed when a predetermined button is operated once, and the second operation response effect may be executed when a predetermined button is operated a plurality of times, or (2) a predetermined operation response effect. The first operation response effect may be executed when the button is operated less than a predetermined threshold value N, and the second operation response effect may be executed when the button is operated more than N times. (3) A predetermined operation response effect may be executed. The first operation response effect may be executed when the button is operated a plurality of times, and the second operation response effect may be executed when the predetermined button is pressed and held a plurality of times.

Further, in the above-mentioned Example N2, the operation request effect and the operation response effect are executed after the third stop operation of the bonus winning game, but the conditions for executing the operation request effect and the operation response effect are not limited to this. For example, it may be applied after the third stop operation such as AT game, pseudo bonus game, challenge zone game, etc., and when a predetermined privilege is announced, after the third stop operation or after the medal is paid out according to the notification pattern. You may want to do it.

In the present embodiment, the player can set various information (for example, volume, amount of light, etc.) by himself / herself by operating the information display button 191 to call the user menu. After the third stop operation of the bonus winning game, it is impossible to call the user menu and set various information.

Further, in the above-mentioned Example N2, the first operation explanation, the second operation explanation, and the third operation explanation are directly notified by using the effect image display device 157, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, it is not necessary to directly notify all of the first operation explanation, the second operation explanation, and the third operation explanation. For example, it is not necessary to directly notify the player of some operations as hidden operations.

<Example N3>
The embodiment N3 is an example relating to the volume adjustment of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the bonus winning game of the above embodiment N1. In the N3 embodiment, the volume of the effect is adjusted to decrease from the normal volume to the eco-volume when the TA elapses for a predetermined time after the bonus winning. In the present embodiment, the player can set the volume by himself / herself by operating the information display button 191 to call the user menu, but after the third stop operation of the bonus winning game. Is not possible.

44 and 45 are time charts relating to the volume change of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the bonus winning game, and the operation for the effect button 192. As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the effect button 192 is effective after the time t3 when the operation request effect is started to be executed.

FIG. 44 shows a case where the effect button 192 is operated before the predetermined time TA has elapsed. In this case, the effect sounds of the bonus winning effect, the bonus blessing effect, and the operation request effect are output at the normal volume. Further, the volume of the operation response effect started after the operation on the effect button 192 is also output as the normal volume. When the image d12B prompting the long press operation of the effect button 192 is displayed on the effect image display device 157, music related to the currently selected character (character displayed large in the foreground) is output at a normal volume. ing.

FIG. 45 shows a case where the effect button 192 is operated after the predetermined time TA has elapsed. In this case, the volume of the effect sound drops from the normal volume to the eco-volume at tx when the predetermined time TA has elapsed. Therefore, the slot machine 100 outputs the effect sound of the bonus winning effect and the bonus blessing effect at the normal volume, and outputs the effect sound of the operation request effect before the time point tx at the normal volume, and operates after the time point tx. Regarding the production sound of the required production, it is output at eco-volume.

After that, when the player performs an operation on the effect button 192 while the effect sound of the operation request effect is being output at the eco-volume, the slot machine 100 restores the volume and responds at the normal volume. Perform the production. That is, even if the volume of the effect is once lowered to the eco-volume, the volume of the effect returns to the normal volume when the player operates. The player can confirm that the operation for the effect button 192 is effective by returning the volume of the effect sound to the normal volume.

More specifically, as described with reference to FIG. 38, when the operation for the effect button 192 is a one-time operation, the first operation response effect corresponding to the one-time operation (specifically, the duplicate winning combination winning notification). After that, when the operation for the effect button 192 is a long press operation, a second operation response effect (specifically, random character selection) corresponding to the long press operation is executed.

In Example N3, when the volume of the effect is the eco-volume, the volume returns to the normal volume when the operation to the effect button 192 is performed, but it is also normal when the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 141. It is designed to return to the volume.

Further, in Example N3, when the TA elapses for a predetermined time after the bonus winning, the volume of the effect is adjusted so that the volume is lowered from the normal volume to the eco-volume. For example, the brightness of the effect image may be lowered to realize the eco-state of the effect.

Further, in the N3 embodiment, the volume of the effect is adjusted to decrease from the normal volume to the eco-volume when the TA elapses for a predetermined time after the bonus winning, but the condition for reducing the volume is not limited to this. For example, the volume of the effect may be lowered from the normal volume to the eco-volume even in the case of transition to the demo screen, credit settlement, or the like.

Further, Example N3 is an example relating to volume adjustment of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the bonus winning game of the above-mentioned Example N1, but the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the bonus winning game of the above-mentioned Example N2 are used. It may be an embodiment relating to volume adjustment.

<Example N4>
Example N4 is an example in which the light emitting mode of the bet button 132 when the character is selected by operating the cross key button 191a and the bet button 132 in the embodiment N2 is described in detail. In the N4 embodiment, when the cross key button 191a and the bet button 132 are operated to select a character, the operation for the bet button 132 is both an operation for determining a character and an operation for inserting a credit medal. It is an operation that doubles as. When the bet button 132 is lit (lit), it indicates that the operation for the bet button 132 is effective, and when the bet button 132 is not lit (not lit), the bet button 132 is lit. Indicates that the operation is not valid.

FIG. 46 shows the operation request effect (specifically, the image d12C displaying the third operation explanation) and the operation response effect (specifically, the third operation response effect) in the bonus winning game. Further, it is a figure which shows the light emitting mode of the bet button 132 after the start lever operation of the next game, and shows the case where the medal insertion is performed based on the operation with respect to the bet button 132.

The bet button 132 is in a non-lit state (time point t10) while the slot machine 100 is executing the bonus winning effect (displaying the image d10 showing the bonus winning). Subsequently, when the slot machine 100 starts executing the operation request effect (displaying d12A, d12B, and d12C indicating the operation explanation), the operation on the cross key 191a and the bet button 132 becomes effective, so that the bet button 132 is in the lit state. (Time point t11).

Subsequently, even if the player operates the cross key button 191a to select a character, the bet button 132 is in the lit state (time point t12). At time point t12, the character has been selected but has not yet been determined.

Subsequently, when the player operates the bet button 132, the bet button 132 is turned off (time point t15). That is, after the operation request effect is started, the bet button 132 remains lit until the bet button 132 is operated. The operation on the bet button 132 at the time point t15 has both an operation of determining the selected character and an operation of inserting three credit medals. Therefore, the slot machine 100 executes both the process of determining the character of the bonus game and the medal insertion process of inserting three medals based on the operation for the bet button 132.

Subsequently, when the player operates the start lever 135, the slot machine 100 starts the next game and starts executing the effect during the bonus game. The effect during the bonus game is, for example, an effect of displaying the bonus game image d31 on the effect image display device 157. Since the operation on the bet button is not effective after the time point t20, the bet button 132 is turned off.

FIG. 47 shows the operation request effect (specifically, the image d12C displaying the third operation explanation) and the operation response effect (specifically, the third operation response effect) in the bonus winning game. Further, it is a figure which shows the light emitting mode of the bet button 132 after the start lever operation of the next game, and shows the case where the medal insertion is performed based on the operation which inserts three medals from the medal insertion opening 141.

The bet button 132 is in the extinguished state (time point t10) while the slot machine 100 is executing the bonus winning effect (displaying the image d10 showing the bonus winning). Subsequently, when the slot machine 100 starts executing the operation request effect (displaying d12A, d12B, and d12C indicating the operation explanation), the operation on the cross key 191a and the bet button 132 becomes effective, so that the bet button 132 is in the lit state. (Time point t11).

Subsequently, even if the player operates the cross key button 191a to select a character, the bet button 132 is in the lit state (time point t12). At time point t12, the character has been selected but has not yet been determined.

Subsequently, when the player performs an operation of inserting three medals from the medal insertion slot 141, the bet button 132 is in the lit state (time point t13). That is, the bet button 132 is lit even if three medals are inserted. This is because the bet button 132 still has a character determination function. Therefore, it is possible for the player to operate the bet button 132 to determine the character at the time t13 when three medals are inserted, and if the operation for the bet button 132 is performed at the time t13. After the operation, the bet button 132 is turned off (not shown).

Subsequently, when the player does not operate the bet button 132 after the time point t13 and operates the start lever 135, the slot machine 100 determines the currently selected character even if there is no operation on the bet button 132. The effect to be performed is executed (time point t16), the next game is started, and the effect during the bonus game is started to be executed (time point t20). The effect of determining a character is, for example, an effect of displaying an image d16 informing the effect image display device 157 that the character of the bonus effect has been determined. The effect during the bonus game is, for example, an effect of displaying the bonus game image d31 on the effect image display device 157.

Since the operation on the bet button is not effective after the time point t16 (time point t16, time point t20) when the operation on the start lever 135 is performed, the bet button 132 is turned off.

As described above, according to the embodiment N4, when the operation request effect is executed in the bonus winning game, the bet button 132 remains lit until the bet button 132 or the start lever 135 is operated regardless of whether or not a medal is inserted. continue.

In FIG. 47, the case where three medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 141 is the same as the case where one or two medals are inserted. That is, also in this case, the bet button 132 is in the lit state at the time of inserting the medal. Then, the bet button 132 continues to be lit until the operation on the bet button 132 or the operation on the start lever 135 is performed.

Since the embodiment N4 follows the embodiment N2, it is possible to execute the character selection effect by random lottery as shown in FIG. 42 for the character selection effect. That is, when the operation request effect is being executed, it is also possible to select a character by performing a long press operation on the effect button 192.

Although the examples N1 to N4 of the present embodiment have been described above, the examples of the present embodiment are not limited to this, and each embodiment may be combined and configured.

<Summary of embodiments>
(1) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, Example N1),
An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate (for example, an effect button 192, an information display button 191 and a bet button 132).
With an effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, an effect image display device 157, a speaker 272, 277, various lamps 336, 420, etc.) ,
It is a game table equipped with
The effect means is, in a certain game (referred to as "first game") (for example, AT game, unannounced game, etc.), the first period (for example, a period started immediately after the third stop operation). When the operation means is operated once during the period after the end of the blank period after the third stop operation, the operation corresponding effect (hereinafter referred to as "first effect") (for example, the number of AT-added games is notified. The first operation response effect to be performed, the first operation response effect to adjust the volume and the amount of light) is a means that can be started.
The effect means is the second period (for example, a third game) in a certain game (referred to as "second game") (for example, AT game, game with notification, etc.) different from the first game. Operation response effect when the operation means is long-pressed during the period after the end of the bonus blessing effect started after the stop operation, the period after the end of the first period after the blank period after the third stop operation, etc.) (Hereinafter referred to as "second effect") (For example, a second operation response effect for notifying a character selected by random lottery, a second operation response effect for performing stage selection by oneself). And
The second period is a period started after the first period is started.
The effect means is a period (hereinafter referred to as "predetermined period") after the start of the first period and before the start of the second period in the second game. For example, during the first period, the period between the first period and the second period when the first period and the second period are not continuous, etc.), the operation means is started to perform a long press operation. If so, it is a means that does not start the second effect in the predetermined period (for example, FIG. 39 (c)).
This is the first basic configuration.

According to this first basic configuration, different effects corresponding to two types of operations for the operating means are executed for different periods for each game, so that it is possible to enrich the effect variations for each game, operation, and execution time. It is possible to perform new effects that have never existed before.

In the first basic configuration above,
The effect means is a means capable of starting the second effect in the second period when the long press operation on the operation means is started in the predetermined period in the second game.
This is the first suitable configuration.

According to the first preferred configuration, if the long press operation is performed for a predetermined period but continues for the second period, the second effect can be executed in the second period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned first basic configuration,
The effect means is a means that does not start the second effect in the second period when the long press operation on the operation means is started in the predetermined period in the second game.
This is the preferred configuration of 1-1.

In the first basic configuration, the first suitable configuration, or the 1-1 suitable configuration,
The effect means is an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means once in the second period in the second game (hereinafter referred to as "third effect") (for example, a bonus combination). At the same time, it is a means that can execute the first operation response effect) to notify the winning combination.
The effect means is a means that does not execute the third effect when the operation means is operated once in the predetermined period in the second game.
The first effect and the third effect are different effects.
This is the second preferred configuration.

According to the second preferred configuration, in the second game, the player does not perform any operation during the first period, so that the player does not perform the effect based on the operation for the first period. It can be recognized as a non-execution period.

The first effect (for example, the first operation response effect for adjusting the volume and the amount of light) and the third effect (for example, the first operation response effect for adjusting the volume and the amount of light) are the same. It may be a production.

In the second preferred configuration above,
The first effect is an effect related to the privilege given to the player (for example, the first operation response effect for notifying the number of AT-added games).
The second effect and at least one of the third effects are effects that can be individually set by the player in relation to the game (for example, a second effect that notifies a character selected by a random lottery). Operation response effect, second operation response effect in which the stage is selected by oneself),
The third suitable configuration is used.

According to the third preferred configuration, since the second effect and the third effect can be executed up to the second period, the player can individually set the operation even if the operation means is frequently operated. It is possible to reduce the annoyance of the appearance of the production.

In the first preferred configuration above
It is equipped with a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) which are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven.
The first period is a period that starts after all of the plurality of reels have stopped.
The second period is a period that starts after all of the plurality of reels have stopped.
When a certain condition is satisfied in the second game (for example, when an effect suggesting an internal winning combination of the winning combination internal lottery process is executed), the effect means has the second effect. Is a means of starting in the second period.
The certain condition is a condition that may be satisfied when a notice effect (for example, an effect suggesting an internal winning combination of the winning combination internal lottery process) occurs in the second game.
This is the fourth preferred configuration.

According to the fourth preferred configuration, since the notice effect can be executed in the first period before the second effect is executed, the notice period of the notice can be extended.

In the second preferred configuration or the third preferred configuration
The operating means determines that the operation on the operating means is a long press operation when the operation on the operating means continues for a predetermined time (for example, a predetermined time T1) or more, and the operation on the operating means is the operation. It is a means for determining that the operation is performed once when the predetermined time is not reached after the means is operated.
The effect means is a means for executing the second effect after executing the third effect when the long press operation is performed during the second period in the second game (for example,). 38 etc.),
This is the fifth preferred configuration.

According to the fifth preferred configuration, when the player presses and holds for a long time in the second game, the third effect and the second effect are executed, so that a plurality of types of effects can be enjoyed with one operation.

In the fourth preferred configuration above
The effect means is an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means once in the second period in the second game (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth effect") (for example, volume adjustment or It is a means that can execute the first operation response effect) that adjusts the amount of light.
The operating means determines that the operation on the operating means is a long press operation when the operation on the operating means continues for a predetermined time (for example, a predetermined time T1) or more, and the operation on the operating means is the operation. It is a means for determining that the operation is performed once when the predetermined time is not reached after the means is operated.
When the long press operation is performed during the second period of the second game, the effect means executes the second effect, and the effect means 1 during the second period of the second game. When the rotation operation is performed, it is a means for executing the fourth effect (for example, FIG. 41).
This is the sixth preferred configuration.

According to the sixth preferred configuration, the third effect or the second effect is executed in response to the single press or the long press in the second game, so that the operation in the second period is careful. Can be requested.
(2) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, Example N2),
A first operating means (for example, an effect button 192) provided at a position where the player can operate, and
With an effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, an effect image display device 157, a speaker 272, 277, various lamps 336, 420, etc.) ,
It is a game table equipped with
In a certain state (for example, after the third stop operation of the bonus winning game), the effect means has been subjected to the first operation (for example, one press or long press) with respect to the first operation means. In some cases, it is a means for executing the first effect (for example, a winning combination notification effect, a character selection effect, etc.).
In the certain state, the effect means has a second operation (for example, if the first operation is a single press, a long press, and if the first operation is a long press, 1). When a second effect is performed (for example, if the first effect is a winning combination notification effect, a character selection effect, if the first effect is a character selection effect, a winning combination notification effect, etc.) Is a means of doing
The first operation and the second operation are different operations.
The first effect and the second effect are different types of effects (for example, FIG. 42).
This is the second basic configuration.

According to this second basic configuration, since different effects are executed according to two types of operations on the operating means in a certain state, it is possible to enrich the effect variations in a certain state, which is new and unprecedented. It is possible to perform various effects.

Here, the first effect is performed by the first notification means (for example, one or a combination of an effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 336, 420), and the second effect. The effect is performed by the second notification means (for example, one or a combination of the effect image display device 157, the speaker 272, 277, various lamps 336, 420), and the first notification means and the second notification means. The notification means may be different notification means or may be the same notification means.

In the second basic configuration above,
The first operation (for example, one press) for the first operating means is an operation that is completed before the second operation (for example, long pressing) for the first operating means is completed.
The effect means starts the second effect (for example, a character selection effect) after starting the first effect (for example, a winning combination notification effect).
This is the seventh preferred configuration.

According to the seventh preferred configuration, the two effects can be executed by executing the second operation, so that the two effects can be enjoyed.

In the seventh preferred configuration above,
The first operation is a one-time operation with respect to the first operating means.
The second operation is a long press operation for the first operating means.
After the one operation for the first operating means is completed, the long press operation for the first operating means is completed.
This is the preferred configuration of No. 7-1.

In the second basic configuration, the seventh preferred configuration, or the 7-1 preferred configuration,
A second operating means (for example, a cross key button 191a, a bet button 132, etc.) provided at a position where the player can operate is provided.
The effect means has the first effect and the second effect when a third operation (for example, an operation on the cross key button 191 and then a bet button 132) is performed on the second operation means. A means of performing at least one of these effects,
This is the eighth preferred configuration.

According to the eighth preferred configuration, since the same effect can be executed by using the first operation means and the second operation means, it is possible to diversify the execution opportunity of the effect.

In the eighth preferred configuration above
The effect means is a means for executing the second effect (for example, a character selection effect) when the third operation is performed on the second operation means.
The result of the second effect executed when the second operation (for example, long press) is performed on the first operating means is that the third operation on the second operating means is performed. In some cases, a result different from the result of the second effect executed when the result is obtained may be derived.
This is the ninth preferred configuration.

According to the ninth preferred configuration, even if it is possible to perform the same effect by using the first operating means and the second operating means, different results are derived depending on the operating means. Since there are cases, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In the ninth preferred configuration above,
The second effect is a selection effect (for example, an effect of selecting a character who is winning a bonus).
In the effect means, when one of the second operation and the third operation is performed (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"), the player selects an option in the selection effect. It is a means for executing an arbitrarily selectable effect (for example, a character selection effect by a player).
When the second operation and the other operation of the third operation are performed (hereinafter, referred to as "second case"), the effect means selects the options in the selection effect by lottery. It is a means for executing the effect to be performed (for example, a character selection effect by a random lottery).
This is the tenth preferred configuration.

According to the tenth preferred configuration, there are cases where the player can and cannot select by himself / herself, so that the interest in the selection effect can be improved.

In the tenth preferred configuration above
The number of options that can be selected in the selection effect in the first case is different from the number of options that can be selected in the selection effect in the second case (for example, there are three types of character selection effect options by random lottery). , There are 4 types of character selection effects by the player, etc.)
This is the eleventh suitable configuration.

According to the eleventh preferred configuration, since the choices in the selection effect differ depending on whether the player can select himself or not, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

A game using at least one of the first operating means and the second operating means in the eighth suitable configuration, the ninth suitable configuration, the tenth suitable configuration, or the eleventh suitable configuration. It is provided with an information setting means (for example, an information display button 191) that allows a person to individually set predetermined information (for example, the volume of a production sound).
The information setting means is a means that cannot set the predetermined information in the certain state.
This is the twelfth suitable configuration.

According to the twelfth preferred configuration, since a certain state is a special state, the first operating means or the second operating means can be used for a purpose different from the normal time, and the hobby of the game is enjoyed. Can be improved.
(3) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, Example N3),
A first operating means (for example, an effect button 192) provided at a position where the player can operate, and
With an effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, an effect image display device 157, a speaker 272, 277, various lamps 336, 420, etc.) ,
It is a game table equipped with
The effect means is the first operation when the first operation (for example, one push) is performed on the first operation means while the first effect (for example, the operation request promotion effect) is being executed. It is a means for executing a response effect (for example, a winning combination notification effect).
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in the first effect state (for example, a normal mode that outputs a normal volume).
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in a second effect state (for example, an eco mode that outputs an eco volume).
When a certain condition is satisfied in the first effect state (for example, when a predetermined time TA has elapsed after the third stop operation), the process shifts from the first effect state to the second effect state. can be,
In the second effect state, when the first operation with respect to the first operation means is performed (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"), the first effect is performed from the second effect state. Transition to state (eg, FIG. 45),
This is the third basic configuration.

According to this third basic configuration, based on the first operation with respect to the first operating means, the first effect is continued and the second state or the first effect state is restored. It is possible to recognize through the first effect that the operation of is a valid period, and it is possible to execute a new effect that has never existed before.

In the third basic configuration above,
When the second operation (for example, long press) is performed on the first operation means while the first effect is being executed, the effect means has a second operation response effect (for example, for example). It is a means to execute (character selection effect, etc.),
This is the preferred configuration of No. 13-0.

In the preferred configuration of 13-0 above,
The effect means is a means for executing the first operation response effect in the first case.
This is the thirteenth suitable configuration.

According to the thirteenth preferred configuration, since the first operation response effect is executed in response to the first operation for the first operation means, the first operation is effective based on the execution of the operation response effect. You can recognize that it is a period.

In the thirteenth preferred configuration above
The effect means performs the first operation on the first operation means after the first effect is started in the first effect state and before the certain condition is satisfied. In this case, it is a means for executing the first operation response effect while maintaining the first effect state.
This is the 14th preferred configuration.

According to the fourteenth preferred configuration, the first operation is possible even before a certain condition is satisfied, and the first operation response effect can be executed even in the first effect state. can. ,
In the thirteenth preferred configuration, the thirteenth preferred configuration, or the fourteenth preferred configuration.
A second operating means (for example, a cross key button 191a, a bet button 132, etc.) provided at a position where the player can operate is provided.
The effect means performed a third operation (for example, after operating the cross key button 191a and then operating the bet button 132) with respect to the second operation means while executing the first effect. In this case, it is a means for executing the second operation response effect.
This is the fifteenth suitable configuration.

According to the fifteenth preferred configuration, the second operation response effect can be executed by two kinds of operations, so that the variety of games can be achieved.

In the fifteenth preferred configuration above
The third operation is an operation including a selection operation (for example, a selection operation by the cross key button 191a) and a decision operation (for example, a decision operation by the bet button 132).
The third operation is an operation completed by executing the determination operation after the selection operation.
When the selection operation of the third operation with respect to the second operating means is performed while the first effect is being executed in the second effect state, until the determination operation is executed. The first effect is switched to the first effect.
This is the 16th preferred configuration.

According to the sixteenth preferred configuration, even when the third operation consists of a plurality of operations, it is possible to return to the first effect of the first state by the determination operation.

In the fifteenth suitable configuration or the sixteenth suitable configuration.
The result of the second operation response effect executed when the second operation is performed on the first operating means is when the third operation on the second operating means is performed. A result different from the result of the second operation response effect to be executed may be derived.
This is the 17th preferred configuration.

According to the seventeenth preferred configuration, even if it is possible to perform the same effect by using the first operating means and the second operating means, different results are derived depending on the operating means. Since there are cases, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In the 17th preferred configuration above
The second operation response effect is a selection effect (for example, an effect of selecting a character who is winning a bonus).
In the effect means, when one of the second operation and the third operation is performed (hereinafter, referred to as "the third case"), the player selects an option in the selection effect. It is a means for executing an arbitrarily selectable effect (for example, a character selection effect by a player).
In the effect means, when the other operation of the second operation and the third operation is performed (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth case"), the options in the selection effect are selected by lottery. It is a means for executing the effect to be performed (for example, a character selection effect by a random lottery).
This is the 18th preferred configuration.

According to the eighteenth preferred configuration, there are cases where the player can and cannot select by himself / herself, so that the interest in the selection effect can be improved.

In the eighteenth preferred configuration above
The number of options that can be selected in the selection effect in the third case is different from the number of options that can be selected in the selection effect in the fourth case (for example, there are three types of character selection effect options by random lottery, and the game. There are 4 types of character selection and production options by the person),
This is the 19th preferred configuration.

According to the nineteenth preferred configuration, since the choices in the selection effect differ depending on whether the player can select himself or not, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In the fifteenth suitable configuration, the sixteenth suitable configuration, the seventeenth suitable configuration, the eighteenth suitable configuration, or the nineteenth suitable configuration.
An information setting means (for example, an information display button) in which a player can individually set predetermined information (for example, the volume of a production sound) by using at least one of the first operation means and the second operation means. 191 etc.)
The information setting means is a means that cannot set the predetermined information while executing the first effect.
This is the 20th preferred configuration.

According to the twentieth preferred configuration, when the first effect is being performed, the first operating means or the second operating means can be used for a purpose different from the normal time, and the game can be used. You can improve your interest.
(4) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, Example N4),
An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate (for example, bet buttons 130 to 132, effect buttons 192, cross key buttons 191a, etc.) and
With an effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, an effect image display device 157, a speaker 272, 277, various lamps 336, 420, etc.) ,
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 100), and the operating means is an operating means (for example, bet buttons 130 to 132) capable of inputting an electronically stored game medium.
It is possible to insert the game medium without using the operating means (for example, the medal insertion slot 141).
Equipped with
The effect means is a means for executing an operation response effect (for example, an operation response effect) when the operation means is operated and a game medium is input while a certain effect (for example, an operation request effect) is being executed. can be,
The effect means is a means that does not execute the operation response effect when the game medium is thrown in without using the first operation means during the execution of the certain effect.
This is the fourth basic configuration.

According to this fourth basic configuration, it is possible to select whether or not to execute the operation response effect according to the operation means, so that the player's intention can be reflected in the selection of the operation means, and a new effect that has never existed before can be obtained. Can be executed.

In the fourth basic configuration above,
It is equipped with a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) which are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven.
The effect means is a means for starting the certain effect in a period after all of the plurality of reels are stopped and before a new gaming medium is introduced.
The effect means is a means for executing the operation response effect and inputting the game medium when the operation means is operated and the game medium is input during the execution of the certain effect.
This is the 21st preferred configuration.

According to the 21st preferred configuration, one operation serves as two operations, so that the operation can be simplified.

In the 21st preferred configuration above
The operating means is a case where an upper limit number (for example, three) of game media to be used for one game is inserted without the operating means being operated while the effecting means is executing the certain effect (hereinafter, three). Even in the "first case"), it is a means configured to accept operations.
The operating means is a means in which the gaming medium is not charged when the operating means is operated in the first case.
The effect means is a means for executing the operation response effect when the operation means is operated in the first case (for example, FIG. 47).
This is the 22nd preferred configuration.

According to the 22nd preferred configuration, the operation response effect can be executed by using the operation means even after the upper limit number of game media used for one game has been input, so that the operation means can be used for various purposes. Can be used for.

In the 21st preferred configuration above
The operating means is a case where a game medium less than the upper limit number (for example, three) used for one game is inserted without the operating means being operated while the effecting means is executing the certain effect (for example, three). Hereinafter, even in the case of "second case"), it is a means configured to accept operations.
In the second case, the operating means is a means for charging the game medium up to the upper limit number when the operating means is operated.
In the second case, the effect means is a means for executing the operation response effect when the operation means is operated.
This is the 23rd preferred configuration.

According to the 23rd preferred configuration, since it is possible to execute both the loading of the game medium and the operation response effect by using the operating means in the state before the upper limit number of gaming media used for one game is loaded, the operating means can be used. It can be used for various purposes.

In the 22nd preferred configuration or the 22nd preferred configuration.
The operating means is in a state in which the certain effect is not executed, and in a state in which the game medium is not inserted, a first state (for example, a lit state) suggesting waiting for the game medium to be inserted. ), And
The operating means is the means that is in the first state when the certain effect is being executed and the game medium is not inserted.
The operating means is a means for changing from the first state to the second state (for example, a state in which the light is turned off) in connection with the operation of the operating means and the loading of the upper limit number of game media. And
The operating means is also in the first state after the upper limit number of gaming media has been loaded (hereinafter, referred to as after a predetermined time) by using the second operating means while the certain effect is being executed. Is a means to continue,
This is the 24th preferred configuration.

According to the 24th preferred configuration, since the operating means continues the first state even after the upper limit number of gaming media is input, the player recognizes that the operation response effect can be executed. be able to.

In the above 24th preferred configuration,
A start operation receiving means (for example, a start lever 135, a main control unit 300) for receiving an operation instructing the start of rotation of the plurality of reels is provided.
The effect means is a means for executing the operation response effect when the operation means is not operated after the predetermined time and the start operation reception means accepts the operation.
This is the 25th preferred configuration.

According to the 25th preferred configuration, when the start operation receiving means accepts the operation even if there is no operation for the operating means, the game can be started while executing the operation response effect.

In the fourth basic configuration, the 21st preferred configuration, the 22nd preferred configuration, the 23rd preferred configuration, the 24th preferred configuration, or the 25th preferred configuration.
The certain effect is a selection effect (for example, a character selection effect).
The operating means is a means that functions as a means for determining the options of the selection effect (for example, a determination button for determining the selected character).
This is the 26th preferred configuration.

According to the 26th preferred configuration
In the 26th preferred configuration, since the operating means can be used as a means for determining the selection effect, the operating means can be used for various purposes.

In the 26th preferred configuration above
A second operating means (for example, an effect button 192) provided at a position where the player can operate is provided.
The second operation means is a means that functions as a means for determining the selection effect option (for example, a button for executing a character selection effect by a random lottery).
This is the 27th preferred configuration.

According to the 27th preferred configuration, the selection effect can be realized by different operations, so that the variety of games can be realized and the interest can be improved.

It is preferable that the operating means and the operating method of the second operating means are different. Since the same selection effect can be executed by different operations, it is possible to realize a variety of games.

<Other game consoles>
The slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, and the game medium in this case includes electronic data corresponding to medals, and is a game medium. Input is performed from a predetermined external device (an electronic storage device having a function of storing the number of rented medals electronically and a function of storing the number of medals won by winning an electronic method). The payout of the game medium includes outputting the digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

[Fourth Embodiment]
The slot machine of the present embodiment starts rotation when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if they do not match, the game medium is used. It is a game table that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 48 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which multiple types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member in an appropriate number at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit of this optical sensor is provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line. The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 114.

For example, the notification lamp 123 informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in the internal lottery for the winning combination, which will be described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. It is a lamp to inform you. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment is lit until the bonus game is completed after the bonus notification that the bonus confirmation is announced. The notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, a maximum of three bets are inserted, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button capable of starting a certain effect when an operation is accepted. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as an effect button.

The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. The payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 110 to 112. .. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be pressed. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation may be referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation may be referred to as a third stop reel.

Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 as a stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 is called "forward push operation order". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can grasp that the high navigation state is in the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) is in front of the slot machine 100 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding a stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

It should be noted that the device may be configured to be capable of displaying various production images and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, or a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The notification lamp 123 and the high navigation state lamp 190 are designed to notify predetermined information by causing the lamps to emit light, but the notification mode is not limited to the light emission of the lamp. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a part of the area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a slot machine having a full liquid crystal display, an area near reels 110 to 112 may be used). Hereinafter, when it is described as lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high navigation state lamp 190, it is intended to include notification by another effect device (for example, a display device or the like) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 49 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 in a state where the front door 102 is opened. The main body 101 is a box body that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that houses the main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided at the upper part of the back plate 242, and the main control board storage case 210 Three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below. The side plate 260 on the left side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, the side plate 260 on the left side, houses the first sub control board that houses the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit. A case 220 is arranged. Further, an external centralized terminal plate 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals collected in a bucket) is arranged on the bottom plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power supply switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate in the closed state.

The power supply device 252 converts an AC power supply supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each into a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, and the like, which will be described later. It supplies to the control unit and each device. Further, a storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off is provided. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting the power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected to the power cord 265 extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and the effect device 160 and the effect control board (illustrated) for controlling the effect device 160 are on the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 157. Omitted), the upper speaker 272 is provided. At the lower part of the liquid crystal display device 157, a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops an illegal medal or the like onto the medal tray 161 are provided. There is. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 50. The figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of an internal lottery for a winning combination, and a reel stop. ROM 306 for storing positions, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 every interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor or the like and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 starts when the power is turned on and the random number value generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main process of the main control unit described later). To start).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor to be paid out from the medal payout device 180, index sensor of reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number value generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register storing the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 sensor are installed in the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect the input operation of the case. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, L Become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. Drive circuit 326 to drive the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the display 126, the payout number display 127, and the high navigation status lamp 190) is provided.

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted in an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output. Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 has a voltage value of the power supply set to a predetermined value (this implementation). In the embodiment, when the voltage is less than 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. is doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stores a ROM 406 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various indicators, and the like. It is provided.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and the speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via the output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is provided with various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input / output interface. 123 etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and bases the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement applied to each of the above-mentioned reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 51 (a). It should be noted that the figure is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in a planar development.

On each reel 110 to 112, a plurality of types (8 types in the present embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the figure are arranged in a predetermined number of frames (20 frames of numbers 0 to 19 in the present embodiment). Further, the numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, in the present embodiment, the frame number 19 on the left reel 110 is a "bell symbol", the frame number 19 on the middle reel 111 is a "blank symbol", and the frame number 18 on the right reel 112 is "seven 2". "Design", are arranged respectively. In the following, the "seven 1 symbol" may be referred to as "blue 7 (design)", and the "seven 2 symbol" may be referred to as "red 7 (design)".

<Prize line>
Next, the winning line will be described with reference to FIG. 51 (b). FIG. 51 (b) is a diagram showing a winning line of the slot machine according to the embodiment A1 of the present invention.

The symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 1) is on the upper stage symbol of the left reel, and on the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 2). The displayed symbol is the middle symbol on the left reel, and the symbol displayed on the lower symbol of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 3) is the lower symbol on the left reel and the upper symbol of the middle reel 111 (4 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed in the middle reel upper stage symbol, the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure; also referred to as the symbol position 5) is the middle reel middle stage symbol. The symbol displayed on the lower part of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 6) is placed on the lower part of the middle reel and the upper part of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 7). The displayed symbol is the upper symbol on the right reel, the symbol displayed on the middle of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 8) is the middle symbol on the right reel, and the symbol displayed on the lower row of the right reel 112 (9 shown in the figure). The symbols displayed at (position; also referred to as symbol position 9) are called the lower symbols on the right reel, and each symbol of each reel 110 to 112 is vertically three on each reel 110 to 112 through the symbol display window 113. A total of nine are displayed.

In the present embodiment, one winning line 114 of the middle winning line L1 composed of the left reel middle stage symbol (symbol position 2), the middle reel middle stage symbol (symbol position 5), and the right reel middle stage symbol (symbol position 8) is provided. ing. The winning line 114 is a line set at a stop position of the symbol that can be visually recognized through the reel window 113, and is a symbol corresponding to the winning combination described in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), which will be described later. It is a line that determines whether or not a combination is displayed. FIG. 51 (b) shows the middle prize line L1. The valid winning line (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium.

The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment can play a 3-card or 2-card bet, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 2, no winning line is valid and the number of medals is 3 or 2. The winning line L1 becomes effective when a bet is made. When the winning line is activated, the start lever 135 can be operated to start the game.

Further, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, it is composed of a right-down winning line composed of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel lower symbol, a left reel lower symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. A total of three winning lines that go up to the right may be set as valid winning lines 114, or a number of winning lines according to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines 114.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b). The figure (a) is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the three-card betting game. (B) is a diagram showing the type of winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the two-card betting game.

The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special role (special role 1, special role 2), a general role (replaying role 1 to replaying role 13, small role 1 to small role 5), and the like. The types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are roles for shifting to a special gaming state in which a predetermined benefit is given to the player. Further, the re-gaming combination 1 to the re-gaming combination 13 are roles that enable re-gaming without inserting a new medal. These winning combinations may be referred to as "acting combinations". Further, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of the medal (without the payout of the medal) is displayed on the valid line. For example, the special combination 1, The prizes for the special role 2 and the re-game combination 1 to the re-game combination 13 are included.

The special role 1 and the special role 2 are a combination (actuating combination) that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a prize. In this example, the special role 1 is a role that can be won only in the three-card betting game, and the special role 2 is a role that can be won only in the two-card betting game. No medals will be paid out due to winning the role itself. In the corresponding symbol combination, the special role 1 (BB1) is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2", and the special role 2 (BB2) is "BAR-BAR-Seven 1".

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 1, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 1 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 2, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 2 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3). ..

This flag is kept on until the internally won combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internally won combination in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game that is internally won in the special role 1 or the special role 2, the special role is internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special). If the role 1 is internally won, the "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)" symbol combination) will be in a state where it is easy to win. The special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2. Further, in this special gaming state, when a predetermined number of cards (in this example, 110 winning cards by BB1 and 55 winning cards by BB2) are paid out, a re-game low probability state (hereinafter, this state is referred to as RT1). There is). The special gaming state (RT4) and the re-gaming low probability state (RT1) will be described later.

The "re-game combination (re-game combination 1 to re-game combination 13)" is a winning combination (actuating role) that allows a player to play a game without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize. No medals will be paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are "replay-replay-replay" for replay 1 (normal replay), "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1" for replay 2 (directed replay 1), and replay 3 for replay. (Direction replay 2) is as shown in FIG. 52, such as "Seven 1-Seven 2-Seven 1".

"Small role (small role 1 to small role 5)" is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combination is "ANY-cherry-ANY" for small role 1 (cherry), small role. The role 2 (watermelon 1) is as shown in FIG. 52, such as "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon". The corresponding payout number is also as shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-cherry-ANY", the symbol of the middle reel 111 may be "cherry", and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the outline of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. For reel stop control, one of a plurality of types of reel stop control data determined in advance is selected based on a predetermined condition (for example, the result of an internal lottery process of a winning combination described later), and the selected reel stop is performed. Perform based on control data.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame slip control) is performed. The pull-in control is to shift the stop position of the reels 110 to 112 within a certain number of frames (number of symbols) range (pull-in range; here, maximum 4 frames) after each stop button 137 to 139 is operated by the player. Refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Each reel stop data has a permissible control that allows a predetermined combination of winning combinations to be displayed together on the winning line, and a prohibition control that does not display all the symbol combinations of any winning combination on the winning line. It is roughly divided into.

Examples of allowable control are, for example, when an internal winning combination is internally won or when a special winning combination is being internally won (the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is bad, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are displayed together within the range of the above number of frames. However, since it is only "allowed", the symbol combinations may not be aligned depending on the timing of operating each stop button 137 to 139.

For example, when the small winning combination 2 (watermelon 1) is internally won, the watermelon symbol is arranged in more than 4 frames, so if the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon symbol will be a winning line. Does not stop at.

However, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of frames drawn in, 100% may be aligned. For example, since the arrangement interval of the replay symbols corresponding to the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is a maximum of 4 frames, if the replay combination 1 is internally won, 100% of the prizes will be won regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, as an example in which the prohibition control is performed, for example, the internal lottery result is lost and the special role is not being internally elected (the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is good, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are not displayed together within the range of the above number of frames.

<Type of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of the gaming states of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 53A is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a replay low probability state (RT1), a replay high probability state special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a replay high probability state special role 2 internal winning. It has a state (RT3) and a special gaming state (RT4). In the present embodiment, the gaming states roughly divided into these four are referred to as RT-based gaming states. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to the so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as an AT system gaming state), and according to the AT system gaming state determined by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 is designed to set the gaming state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG. 53 (b).

The re-game low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability of operation of the condition device related to the re-game combination does not change (default state), a special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a special combination 2 internal winning state. (RT3) and the special gaming state (RT4) are also states in which the probability of operation of the conditional device related to the replaying combination varies from the default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 54 (a) is a diagram showing a lottery table used for the internal lottery process of the winning combination. The horizontal axis represents each game state (RT-type game state), and the vertical axis shows the lottery value of each winning combination.

The internal winning probability of the winning combination in each gaming state described below is a random number obtained at the time of the internal lottery from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306, numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination. It is obtained by dividing by the numerical data (for example, 65535) in the numerical range. For example, in the re-game low probability state (RT1), the lottery value of the small winning combination 2 is 512, and the winning probability of the small winning combination 1 is 512/65536 × 100 ≈0.8%. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each combination or loss.

It is determined which combination the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is the value corresponding to the lottery data, and the internal lottery combination is determined. For this lottery data, settings 1 to 6 having different winning probabilities for at least one combination are prepared, and a game store clerk or the like can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. The internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example and is not limited to this probability.

Hereinafter, the gaming state of the RT system of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The re-game low probability state is a game state in which the internal winning probability of the re-game is the lowest among other game states (for example, a game state excluding a special game state) (disadvantageous to the player), and is referred to as a normal game state. There is also. In the re-game low probability state, the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT1" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 54 (a).

Re-game The winning combination that is internally won in the low probability state is special role 1 (condition device No. 1. only for 3-card betting game), special role 2 (not shown, only for 2-card betting game), and re-game combination 1 (replaying game). Conditional device No. 2), re-gaming combination 2,4 to 10 (conditional device No. 3), re-gaming combination 3,4,6,8,10 to 13 (conditional device No. 4), small combination 1 to small There is a role 5 (condition device Nos. 5 to 9). If the winning combination is not won, the winning combination will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed. In addition, the fact that the symbol combination related to the winning is not stopped on the winning line may be referred to as "missing". In addition, the fact that the winning combination was not won may be expressed as "winning the loss".

Here, "re-game role 2, 4 to 10" means re-game role 2, re-game role 4, re-game role 5, re-game role 6, re-game role 7, re-game role 8, re-game role 9 , And the replaying combination 10 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, which combination of symbols is displayed is determined according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct answer operation order which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 2 is obtained. It is displayed on the winning line, and in other cases, depending on the stop operation timing of each reel 110 to 112, the re-gaming combination 4, the re-gaming combination 5, the re-gaming combination 6, the re-gaming combination 7, the re-gaming combination 8. The symbol combination corresponding to any one of the replay combination 9 and the replay combination 10 is displayed on the winning line. In addition, a combination in which the winning combination is determined by the operation order, such as this "replaying combination 2, 4 to 10", may be referred to as a "pushing order combination".

In addition, "re-game combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" means re-game combination 3, re-game role 4, re-game role 6, re-game role 8, re-game role 10, re-game role 11. , Re-game combination 12, and re-game combination 13 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, which combination of symbols is displayed is determined according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct answer operation order which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 3 is obtained. It is displayed on the winning line, and in other cases, depending on the stop operation timing of each reel 110 to 112, the re-gaming combination 4, the re-gaming combination 6, the re-gaming combination 8, the re-gaming combination 10, the re-gaming combination A symbol combination corresponding to any of 11, the re-game combination 12, and the re-game combination 13 is displayed on the winning line.

When the "small winning combination 4" is internally won, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (bell) is displayed on the winning line according to the operation order of the player (FIG. 54 (Fig. 54). a) See the remarks column). More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, "Bell-bell-bell" is displayed on the winning line and 11 medals are paid out (11 medals are paid out). Bell prize). On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed according to the correct answer operation order, "Bell-bell-bell" is not displayed on the winning line (loss).

In addition, when "small role 4" is composed of "small role 4a" and "small role 4b" and the "small role 4a" is internally won, "bell-bell-bell" is selected according to the operation order of the player. Is determined whether or not is displayed on the winning line, but if the "small winning combination 4b" is internally won, "bell-bell-bell" is displayed on the winning line regardless of the operation order. It may be configured to be.

Here, the operation order of the correct answer of "small combination 4" will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 54 (b). To be precise, "small role 4" is "small role 4LCR", "small role 4LRC", "small role 4CLR", "small role 4CRL", "small role 4RLC", and "small role 4RCL". It is set to be subdivided into, and different operation orders of correct answers are assigned corresponding to each of the subdivided "small roles 4". The range of lottery data associated with each of the six subdivided "small winning combinations 4" is the same.

For example, when the "small winning combination 4LCR" is internally won among the "small winning combination 4", the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is a correct operation, and the other stop operations are incorrect operations. Further, when the "small winning combination 4 CRL" is internally won among the "small winning combination 4", the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110. The stop operation is the correct operation.

FIG. 53 (a) shows that when the special combination 1 is internally elected (when the condition (A) is satisfied), the system shifts to the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) described later. It is shown that when the special role 2 is internally elected (when the condition (B) is satisfied), the state shifts to the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) described later.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
The special role internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "special role internal winning state") are the replay low probability state (RT1). ), The internal winning probability of the re-game combination is higher than that of), and the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to ON, and the player stops the operation at a predetermined timing. By doing so, it is possible to display the symbol combination corresponding to the special role corresponding to this flag.

In the special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT2" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. In RT3), the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT3" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 54 (a). The prize-winning roles that are internally won in the special role internal winning state include replaying role 1, replaying role 2,4 to 10, replaying role 3,4,6,8,10 to 13, small role 1 to small role 4 There is. If the winning combination is not won, the winning combination will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed. Further, in FIG. 53A, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is displayed in the special combination internal winning state (when the condition (C) is satisfied), the special game described later is performed. It has been shown to transition to state (RT4).

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the most advantageous gaming state among all the gaming states. In the special game state, the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT4" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 54 (a). In the special game state, the winning combination that is internally won is only the small combination 5. In addition, if the winning combination is not won, it will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed.

FIG. 53 (a) shows that in the special game state (RT4), when the specified number of sheets is paid out (when the condition (D) is satisfied), the game shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT1). ing. Specifically, when the game shifts to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1, when more than 110 medals are paid out, the re-game low probability state (RT1) Move to. In addition, when the game shifts to the special gaming state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2, the game shifts to the replay low probability state (RT1) when more than 55 medals are paid out. ..

In this embodiment, the special game state ends when a predetermined number of payouts are executed, but for example, a game ends when a predetermined combination (for example, a single bonus) is won, or a predetermined number of times (for example, a predetermined number of times). It may be terminated when there is a prize (for example, 8 times) or when a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times) of games are played. That is, the condition (D) shown in FIG. 53 (a) is not limited to this example.

<Transition of AT-based game state>
Next, the game state of the AT system will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (b). FIG. 53B is a transition diagram of the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

As shown in the figure, the AT-type gaming states are roughly classified into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is higher than that in the low navigation state, and is also referred to as an AT mode. Here, the operation navigation is internally elected as a push order combination (in this example, a replay combination 2,4 to 10, a replay combination 3,4,6,8,10 to 13, or a small combination 4). In this case, it refers to the effect of notifying the operation order of the correct answer. That is, the operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the content of the stop operation for acquiring a medal, the content of the stop operation for shifting to an advantageous gaming state or maintaining an advantageous gaming state.

Here, the operation navigation will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 (b) and 55. In the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed by using the payout number display device 127 and the effect image display device 157. FIG. 54 (b) is a diagram illustrating a correct operation order of the push order combination of the slot machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 55 is a diagram in which display data and a lighting mode of the payout number display 127 are associated with each other. be.

For example, the display data 01 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is set to the left reel 110, the display data 02 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is set to the middle reel 111, and the display data 03 is data suggesting a stop operation. , The data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112.

Therefore, in the AT mode, when the "re-game combination 2,4 to 10" or the "re-game combination 3,4,6,8,10 to 13" is internally won, the first stop reel is set to the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is the correct answer, the display data 03 suggesting that the first stop operation is on the right is selected, and the payout number display 127 displays the lighting mode corresponding to the display data 03 and displays the effect image. The device 157 displays an image (for example, the character "--1") suggesting that the first stop reel is the right reel 112.

Further, the display data 04 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112, and the display data 05 is the first stop reel. The left reel 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, the third stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the display data 06 is the first stop reel as the middle reel 111 and the second stop reel. In the data and display data 07 suggesting a stop operation in which the left reel 110 and the third stop reel are the right reel 112, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left. The data suggesting a stop operation with the reel 110 and the display data 08 are data suggesting a stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third stop reel as the middle reel 112. The display data 09 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110.

Therefore, when the small winning combination 4CLR of "small winning combination 4" is internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is the correct answer, display data 06 suggesting that the first stop operation is in the middle, the second stop operation is on the left, and the third stop operation is on the right is selected, and the display data 06 is displayed on the payout number display 127. The lighting mode corresponding to is displayed, and the effect image display device 157 suggests that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The image to be reeled (for example, the character "213") is displayed.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether the internal winning combination is the replaying combination or the small winning combination 4 based on the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. However, for example, the operation to stop the correct answer of the small winning combination 4 may be set to three options as in the replaying combination, and the small winning combination 4 may also be configured to be notified using the display data 01 to 03. In this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode. Further, the operation of stopping the correct answer of the re-game combination may be set to 6 options as in the small combination 4, and the re-game combination may also be configured to be notified using the display data 04 to 09. Even in this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode.

In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is higher than that in the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed. The high navigation state is more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state because the stop operation according to the operation content of the operation navigation brings a favorable result to the player. Here, the advantage is specifically the total number of game media paid out by the game console with respect to the total number of game media used by the player as a bet number when playing a game for a predetermined period. The ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball payout rate).

In the present embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the low navigation state (for example, when a winning combination other than loss is won), the game shifts to the normal state in the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), for example, the transition is made in the order of the finalized notification state → AT1 state → judge state, and the judge state is changed to the normal gaming state or AT2 state via the pullback state. There are routes and routes that directly shift from the judge state to the AT2 state. In the present embodiment, when the transition of the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state) is determined, a predetermined number (for example, 50 games or the like) is given to the number of games in the AT mode (hereinafter referred to as the number of AT games). Further, although the details will be described later, when a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the state shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
FIG. 53B is a diagram showing an effect state in each game state of the AT system. As shown in FIG. 53 (b), each game state of the AT system is further subdivided and managed, and this is called an effect state. Specifically, the low navigation state effect state has a normal state, and the high navigation state effect state has a normal state, a confirmed notification state, a judge state, a pullback state, an AT1 state, an AT2 state, and an LMT (limit) state. .. In addition, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state are, in principle, states in which the number of balls to be ejected increases.

Here, the limit state means, in principle, the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, that is, the production state from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state (from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state). It is possible that the production state of is not the limit state, but this case will be described later). In the present embodiment, when the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, an ending effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “ED effect”) suggesting the end of the high navigation state is executed.

<Direction table>
Next, the effect table provided in the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 56.
FIG. 56A illustrates an image of an effect table included in the first sub-control unit 400. The storage means (for example, ROM 406 or RAM 408 shown in FIG. 50) of the first sub-control unit 400 stores an effect table provided for each effect state.

The first sub-control unit 400 has an effect information (for example, an effect state, a high navigation state counter, etc.) included in the command received from the main control unit 300 in the command process (step S3604) of the first sub-control unit main process described later. The effect state counter, etc.) is acquired, and in the subsequent effect control process (step S3605), the effect table corresponding to the effect state, etc. is referred to, and the effect according to the effect state counter, etc. is performed. For example, when the current effect state is the AT1 state, the effect table corresponding to the AT1 state (AT1 state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading the effect data for executing the AT1 effect described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

Further, when the current effect state is the judge state, the effect table corresponding to the judge state (judgment state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading the effect data for executing the judge effect described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

FIG. 56B is a diagram showing an example of a judge state effect table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the judge state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to, for example, the judge state effect table as shown in FIG. 56B, and is currently present. Judge production corresponding to points and production status counters is performed.

Specifically, when the effect is controlled according to the judge state effect table shown in FIGS. 56 (b) and 56 (1), when the point is 1, the enemy character is A → A → A → B (expectation is A). A judge effect that changes in the order of <B) is performed, and when the point is 2, a judge effect that changes the enemy character in the order of A → A → B → B is performed. Further, when the effect control is performed according to the judge state effect table shown in FIGS. 56 (b) and 56 (2), when the value of the effect state counter is N (the number of remaining games in the judge state is N), the effect mode is D1. A judge effect is performed by changing the number of -1 → D2-1 → D3-1 → ..., and when the value of the effect state counter is N-1 (the number of remaining games in the judge state is N-1), the effect mode is set. Judge production is performed by changing the turn of D1-2 → D2-2 → D3-2 → ....

Further, when the current effect state is the LMT state, the effect table corresponding to the LMT state (LMT state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading the effect data for executing the LMT effect described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

FIG. 56 (c) is a diagram showing an example of an LMT state effect table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the LMT state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the LMT state effect table as shown in FIG. 56 (c) and sets the counter to the counter. It is determined whether or not the corresponding trigger (start condition, end condition, etc. of the production) has arrived, and when the trigger has arrived, the production corresponding to the counter is performed.

Specifically, when performing effect control according to the LMT state effect table shown in FIGS. 56 (c) and 56 (1), the value of the effect state counter is 1 (the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1), and the start lever 135. When the pressing operation (rebaon) of is accepted, the current setting value is selected from a plurality of types of effects A1 to A3 using the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect A shown in FIGS. 56 (c) and 56 (2). A predetermined effect is selected, processing such as reading the effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406 is performed, and the setting suggestion effect A (for example, display of a character image) is executed.

Further, when the value of the effect state counter is 0 (the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0) and the third stop operation is accepted, the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect B shown in FIGS. 56 (c) and 56 (2) is displayed. A predetermined effect is selected from a plurality of types of effects B1 to B10 according to the current set value, and processing such as reading the effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406 is performed, and the setting suggestion effect B is performed. (For example, the background image of the end screen) is executed.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the case of a two-card betting game, when a control for continuously displaying a specific scene (not displaying a subsequent scene) is performed in the interlocking effect, the effect state is performed by the main control unit 300. Since the value of the counter is not updated, the first sub-control unit 400 continuously displays the scene corresponding to the value of the same effect state counter. The control method for continuously displaying a specific scene (not displaying a subsequent scene) in the interlocking effect is not limited to this example, and is interlocked with, for example, from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. It may be configured not to send a command for displaying a subsequent scene in the production.

The effect mode, type, determination method, etc. of the setting suggestion effect are not limited to this example, and are, for example, according to the current effect state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state) as shown in FIG. 56 (d). The execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. For example, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be higher or lower when the effect state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state) is larger than when it is small.

<Operation of slot machine>
Based on the above features, the processes of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 57. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 57 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the operation is permitted to the WDT 314, and the initial setting is performed. Set the value, etc.

In step S102, the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and preparations are made for sending an insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted. If the player wins the re-game combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, a winning line confirmation process is performed in which the number of inserted medals is determined and a valid winning line is determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired, and a winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number value, and the result of this internal lottery is shown. Preparations are made for transmitting the internal lottery command to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the winning combination flag is turned on.

In step S105, a reel stop data selection process for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Further, in step S105, preparations are made for transmitting a reel stop data command including information regarding the selected reel stop data to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S106, the effect state control process A related to the control of the game state of the AT system described above is executed based on the start lever operation. In step S107, the effect processing is executed. In this effect processing, various effects are controlled.

In step S108, the reel rotation start processing is executed, and the rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is started.

In step S109, the reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, the reel stop data stop table is displayed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Refer to it and stop any of the reels 110 to 112 according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. When all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S110. In this step S109, the stop button reception command relating to the stop buttons 137 to 139 for which the stop operation was performed for each stop operation (specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command and the second stop operation). Prepare to send the stop button reception 2 command for the third stop operation, and the stop button reception 3 command for the third stop operation) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel. Reel stop command related to the stop position (specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop for the third stop operation) 3 Command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, a winning determination process for determining a winning is performed. In this winning combination processing, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the player has won the small role 3 (Bell). Further, in this step S110, preparations are made for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, a medal granting process is performed. In the medal granting process, if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S112, the game state control process is performed. In the game state control process, processing related to the transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and the game state is transferred when the start condition or the end condition is satisfied. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the game state of the current RT system.

In step S113, the effect state control process B related to the control of the game state of the AT system described above is executed. In step S114, the high navigation state end processing related to the end of the high navigation state is executed.

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-mentioned process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S2006 in FIG. 58) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 58. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger for the main control unit timer interrupt. The process is started in a predetermined cycle.

In step S2001, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S2002, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit.

In step S2003, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S2004, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed. In step S2005, the timer update process is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in each time unit.

In step S2006, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S2007, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S2008, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S2003, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out to monitor the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc., and if an error is detected, (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S2009, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S2011, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S2010.

In step S2010, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S2001 is set in each of the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 57.

On the other hand, in step S2011, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 57.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. Note that FIG. 59A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 59B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 59 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (a).

When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S3001. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing the internal winning information, which is information representing the result of the internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state.

In step S3002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S3004, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S3005, the effect control process is performed. Here, the production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing a process such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S3006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S3005, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S3007, the lamp control process is performed based on the process result of step S3005. For example, if there is an instruction to various lamps 420 in the effect data read in step S3005, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S3008, the shutter control process is performed based on the process result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the effect data read in step S3005, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S3009, information output processing is performed in which a command is set to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S3005, a setting is made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S3002.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S3101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S3201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S3002 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 59 (a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S3002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S3202, a command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S3009, an effect random number value is updated, and the like are performed.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. Note that FIG. 60A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 60B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 60 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 60 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 500.

First, in step S4001 of FIG. 60 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S4001. In this initialization process, input / output port initial setting, initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, initialization process of the storage area in the VRAM 536, and the like are performed.

In step S4002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S4004, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S4005, the effect control process is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S4004, the process corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading the effect data for controlling the image of the background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading out the production data from ROM 506 other than this is included, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S4006, image control processing (details will be described later) is performed based on the processing result of step S4005. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S4005, the image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding a display image (notification image, background image) is executed. When this image control process is completed, the process returns to step S4002.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S4101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S4201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S4002 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 60A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S4002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S4202, the effect random number value is updated.

Next, the image control process of step S4006 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 60d). The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S4301, an instruction to transfer image data is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 536 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 536), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 534 based on a table such as position information, and then an image from ROM 506 to VRAM 536. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the instructions set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S4302, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S4303. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

In step S4303, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S4301, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 536, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transparency, etc.) are instructed to VDP534. The VDP 534 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S4304, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S4305, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 based on the end of drawing the image is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S5306, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for to be entered.

In step S4306, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Operation means>
Next, the operation means provided in the game console according to the present embodiment will be described.

A plurality of game consoles according to the present embodiment include at least a first operating means provided at a position where the player can operate and a second operating means provided at a position where the player can operate. It is configured to have the operation means of. The operating means is at least a means that can be operated by the player. As an example of the operating means, for example, the start lever 135, the stop buttons 137 to 139, the bet button 130, the bet button 131, the effect button (bet button) 132, the medal return button 133, and the settlement button 134 described with reference to FIG. 48 are used. In addition, a touch panel and the like may be mentioned, and the first operating means and the second operating means can be configured by any combination of any two of these operating means.

The operation means may be composed of a plurality of operation units (for example, four buttons for up / down / left / right and one decision button), and in this case, all of the plurality of operation units (four buttons for up / down / left / right). One decision button) may be defined as an operating means, or at least one of a plurality of operating units (for example, two upper and lower buttons or one decision button) may be defined as an operating means. good. Further, when a plurality of effect buttons (including operation means for effect other than the buttons) are provided, any two of these effect buttons can be used in combination.

Further, the operating means can be in a plurality of states including at least a first state and a second state different from the first state. For example, when the operating means includes an optical output means capable of outputting light, the first state is one of the states such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of the optical output means, and the second state is the optical output means. Is one of lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc., which is different from the first state.

Further, for example, when the operating means includes the movable means, the first state is that the movable means is any of vibration, rotation, ascent, descent, reciprocating motion, and the like, and the second state is that the movable means is. It is a state different from the first state in any of the states such as vibration, rotation, ascent, descent, and reciprocating motion.

Further, for example, when the operating means includes a display means, the first state is a state in which the display means is displaying a certain display, and the second state is a display in which the display means is different from a certain display. May be displayed, the first state is a state in which the display means is displaying a certain display, and the second state is a state in which the display means is displaying a certain display. It may be in a non-existent state (or a state in which a part of a certain display is displayed).

Further, for example, when the operation request display for prompting the operation by the operating means is performed, the first state is the state in which the first operation request display is displayed at the time of the operation by the operating means, and the second state is. , A state in which a second operation request display different from the first operation request display may be displayed and different from the first state at the time of operation by the operation means may be displayed, or the first state may be displayed. Is a state in which the operation request display is displayed at the time of operation by the operating means, and the second state may be a state in which the operation request display is not displayed at the time of operation by the operating means.

<Continuous hit production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, various effects in continuous hitting will be described.

Here, the continuous hitting effect is an effect of notifying the player about the privilege advantageous to the player, and is an example of the "first certain effect" according to the present invention. As "privileges advantageous to the player", for example, an AT game is added, the number of medals won is added, an AT winning judge such as a bonus or a pseudo bonus is given from normal times, various lottery is given, and the player is given. Transition to an advantageous state (AT, bonus, high navigation state, etc.) can be mentioned.

In this continuous striking effect (a certain first effect), the first effect (in this example, the total notification TG) corresponding to the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the effect button 132) can be started. At the same time, the second effect (in this example, the privilege grant effect SG) corresponding to the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the start lever 135) can be started.

<First production in continuous hitting production (total notification)>
FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (1) to (a) and (4) are diagrams showing an example in which the first effect (total notification) is started in the continuous striking effect in chronological order.

The effect shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (1) indicates the start of the continuous hitting effect, and in this example, the continuous hitting effect is started with the third stop operation as a trigger.

In the continuous striking effect of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to blink the button image (operation request display) BG that imitates the appearance of the effect button (first operating means) 132, and above the button image BG. , By displaying the instruction image (operation request display) IG including the characters of "continuous hit", the operation request display requesting the player to operate the effect button 132 multiple times (continuously hit the effect button 132) is displayed. Is going.

Although not shown, the LED (light output) included in the effect button (first operating means) 132 (not shown) is provided during the period when the operation request display (button image BG and instruction image IG in this example) is displayed. By executing the effect of blinking the effect), the effect button (first operating means) 132 is shifted to the first state (blinking state).

On the other hand, in this continuous striking effect, the second effect (in this example, the privilege granting effect shown in FIGS. 61 (b) and (3)) corresponding to the operation of the second operating means (start lever 135 in this example) is performed. Although it is possible to start, at the timing shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (1), the operation request display requesting the player to operate the start lever (second operating means) 135 is not performed.

The subsequent effect shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (2) shows the continuation of the continuous hit effect. In this example, the AT addition notification is started triggered by the pressing operation of the effect button (first operating means) 132. ing.

In the AT addition notification of this example, each time the pressing operation of the effect button (first operating means) 132 is received, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to include a number suggesting a part of the number of addition games determined to be added. By displaying an image, a part of the number of AT additional games is notified.

Subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (3) indicate the start of total notification (first effect) during the continuous hit effect, and in this example, the effect button (first operation means) is shown during the continuous hit effect. ) The total notification TG is started when the pressing operation of 132 is received a predetermined number of times (the total of the operation response displays of the predetermined number of times is predetermined to be 80 in this example).

In the total notification TG of this example, the number of additional games determined to be added by using the liquid crystal display device 157 when the pressing operation of the effect button (first operating means) 132 is received a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). By displaying an image including a number suggesting the total number of games, the total number of AT-added games (80G in this example) is notified.

Subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (4) show an example of a result notification effect when a pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted in the next game during the continuous hitting effect.

In the result notification effect KG of this example, the display of the number of remaining AT games on the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed from 153G to 232G when the pressing operation of the start lever (second operating means) 135 is accepted in the next game. By updating to (= 153G + 80G-1G (operation by the start lever)), the result of the AT game (the number of remaining AT games) is notified to the player.

<Second production in continuous hitting production (privilege production)>
FIGS. 61 (b) (1) to (b) (3) are diagrams showing an example in which a second effect (privilege grant effect) is started in the continuous striking effect in chronological order. Since the effect shown in FIGS. 61 (b) and 61 (1) is the same as the effect shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (1), the description thereof will be omitted.

The effects shown in FIGS. 61 (b) and 61 (2) show the continuation of the continuous hitting effect, and in this example, the next game is started when a specified number (3) of medals are inserted. .. In this example, since the operation of the effect button 132 was not accepted during the period when the operation request display corresponding to the effect button 132 is displayed, the total notification (first effect) is not started.

Subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 61 (b) and 61 (3) indicate the start of the privilege granting effect (second effect) during the continuous hitting effect. In this example, the start lever (second operation) is performed during the continuous hitting effect. Means) With the reception of the pressing operation of 135 once, the privilege granting effect SG and the result notification effect KG described with reference to FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (4) are started.

In the privilege-giving effect SG of this example, when the pressing operation of the start lever (second operating means) 135 is received once, the character suggesting the addition of AT by using the liquid crystal display device 157 (in this example, GREAT). ) Is displayed to notify the player that the privilege (additional AT) has been granted.

Needless to say, various notifications may be performed by a display other than GREAT (for example, GOOD, COL, EXCELLENT, etc.) according to the total number of games to be added.

In this example, the total notification is started as the first effect, and the privilege granting effect is started as the second effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the start lever (second). (Operation means) The result notification effect KG, which is started by the pressing operation of 135, may be used as the second effect.

Further, the first effect and the second effect may be the same effect, or one may have an effect and the other may have no effect. Further, in this example, the total notification and the privilege granting effect are the effects of notifying the player about the benefits that are advantageous to the player, but other types of effects may be used.

Further, the operation request display corresponding to the effect button 132 is not limited to the button image BG and the instruction image IG shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (1), and is displayed in, for example, any one of a plurality of patterns. In this case, an operation request display as shown in FIG. 61 (c) may be displayed as one of the plurality of patterns.

In the operation request display of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used, and the button image (operation request display) imitating the appearance of the effect button (first operation means) 132 is shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (1). By blinking the button image (deca button image) BG2 larger than the button image BG and displaying the instruction image (operation request display) IG2 containing the characters "press!" Above the button image BG2, the effect button 132 The operation request is displayed to request the player to operate the above a plurality of times (striking the effect button 132 repeatedly).

<Judge production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, various effects in a series of judges will be described.

Here, the judge effect is an effect of notifying the result of the completed game, and is an example of the "second certain effect" according to the present invention. The "results of the completed games" include, for example, the result of a lottery according to the internal winning combination, the result of the lottery according to the number and number of CZ games, the number of fits, etc., the winning result of various lottery, and the mini game. Results etc. can be mentioned.

In this judge effect (a second effect), a third effect (in this example, an operation response effect) corresponding to the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the effect button 132) can be started. However, the effect is not executed in response to the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the start lever 135).

When the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the start lever 135) is accepted in the judge effect (a second effect), the first operation means is performed without starting the third effect. It may be configured so that the operation validity period of is terminated. Further, the second certain effect is not limited to the judge effect, and is, for example, an effect in which a part of the effect mode is different from the continuous hitting effect described with reference to FIG. 61 (some effect modes are common). May be good.

<Third production in judge production (operation response production)>
62 (a) (1) to 62 (a) (8) are diagrams showing an example in which a third effect (result notification effect) is started in the judge effect in chronological order.

The effect shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (1) indicates the start of the judge effect executed in the CZ (chance zone). , The judge production performed during CZ has started. In the judge effect of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a notification effect including the characters "development!" To notify that the gaming state has shifted to CZ.

Subsequent FIGS. 62 (a) (2) to (a) (4) are views showing an example of the production in the first to third games of CZ. In this example, in the first CZ game, a judge effect including a video of the lord chasing the grandfather is performed, in the next CZ2 game, a judge effect including a video of the lord approaching the grandfather is performed, and in the next CZ3 game, the lord is performed. Is performing a judge production including a video of catching up with his grandfather and colliding.

The subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (5) show the continuation of the judge effect executed in the third CZ game. The result display (winning) of the lottery to be executed (AT lottery in this example) has started.

In the result display of the judge effect of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a still image in which the lord catches the grandfather and an image including the characters "capture", so that the lord wins in the judge effect ( The player is notified that the lottery (AT lottery) executed during the CZ has been won).

The subsequent effect shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (6) shows the continuation of the judge effect executed in the third CZ game, and in this example, the result display described with reference to FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (5). In addition, the confirmation production has started.

In the confirmation effect of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to turn on (non-blink) the button image (operation request display) BG3 that imitates the appearance of the effect button (first operation means) 132. The effect button 132 is displayed by displaying an operation request requesting the player to press and operate the effect button 132, and displaying an explanatory image DG including the characters "result confirmation" on the right side of the button image BG3. It is suggested to the player that the lottery result in the CZ can be confirmed by pressing the button.

Further, the button image (operation request display) BG3 during the judge effect of this example is larger than the button image (operation request display) BG during the continuous striking effect described with reference to FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (1). In addition to being small, the display position, color, and display mode are different.

Specifically, the button image (operation request display) BG3 during the judge effect is displayed in the upper left of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, whereas the button image (operation request display) BG during the continuous striking effect is displayed. , Is displayed in the lower center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. Further, while the button image (operation request display) BG3 during the judge effect is lit in blue (non-blinking display), the button image (operation request display) BG during the continuous striking effect is displayed in white blinking. ..

According to this example, since the button image (operation request display) BG during the continuous striking effect and the button image (operation request display) BG3 during the judge effect are at least partially different operation request displays, the continuous striking effect (first). In a certain effect), the second operating means functions as a so-called hidden button, and it can be suggested that the effect corresponding to the operation of the second operating means (second effect) is the hidden button effect. .. On the other hand, in the judge effect (a second effect), the operation of the second operating means is invalid, and it can be suggested that the effect corresponding to the operation of the second operating means is not executed.

It should be noted that the button image (operation request display) during the continuous striking effect and the button image (operation request display) during the judge effect may be displayed in which at least one of the size, color, and display position is different from each other. ..

Further, the button image (operation request display) during the repeated hitting effect may be a display displayed in any one of a plurality of patterns, but the button image (operation request display) during the judge effect is displayed. ) Is preferably a display displayed in one pattern.

Although not shown, the LED (light output) included in the effect button (first operating means) 132 (not shown) is provided during the period when the operation request display (button image BG3 and explanatory image DG in this example) is displayed. By executing the effect of lighting the effect), the effect button (first operating means) 132 is different from the first state (blinking state) of the effect button (first operating means) 132 during the continuous striking effect. It is shifting to the second state (lighting state).

According to this example, it can be implied that there is a period during which the operation of the second operating means is effective depending on the state of the operating means and the mode of displaying the operation request.

The subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (7) indicate the start of the operation response effect (third effect) during the judge effect. In this example, the effect button (first operation) is performed during the judge effect. Means) The operation response effect RG is started when the pressing operation of 132 is accepted once.

In the operation response effect RG of this example, when the effect button (first operation means) 132 is pressed once, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to suggest a game that has won the AT lottery and an internal winning combination. The lottery result in the CZ is notified by displaying an image including the character (in this example, the watermelon of the internal winning combination wins in the 2G of the CZ).
In this embodiment, the winning probability is different depending on the internal winning combination, but one or more combinations such as the number of CZ games and the number of fits, the number of CZ rushes, the rush opportunity, and the acquisition status of chance-up items. The winning probability may be different depending on the game.

Subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (8) show an example of an effect when the start lever 135 is pressed in the next game during the judge effect. In this example, the effect is shown during the judge effect. Even if the pressing operation of the start lever (second operating means) 135 is accepted, the effect corresponding to the pressing operation is not executed.

In FIGS. 62 (b) (7) to 62 (b) (8), the button image (operation request display) BG3 is displayed during the judge effect, but the effect button (first operation means) 132 is not operated. It is a figure which showed the production example in the case of.

In this example, if the effect button (first operation means) 132 is not operated after the confirmation effect described with reference to FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (6) is started, the effect button (first operation) is not operated. Means) Result confirmation according to the operation of 132 The valid period of operation of the first operating means has elapsed until a predetermined opportunity arrives (for example, until the next game is started, or the operation valid period of the first operating means elapses) without starting the effect RG. Until then), it is configured to continue the confirmation effect.

<Modification example of repeated hitting effect>
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a modification of the continuous hitting continuous firing described with reference to FIG. 61 will be described.

In the continuous striking effect of this example (a certain effect of the first), after starting the first effect (total notification in this example) corresponding to the operation of the first operation means (effect button 132 in this example). , When the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) is received during the execution of the first effect, the second operation is performed without executing the remaining part of the first effect. The second effect (in this example, the result notification effect) corresponding to the operation of the operating means (start lever 135) can be started.

63 (1), FIG. (2), and FIG. (4) are drawings corresponding to FIGS. 61 (a) (1), (a) (2), and (a) (4). It is a figure which showed the example which starts the 2nd effect (result notification effect) while the 1st effect (total notification) is executed in the continuous hitting effect in chronological order.

Specifically, in the AT addition notification (first effect) shown in FIG. 63 (2), the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed each time the effect button (first operating means) 132 is pressed during the continuous striking effect. By displaying an image including a number suggesting a part of the number of additional games determined to be added, the number of AT additional games is notified.

The subsequent effect shown in FIG. 63 (4) shows an example of a result notification effect (second effect) when the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received during the execution of the AT addition notification.

In the result notification effect of this example, the AT addition notification is displayed in the middle (FIG. 63 (2)) triggered by the reception of the pressing operation of the start lever (second operating means) 135 during the execution of the AT addition notification. Before the total of the result display for each pressing operation reaches 80), the display of the number of remaining AT games on the liquid crystal display device 157 is changed from 153G to 232G (= 153G + 80G-1G (operation by the start lever)). By updating, the result of the AT game (the number of remaining AT games) is notified to the player.

<Invention 1 of the present application>
As described above, the gaming table according to the invention 1 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 48) is a first operating means (for example, an effect button) provided at a position where the player can operate. 132) and a game table provided with a second operating means (for example, a start lever 135) provided at a position where the player can operate, which is a certain effect (hereinafter, "the first certain"). For example, the continuous striking effect shown in FIG. 61 is referred to as an effect corresponding to the operation of the first operating means (hereinafter, referred to as a “first effect”. For example, it is shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (3). It is an effect that can start the total notification TG), and the first certain effect is an effect corresponding to the operation of the second operating means (hereinafter, referred to as "second effect", for example, FIG. 61 (b). ) The effect that can start the privilege granting effect SG shown in (3), and is different from the first certain effect (hereinafter referred to as "second certain effect", for example, in FIG. 62. The judge effect shown) can start an effect corresponding to the operation of the first operation means (hereinafter, referred to as a “third effect”; for example, the operation response effect RG shown in FIGS. 62A and 62). The second certain effect is an effect in which the effect is not started in response to the operation of the second operating means, and the first certain effect corresponds to the first operating means. It is an effect including an effect of displaying an operation request display (hereinafter referred to as “first operation request display”; for example, the button image BG and the instruction image IG shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (1)). In a certain effect, an operation request display corresponding to the first operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “second operation request display”; for example, a button image BG shown in FIGS. 62A and 62) is displayed. The game console is characterized in that, at least a part of the first operation request display and the second operation request display are different displays.

According to the game console according to the first aspect of the present invention, the first operation request display in the first certain effect and the second operation request display in the second certain effect are different operation request displays. In a certain effect, the second operating means functions as a so-called hidden button, and it can be suggested that the effect corresponding to the operation of the second operating means (second effect) is the hidden button effect. On the other hand, it can be suggested that the operation of the second operating means is invalid in a certain second effect, and the effect corresponding to the operation of the second operating means is not executed.

Further, the first operating means blinks a certain state (hereinafter referred to as "first state", for example, LED) in at least a part of the period during which the first operation request display is displayed. The first operating means is a means for causing the LED to blink, and the first operating means is in a certain state (hereinafter, "second state") during at least a part of the period in which the second operation request display is displayed. For example, the lighting state for lighting the LED), and the first state and the second state may be different states.

With such a configuration, it can be implied that there is a period during which the operation of the second operating means is effective depending on the state of the operating means and the mode of displaying the operation request.

Further, the first operation request display and the second operation request display are displays including a display imitating the appearance of the first operation means (for example, the appearance of the effect button 132), and the first operation request display and the second operation request display. The operation request display and the second operation request display may be different in size, color, and display position from each other.

With such a configuration, the first operation request display and the second operation request display are the operation request displays corresponding to the first operation means, and the first operation request display and the second operation request display. It can be clarified that the production differs depending on the operation of the first operating means.

Further, the first certain effect is a continuous hitting effect (for example, the continuous hitting effect shown in FIG. 61), and the first effect is a plurality of the first operating means in the first certain effect. It is an effect that is started by operating the second operation once, and the second effect may be an effect that is started by operating the second operating means once in a certain first effect. ..

With such a configuration, it can be suggested that the first operating means is effective in a certain first effect, and the role of the first operating means in a certain first effect is different from that of the second operating means. Can be made clearer.

In addition, the first certain effect is a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, an addition of an AT game, an addition of the number of medals acquired, an AT winning judge such as a bonus or a pseudo bonus from normal times, and various lottery. It is an effect of notifying the grant, transition to a state advantageous to the player (AT, bonus, high navigation state, etc.), and the second certain effect is the result of the finished game (for example, internal winning). It may be an effect of notifying the result of the lottery according to the combination, the result of the lottery according to the number and number of CZ games, the number of fits, the winning result of various lottery, the result of the mini game, etc.).

With such a configuration, the difference between a first effect in which the second operating means is valid and a second effect in which the second operating means is invalid can be made clearer. It is possible to improve the playability.

Further, the first certain effect may be an effect that does not include an effect of displaying an operation request display corresponding to the second operation means.

With such a configuration, in a certain first effect, the second operation means functions as a so-called hidden button, and the effect corresponding to the operation of the second operation means (second effect) is a hidden button effect. Can be suggested to be.

Further, the first operation request display is displayed in any one of a plurality of patterns (for example, the pattern shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (1) and the pattern shown in FIGS. 61 (c) and 61 (1)). The second operation request display may be a display displayed in one pattern (for example, the pattern shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (6)).

With such a configuration, the difference between the first operation request display and the second operation request display can be clarified, and the convenience of the player can be enhanced.

Further, when the second operating means is operated after the first operating means is operated once or a plurality of times in the first certain effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, the effect button 132). When the start lever 135 is operated after being repeatedly hit), a part of the first effect is executed, and the second effect is started without executing the remaining part. It is also good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to cancel (interrupt) the first effect started by the operation by the first operation means and start the second effect, which enhances the convenience of the player. can.

<Judge victory production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, various effects in the judge victory effect will be described.

Here, the judge victory effect is an effect related to the granting or continuation of a privilege advantageous to the player, and is an example of "a certain effect" according to the present invention. As "privileges advantageous to the player", for example, an AT game is added, the number of medals won is added, an AT winning judge such as a bonus or a pseudo bonus is given from normal times, various lottery is given, and the player is given. Transition to an advantageous state (AT, bonus, high navigation state, etc.) can be mentioned. In addition, certain effects may be effects that are not related to the granting or continuation of benefits that are advantageous to the player.

In this judge victory effect (certain effect), when the operation request display corresponding to the operation means (in this example, the effect button 132) is displayed in connection with the judge victory effect (certain effect) (first case). ), And there is a case (second case) in which the operation request display corresponding to the operation means (effect button 132) is not displayed in connection with the judge victory effect (certain effect).

Further, in the first case, when the operation means (effect button 132) is operated while the privilege is given or the privilege is notified that the privilege is continued and the operation request display is displayed. The operation response effect is started.

<Operation request display and operation response production in the judge victory production>
FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (1) to (a) and (8) are diagrams showing an example in chronological order of starting the operation response effect after displaying the operation request display in the judge victory effect. It is a figure corresponding to 62 (a) (1) to the figure (a) (8).

The effects shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (1) indicate the start of the judge victory effect executed in the CZ (chance zone), and in this example, the game shifts to the CZ triggered by the third stop operation in the game. At the same time, the judge victory production that is executed during CZ has started.

In the judge victory effect of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a notification effect including the characters "development!" To notify that the user has moved to the CZ. The start trigger of the judge victory effect (certain effect) is not limited to the third stop operation, and may be, for example, the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112.

Subsequent FIGS. 64 (a) (2) to (a) (4) are views showing an example of the production in the first to third games of CZ. In this example, in the first CZ game, a judge victory effect including a video of the lord chasing the old man is performed, and in the next CZ2 game, a judge victory effect including a video of the lord approaching the old man is performed, and in the next CZ3 game. , Performing a judge victory production including a video of the lord catching up with the old man and colliding.

In this embodiment, the judge victory effect is continued for three games, but the player's appearance is whether or not he has won the judge up to the third game of CZ (that is, whether or not he has won the AT). It is configured so that it cannot be identified. Further, in this embodiment, the AT lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination established at the time of operating the start lever of each game of CZ, and if the AT lottery is won once and the CZ remains, the AT lottery is performed. Although it is configured not to be, a lottery may be performed in each game of CZ regardless of the lottery result in order to have a possibility of winning two or more ATs. In this case, it is sufficient to notify that there have been a plurality of winnings in the "result confirmation" described later.

The subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (5) show the continuation of the judge victory effect executed in the third CZ game. In this example, the third stop operation in the third CZ game is used as an opportunity to perform the CZ. The result display (winning) of the lottery (AT lottery in this example) executed in 1 is started.

In the result display of the judge victory effect of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a still image in which the lord catches the old man and an image including the characters "capture", so that the lord wins in the judge victory effect. This is notified to the player (that the lottery (AT lottery) executed during the CZ has been won).

The subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (6) show the continuation of the judge victory effect executed in the third CZ game, and in this example, the results described using FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (5). In addition to the display, the confirmation effect has started.

In the confirmation effect of this example, the effect button 132 is displayed by lighting the button image (operation request display) BG3 that imitates the appearance of the effect button (operation means) 132 by using the liquid crystal display device 157. By displaying an operation request requesting the player to press and operating, and displaying an explanatory image DG including the characters "result confirmation" on the right side of the button image BG3, the effect button 132 can be pressed. For example, it suggests to the player that the lottery result in the CZ can be confirmed.

Subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (7) indicate the start of the operation response effect during the judge victory effect. In this example, the effect button (operation means) 132 is pressed during the judge victory effect. The operation response effect RG is started with the reception once.

In the operation response effect RG of this example, when the effect button (operation means) 132 is pressed once, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to indicate the number of games won in the AT lottery and the characters suggesting the internal winning combination. By displaying an image including (in this example, the watermelon of the internal winning combination is won in the 2G of the CZ), the lottery result in the CZ is notified.

The trigger for starting the operation response effect is not limited to the pressing operation of the effect button (operation means) 132, and the next operation after the operation valid period of the effect button (operation means) 132 has elapsed (for example, the start lever 135). It may be a pressing operation of, a pressing operation of a bet button, etc.).

Subsequent productions shown in FIGS. 64A and 64A show an example of the production when the start lever 135 is pressed in the next game during the judge victory production. In this example, the next game is shown. Even if the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, the effect (confirmation of the lottery result in CZ) corresponding to the pressing operation is not executed.
Further, in this embodiment, a series of flow of winning the AT from the CZ is shown. For example, the CZ portion is the remaining 3G at the end of the AT, and the configuration functions as a judge effect as to whether or not the AT continues this 3G. In this case, the "confirmation of the lottery result" informs the factor that causes the AT to continue.

FIGS. 64 (b) (1) to (b) (2) are diagrams showing an example of a judge defeat effect (an effect when the AT lottery in CZ is not won).

In this example, instead of the lottery result display (winning) described using FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (5), the defeat effect corresponding to the lottery result display (non-winning) is started, and then FIG. 64 (a). ) It is configured to shift to another effect (in this example, return to the normal effect) without displaying the operation request display described in (6).

In the defeat production of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a still image in which the grandfather misses the grandfather and an image including the characters "escape", so that the palace is defeated in the judge production (during CZ). The player is notified that the lottery to be executed (AT lottery) has been missed).

<Judge revival production>
Next, various effects in the judge revival effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

In this judge revival effect (certain effect), when the operation request display corresponding to the operation means (in this example, the effect button 132) is displayed in connection with the judge revival effect (certain effect) (first case). ), And there is a case (second case) in which the operation request display corresponding to the operation means (effect button 132) is not displayed in connection with the judge revival effect (certain effect).

Further, in the second case, it is notified that the privilege will be granted after once suggesting that the privilege will not be granted, or that the privilege will continue after once suggesting that the privilege will not continue. , The operation response effect may be started (third case) when the operation means (effect button 132) is operated while the operation request display is not displayed. In this third case, the operation response effect is produced. It is notified that the benefit will be granted or that the benefit will continue after the execution of.

FIGS. 65 (1) to 65 (9) are diagrams showing an example of the effect in chronological order when the operation request display is not displayed (in the second case) in the judge revival effect. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 65 (1) to 65 (4) are the same as the judge victory effects described with reference to FIG. 64, the description thereof will be omitted.

The effect shown in FIG. 65 (5) shows the continuation of the judge revival effect executed in the third game of CZ. In this example, the lottery executed during the CZ triggered by the third stop operation of the third game of CZ. (In this example, the AT lottery) result display (non-winning) has started.

In the result display of the judge revival effect of this example, the lord was defeated in the judge revival effect by displaying a still image in which the lord misses the grandfather and an image including the characters "escape" using the liquid crystal display device 157. This (that is, the fact that the lottery (AT lottery) executed during the CZ has been missed, that is, the confirmation of the lottery result during the CZ) is notified to the player.
Further, in this embodiment, a series of flow from CZ to AT is shown, but for example, the CZ part is the remaining 3G at the end of AT, and it functions as a judge effect as to whether or not AT continues this 3G. In this case, the "confirmation of the lottery result" informs the factor that the AT does not continue.

The following effect shown in FIG. 65 (6) shows an example of the revival effect. In the revival effect of this example, when the start lever 135 is pressed in the next game, the lord is appointed. By displaying the video to be chased again and the image including the characters "Escape or collapsing !!", the player is notified that the privilege (AT game in this example) is given or continued.

FIGS. 66 (1) to (10) show a case where the operation request display is not displayed in the judge revival effect (second case) and the operation means is operated to start the operation response effect (third case). ) Is shown in chronological order. Since the effects other than the effects shown in FIG. 66 (6) are the same as the judge revival effects described with reference to FIG. 65, the description thereof will be omitted.

The effect shown in FIG. 66 (6) indicates the start of the operation response effect during the judge revival effect. In this example, the effect button (operation means) 132, which is a hidden button, is pressed during the judge revival effect. The operation response production RG is started with the reception once.

In the operation response effect RG of this example, when the effect button (operation means) 132 is pressed once, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to indicate the number of games won in the AT lottery and the characters suggesting the internal winning combination. In this example, the lottery result in the CZ is notified by displaying an image including (winning with the watermelon of the internal winning combination in the 2G of the CZ, that is, confirmation of the lottery result in the CZ).
Further, in this embodiment, a series of flow of winning the AT from the CZ is shown. For example, the CZ portion is the remaining 3G at the end of the AT, and the configuration functions as a judge effect as to whether or not the AT continues this 3G. In this case, the "confirmation of the lottery result" informs the factor that causes the AT to continue.

According to this example, even if the operation request display corresponding to the effect button (operation means) 132 is not displayed, the operation response effect RG may be started in response to the operation of the effect button (operation means) 132. Therefore, by giving the player a sense of discomfort in relation to a certain effect, it is possible to draw attention to the operation request display.

It should be noted that this operation response effect RG also functions as an effect of notifying the factor of granting or continuing the privilege (an effect of notifying that the revival effect will be executed in the next game). Further, the operation response effect RG in the judge revival effect of this example and the operation response effect RG in the judge victory effect described with reference to FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (a) and (7) are the same effect.

<Judge defeat production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, various effects in the judge defeat effect will be described.

In this judge defeat effect (certain effect), when the operation request display corresponding to the operation means (in this example, the effect button 132) is displayed in connection with the judge defeat effect (certain effect) (first case). ), And there is a case (second case) in which the operation request display corresponding to the operation means (effect button 132) is not displayed in connection with the judge defeat effect (certain effect).

Further, in the second case, it is notified that the privilege will be granted after once suggesting that the privilege will not be granted, or that the privilege will continue after once suggesting that the privilege will not continue. If the operation means (effect button 132) is operated while the operation request display is not displayed, the operation response effect may not be started (fourth case).

67 (1) to 67 (7) show the case where the operation request display is not displayed in the judge defeat effect (second case), and the operation means is operated but the operation response effect is not started (fourth case). It is a figure which showed the production example of case) in chronological order. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 67 (1) to 67 (4) are the same as the judge victory effects described with reference to FIG. 64, the description thereof will be omitted.

The effect shown in FIG. 67 (5) shows the continuation of the judge defeat effect executed in the third game of CZ. In this example, the lottery executed during the CZ triggered by the third stop operation of the third game of CZ. (In this example, the AT lottery) result display (non-winning) has started.

In the result display of the judge defeat production in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a still image in which the lord misses the grandfather and an image including the characters "escape", so that the lord is defeated in the judge defeat production. This is notified to the player (that the lottery (AT lottery) executed during the CZ has been missed).

The subsequent effect shown in FIG. 67 (6) shows the continuation of the defeat effect of FIG. 67 (5). In this example, the operation of the operating means (effect button 132) was accepted during the execution of the defeat effect. , The operation response effect is not started, but is configured to shift to another effect (in this example, it returns to the normal effect).

<Modification example of judge revival production>
Next, a modified example of the judge revival effect will be described with reference to FIG. 68.

In the judge revival effect described with reference to FIG. 66, the defeat effect is started with the third stop operation as a trigger, and when the operation of the operation means (effect button 132) is accepted after the third stop operation, the operation response effect is performed. Although an example is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation response effect may be started when the operation means is operated while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating.

FIG. 68 shows a case where the operation request display is not displayed in the judge revival effect (second case), and the operation response effect is started when the operation means is operated while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. It is a figure which showed the production example of. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 68 (1) to 68 (5) are the same as the judge revival effects described with reference to FIG. 66, the description thereof will be omitted.

The effect shown in FIG. 68 (6) shows an example of the revival effect, and in the revival effect of this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted in the next game of the game in which the defeat effect is executed. As an opportunity, by displaying a video in which the lord chases the old man again and an image containing the characters "Escape or collapsing !!", the player is informed that the privilege (AT game in this example) will be granted or continued. is doing.

The subsequent effect shown in FIG. 68 (7) indicates the start of the operation response effect during the judge revival effect. In this example, among the reels 110 to 112, in the next game of the game in which the defeat effect is executed. The operation response effect RG is started when the operation of pressing the effect button (operation means) 132, which is a hidden button, is accepted once while at least one of the above is rotating.

In the operation response effect RG of this example, when the effect button (operation means) 132 is pressed once, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to indicate the number of games won in the AT lottery and the characters suggesting the internal winning combination. In this example, the lottery result in the CZ is notified by displaying an image including (winning with the watermelon of the internal winning combination in the 2G of the CZ, that is, confirmation of the lottery result in the CZ).
Further, in this embodiment, a series of flow of winning the AT from the CZ is shown. For example, the CZ portion is the remaining 3G at the end of the AT, and the configuration functions as a judge effect as to whether or not the AT continues this 3G. In this case, the "confirmation of the lottery result" informs the factor that causes the AT to continue.

Further, in the judge victory effect described with reference to FIG. 64, the operation acceptance valid period during which the operation of the operation means can be accepted is the period from the acceptance of the third stop operation to the start of the next game in the game. However, in this example, the period from the acceptance of the third stop operation in the game to the acceptance of the third stop operation in the next game is set as the operation acceptance valid period, and the judge victory effect (first case). ) And the judge revival production (in the second case), the operation reception validity period is different.

The operation acceptance valid period is not limited to this example, for example, the period from the acceptance of the third stop operation in the game to the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), or the third stop in the game. It may be the period from the acceptance of the operation until the specified number of medals are bet, and the starting point of the operation acceptance valid period is the pressing operation of the start lever 135, the first stop operation, or the second stop. It may be after the operation is accepted.

As shown in FIG. 68 (8), the operation response effect RG is continued until the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button (operation means) 132 elapses (in this example, until the third stop operation is accepted). You may do it. Further, in this example, an example of starting the operation response effect RG when the operation of the effect button 132 is accepted is shown, but the operation is performed when the operation of another operation means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 139) is accepted. The response effect RG may be started.

<Invention 2-1 of the present application>
As described above, the gaming table according to the invention 2-1 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 48) is an operating means (for example, an effect button 132) provided at a position where the player can operate the gaming table. ), And the operation request display (for example, the button image BG shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (6)) corresponding to the operation means in relation to a certain effect (for example, a judge effect) is provided. There is a case where it is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"; for example, the judge winning effect shown in FIG. 64), and the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed in connection with the certain effect (hereinafter, it is referred to as "first case"). Hereinafter, there is a "second case" (for example, the judge revival effect shown in FIG. 66), and the operating means is operated in either the first case or the second case. In this case, the operation response effect (for example, the operation response effect RG shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (7) and the operation response effect RG shown in FIG. 66 (6)) corresponding to the operation of the operation means is started. It is a game table characterized by.

Further, the gaming table according to the invention 2-1 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 48) is a first operating means (for example, an effect button 132) provided at a position where the player can operate the gaming table. A gaming table provided with a second operating means (for example, a start lever 135) provided at a position where the player can operate, and the first operating means in connection with a certain effect. There is a case where the corresponding operation request display (for example, the button image BG shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (6)) is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”; for example, the judge winning effect shown in FIG. 64). When the operation request display corresponding to the first operating means and the second operating means is not displayed in connection with the certain effect (hereinafter referred to as "second case", for example, the judge shown in FIG. 66). There is a revival effect, and in the first case, when at least the first operating means is operated, an operation response effect corresponding to the operation of the first operating means (for example, FIG. 64A) ( The operation response effect RG) shown in 7) is started, and in the second case, when at least the second operation means is operated, the operation response effect (for example, the operation response effect according to the operation of the second operation means) is started. , The operation response effect effect RG) shown in FIG. 66 (6) is started.

According to the game table according to the invention 2-1 of the present application, even if the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed, the operation response effect may be started according to the operation of the operation means. By giving the player a sense of discomfort in relation to the production, it is possible to draw attention to the operation request display.

<Invention 2-2 of the present application>
As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 48) according to the invention 2-2 of the present application is an operating means (for example, an effect button 132) provided at a position where the player can operate the game table. ), The gaming table is a slot machine, and an operation request display (for example, FIG. 64a) (6) corresponding to the operating means in relation to a certain effect (for example, a judge effect). ) Is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first case”; for example, the judge winning effect shown in FIG. 64), and corresponds to the operation means in relation to the certain effect. There is a case where the operation request display is not displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "second case"; for example, the judge revival effect shown in FIG. 66), and in either case of the first case or the second case. When the operation means is operated, the operation response effect according to the operation of the operation means (for example, the operation response effect RG shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (7), and the operation response effect shown in FIG. 66 (6)). RG) is started, and in the first case, the display of the operation request display is started in a state where all the reels are stopped.

Further, the game console according to the invention 2-1 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 48) is a first operating means (for example, an effect button 132) provided at a position where the player can operate the game table. A game table provided with a second operating means (for example, a start lever 135) provided at a position where the player can operate the game table. The game table is a slot machine, and is used for a certain effect. Relatedly, when the operation request display corresponding to the first operation means (for example, the button image BG shown in FIGS. 64A and 64) is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”, for example. There is a judge winning effect shown in FIG. 64, and the operation request display corresponding to the first operating means and the second operating means is not displayed in connection with the certain effect (hereinafter, "second case"). For example, there is a judge revival effect shown in FIG. 66), and in the first case, at least when the first operating means is operated, an operation response corresponding to the operation of the first operating means is performed. When the effect (for example, the operation response effect RG shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (7)) is started and at least the second operation means is operated in the second case, the second operation means is operated. The operation response effect (for example, the operation response effect RG shown in FIG. 66 (6)) corresponding to the operation of the above is started, and in the first case, the operation request display is displayed with all the reels stopped. It is a game table characterized by the fact that is started.

According to the game console according to the invention 2-2 of the present application, even if the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed, the operation response effect may be started according to the operation of the operation means. By giving the player a sense of discomfort in relation to the production, it is possible to draw attention to the operation request display. Further, when the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is displayed, the operation request display is started after all the reels are stopped, so that the player can concentrate on the operation by the operation means.

<Invention 2-3 of the present application>
As described above, the gaming table according to the invention 2-3 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 48) is an operating means (for example, an effect button 132) provided at a position where the player can operate the gaming table. ), And the operation request display (for example, the button image BG shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (6)) corresponding to the operation means in relation to a certain effect (for example, a judge effect) is provided. There is a case where it is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"; for example, the judge winning effect shown in FIG. 64), and the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed in connection with the certain effect (hereinafter, it is referred to as "first case"). Hereinafter, there is a "second case" (for example, the judge revival effect shown in FIG. 66), and the operating means is operated in either the first case or the second case. In this case, the operation response effect (for example, the operation response effect RG shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (7) and the operation response effect RG shown in FIG. 66 (6)) corresponding to the operation of the operation means is started. It is a game table characterized in that the first case is more likely to appear than the second case.

Further, the gaming table according to the invention 2-3 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 48) is a first operating means (for example, an effect button 132) provided at a position where the player can operate the gaming table. A gaming table provided with a second operating means (for example, a start lever 135) provided at a position where the player can operate, and the first operating means in connection with a certain effect. There is a case where the corresponding operation request display (for example, the button image BG shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (6)) is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”; for example, the judge winning effect shown in FIG. 64). When the operation request display corresponding to the first operating means and the second operating means is not displayed in connection with the certain effect (hereinafter referred to as "second case", for example, the judge shown in FIG. 66). There is a revival effect, and in the first case, when at least the first operating means is operated, an operation response effect corresponding to the operation of the first operating means (for example, FIG. 64A) ( The operation response effect RG) shown in 7) is started, and in the second case, when at least the second operation means is operated, the operation response effect (for example, the operation response effect according to the operation of the second operation means) is started. , The operation response effect effect RG) shown in FIG. 66 (6) is started, and the game table is characterized in that the first case is more likely to appear than the second case.

According to the game table according to the invention 2-3 of the present application, even if the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed, the operation response effect may be started according to the operation of the operation means. By giving the player a sense of discomfort in relation to the production, it is possible to draw attention to the operation request display. Further, since the frequency of appearance is higher when the operation request display is displayed than when the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player. It should be noted that the second case may be configured to appear more easily than the first case.

<Invention 2-4 of the present application>
As described above, the gaming table according to the invention 2-4 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 48) is an operating means (for example, an effect button 132) provided at a position where the player can operate the gaming table. ), And the operation request display (for example, the button image BG shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (6)) corresponding to the operation means in relation to a certain effect (for example, a judge effect) is provided. There is a case where it is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"; for example, the judge winning effect shown in FIG. 64), and the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed in connection with the certain effect (hereinafter, it is referred to as "first case"). Hereinafter, there is a "second case" (for example, the judge revival effect shown in FIG. 66), and the operating means is operated in either the first case or the second case. In this case, the operation response effect (for example, the operation response effect RG shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (7) and the operation response effect RG shown in FIG. 66 (6)) corresponding to the operation of the operation means is started. The effect is a game table characterized in that it is an effect performed in connection with a privilege that is advantageous to the player.

Further, the gaming table according to the invention 2-4 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 48) is a first operating means (for example, an effect button 132) provided at a position where the player can operate the gaming table. A gaming table provided with a second operating means (for example, a start lever 135) provided at a position where the player can operate, and the first operating means in connection with a certain effect. There is a case where the corresponding operation request display (for example, the button image BG shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (6)) is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”; for example, the judge winning effect shown in FIG. 64). When the operation request display corresponding to the first operating means and the second operating means is not displayed in connection with the certain effect (hereinafter referred to as "second case", for example, the judge shown in FIG. 66). There is a revival effect, and in the first case, when at least the first operating means is operated, an operation response effect corresponding to the operation of the first operating means (for example, FIG. 64A) ( The operation response effect RG) shown in 7) is started, and in the second case, when at least the second operation means is operated, the operation response effect (for example, the operation response effect according to the operation of the second operation means) is started. , The operation response effect RG) shown in FIG. 66 (6) is started, and the certain effect is an effect performed in connection with a privilege advantageous to the player.

According to the game table according to the invention 2-4 of the present application, even if the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed, the operation response effect may be started according to the operation of the operation means. By giving the player a sense of discomfort in relation to the production, it is possible to draw attention to the operation request display. Further, since a certain effect is an effect performed in relation to a privilege advantageous to the player, the expectation of the player can be improved.

In addition, the above-mentioned certain effects include benefits that are advantageous to the player (for example, addition of an AT game, addition of the number of medals acquired, granting an AT winning judge such as a bonus or a pseudo bonus from normal times, granting various lottery, and playing a game. It is an effect related to the granting or continuation of a state (AT, bonus, etc.) that is advantageous to the person, and in the first case, the privilege is granted or the privilege is continued. Is notified, and in the first case, when the operation means (or at least the first operation means) is operated while the operation request display is displayed, the operation response effect is started, and the operation response effect is started. In the second case, it is notified that the privilege will be granted after once suggesting that the privilege will not be granted, or that the privilege will continue after once suggesting that the privilege will not continue. In the second case, when the operation means (or at least the second operation means) is operated while the operation request display is not displayed, the operation response effect is started (hereinafter,). , "Third case"), and in the third case, it is notified that the privilege is given or the privilege continues after the operation response effect is executed. It may be a thing.

With such a configuration, when the operation response effect is started when the operation means is operated while the operation request display is not displayed (in the third case), a privilege advantageous to the player is given or is given. It will function as a continuous notice and can enhance the interest of the player.

Further, in the second case, when the operation means (or at least the second operation means) is operated while the operation request display is displayed, the operation response effect is not started (hereinafter,). There is a "fourth case"), and the third case may be easier to grant or continue the privilege than the fourth case.

With such a configuration, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player when the operation response effect is started when the operation means is operated while the operation request display is not displayed (in the third case). can.

Further, the operation response effect may be the same in the first case and the second case.

With such a configuration, the operation response effect can be the same regardless of the presence or absence of the operation request display, and the player's discomfort can be reduced.

Further, the operation response effect may be an effect of notifying the factor of granting or continuing the privilege.

With such a configuration, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player when the operation response effect is started, so that the operation by the operation means can be positively performed.

Further, the length of the period during which the operation of the operating means is effective may be different between the first case and the second case. Further, in the first case, the length of the period during which the operation of the first operating means is effective and the length of the period during which the operation of the second operating means is effective in the second case are different. You may.

With such a configuration, the difference between the first case and the second case can be clarified, and the playability can be enhanced.

Further, in the first case, the period during which the operation of the operating means is effective may be longer or shorter than in the second case. Further, the length of the period during which the operation of the second operating means is effective in the second case is longer than the period during which the operation of the first operating means is effective in the first case. It may be short or short.

Further, in the second case, the operation means (or the second operation means) is operated even when at least one of the plurality of reels is in a rotating state. The operation response effect may be started.

With such a configuration, it is possible to accept an operation by the operating means and start an operation response effect even while the reel is rotating, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, in either of the first case and the second case, the operation response effect may not be started if the operation means is not operated. Further, when the first operating means is not operated in the first case, or / and when the second operating means is not operated in the second case, the operation response effect is produced. It may not be started.

With such a configuration, it is possible to clarify the difference from the case where the operating means is operated.

Further, the gaming table according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the "enclosed gaming machine" circulates and uses the gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Further, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Further, the range of the game may be further expanded by applying the content described in one configuration to the other configurations among the plurality of configurations described in the above-described embodiment.

[Fifth Embodiment]
The slot machine of the present embodiment starts rotation when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if they do not match, the game medium is used. It is a game table that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 69 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which multiple types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit of this optical sensor is provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line. The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 114.

For example, the notification lamp 123 informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in the internal lottery for the winning combination, which will be described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. It is a lamp to inform you. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment is lit until the bonus game is completed after the bonus notification that the bonus confirmation is announced. The notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, a maximum of three bets are inserted, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. Further, although not shown, it is provided with an effect button capable of starting a certain effect when an operation is accepted. The effect button may also have the function of another button (for example, the bet button 132).

The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. The payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 110 to 112. ..

More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be pressed. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Further, illuminants 137a, 138a, 139a are provided inside each stop button 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the illuminants 137a, 138a, 139a are turned on. In addition to notifying the player, it may be turned on when various notifications to be described later are performed.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation may be referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation may be referred to as a third stop reel.

Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 as a stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 is called "forward push operation order". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push".

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can grasp that the high navigation state is in the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The upper lamp 142 provided on the upper part of the front door 102 and the side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game, and when various notifications described later are performed. May be turned on.

An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) is in front of the slot machine 100 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding a stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139), and will be described later. May be displayed when performing various notifications.

It should be noted that the device may be configured to be capable of displaying various production images and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, or a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The notification lamp 123 and the high navigation state lamp 190 are designed to notify predetermined information by causing the lamps to emit light, but the notification mode is not limited to the light emission of the lamp. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a part of the area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a slot machine having a full liquid crystal display, an area near reels 110 to 112 may be used). Hereinafter, when it is described as lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high navigation state lamp 190, it is intended to include notification by another effect device (for example, a display device or the like) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 70 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 in a state where the front door 102 is opened. The main body 101 is a box body that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that houses the main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided at the upper part of the back plate 242, and the main control board storage case 210 Three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below. The side plate 260 on the left side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, the side plate 260 on the left side, houses the first sub control board that houses the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit. A case 220 is arranged. Further, an external centralized terminal plate 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting key that can be switched on and off by a rotation operation is provided. This setting key is an operation means for starting setting change and setting confirmation of setting values (settings 1 to 6 in this example) described later. Further, inside the main body 101, there is provided a setting switch capable of performing an operation for changing the setting (setting value changing operation) and an operation for confirming the setting by a pressing operation. This setting switch is an operating means that also functions as an error canceling switch capable of performing an operation for eliminating various errors (error resolution operation) described later. These setting keys and setting switches can be operated by opening the front door 102, and are difficult or impossible to operate in the closed state (the operating means cannot be operated by the player).

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals collected in a bucket) is arranged on the bottom plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power supply switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate in the closed state.

The power supply device 252 converts an AC power supply supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each into a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, and the like, which will be described later. It supplies to the control unit and each device. Further, a storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off is provided. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting the power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected to the power cord 265 extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and the effect device 160 and the effect control board (illustrated) for controlling the effect device 160 are on the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 157. Omitted), the upper speaker 272 is provided. At the lower part of the liquid crystal display device 157, a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops an illegal medal or the like onto the medal tray 161 are provided. There is. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. The figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of an internal lottery for a winning combination, and a reel stop. ROM 306 for storing positions, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 every interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor or the like and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 starts when the power is turned on and the random number value generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main process of the main control unit described later). To start).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor to be paid out from the medal payout device 180, index sensor of reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number value generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register storing the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 sensor are installed in the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect the input operation of the case. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, L Become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. Drive circuit 326 to drive the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the display 126, the payout number display 127, and the high navigation status lamp 190) is provided.

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted in an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output. Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 has a voltage value of the power supply set to a predetermined value (this implementation). In the embodiment, when the voltage is less than 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. is doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stores a ROM 406 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various indicators, and the like. It is provided.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and the speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via the output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is provided with various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input / output interface. 123 etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and bases the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement applied to each of the above-mentioned reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 72 (a). It should be noted that the figure is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in a planar development.

On each reel 110 to 112, a plurality of types (8 types in the present embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the figure are arranged in a predetermined number of frames (20 frames of numbers 0 to 19 in the present embodiment). Further, the numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, in the present embodiment, the frame number 19 on the left reel 110 is a "bell symbol", the frame number 19 on the middle reel 111 is a "blank symbol", and the frame number 18 on the right reel 112 is "seven 2". "Design", are arranged respectively. In the following, the "seven 1 symbol" may be referred to as "blue 7 (design)", and the "seven 2 symbol" may be referred to as "red 7 (design)".

<Prize line>
Next, the winning line will be described with reference to FIG. 72 (b). FIG. 72 (b) is a diagram showing a winning line of the slot machine according to the embodiment A1 of the present invention.

The symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 1) is on the upper stage symbol of the left reel, and on the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 2). The displayed symbol is the middle symbol on the left reel, and the symbol displayed on the lower symbol of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 3) is the lower symbol on the left reel and the upper symbol of the middle reel 111 (4 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed in the middle reel upper stage symbol, the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure; also referred to as the symbol position 5) is the middle reel middle stage symbol. The symbol displayed on the lower part of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 6) is placed on the lower part of the middle reel and the upper part of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 7). The displayed symbol is the upper symbol on the right reel, the symbol displayed on the middle of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 8) is the middle symbol on the right reel, and the symbol displayed on the lower row of the right reel 112 (9 shown in the figure). The symbols displayed at (position; also referred to as symbol position 9) are called the lower symbols on the right reel, and each symbol of each reel 110 to 112 is vertically three on each reel 110 to 112 through the symbol display window 113. A total of nine are displayed.

In the present embodiment, one winning line 114 of the middle winning line L1 composed of the left reel middle stage symbol (symbol position 2), the middle reel middle stage symbol (symbol position 5), and the right reel middle stage symbol (symbol position 8) is provided. ing. The winning line 114 is a line set at a stop position of the symbol that can be visually recognized through the reel window 113, and is a symbol corresponding to the winning combination described in FIGS. 73 (a) and 73 (b), which will be described later. It is a line that determines whether or not a combination is displayed. FIG. 72 (b) shows the middle prize line L1. The valid winning line (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium.

The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment can play a 3-card or 2-card bet, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 2, no winning line is valid and the number of medals is 3 or 2. The winning line L1 becomes effective when a bet is made. When the winning line is activated, the start lever 135 can be operated to start the game.

Further, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, it is composed of a right-down winning line composed of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel lower symbol, a left reel lower symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. A total of three winning lines that go up to the right may be set as valid winning lines 114, or a number of winning lines according to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines 114.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination.

The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special role (special role 1, special role 2), a general role (replaying role 1 to replaying role 13, small role 1 to small role 5), and the like. The types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are roles for shifting to a special gaming state in which a predetermined benefit is given to the player. Further, the re-gaming combination 1 to the re-gaming combination 13 are roles that enable re-gaming without inserting a new medal. These winning combinations may be referred to as "acting combinations". Further, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of the medal (without the payout of the medal) is displayed on the valid line. For example, the special combination 1, The prizes for the special role 2 and the re-game combination 1 to the re-game combination 13 are included.

The special role 1 and the special role 2 are a combination (actuating combination) that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a prize. In this example, the special role 1 is a role that can be won only in the three-card betting game, and the special role 2 is a role that can be won only in the two-card betting game. No medals will be paid out due to winning the role itself. In the corresponding symbol combination, the special role 1 (BB1) is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2", and the special role 2 (BB2) is "BAR-BAR-Seven 1".

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 1, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 1 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 2, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 2 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3). ..

This flag is kept on until the internally won combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internally won combination in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game that is internally won in the special role 1 or the special role 2, the special role is internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special). If the role 1 is internally won, the "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)" symbol combination) will be in a state where it is easy to win. The special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2. Further, in this special gaming state, when a predetermined number of cards (in this example, 110 winning cards by BB1 and 55 winning cards by BB2) are paid out, a re-game low probability state (hereinafter, this state is referred to as RT1). There is). The special gaming state (RT4) and the re-gaming low probability state (RT1) will be described later.

The "re-game combination (re-game combination 1 to re-game combination 13)" is a winning combination (actuating role) that allows a player to play a game without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize. No medals will be paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are "replay-replay-replay" for replay 1 (normal replay), "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1" for replay 2 (directed replay 1), and replay 3 for replay. (Direction replay 2) is as shown in FIG. 73, such as "Seven 1-Seven 2-Seven 1".

"Small role (small role 1 to small role 5)" is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combination is "ANY-cherry-ANY" for small role 1 (cherry), small role. The role 2 (watermelon 1) is as shown in FIG. 73, such as "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon". The corresponding payout number is also as shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-cherry-ANY", the symbol of the middle reel 111 may be "cherry", and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the outline of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. For reel stop control, one of a plurality of types of reel stop control data determined in advance is selected based on a predetermined condition (for example, the result of an internal lottery process of a winning combination described later), and the selected reel stop is performed. Perform based on control data.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame slip control) is performed. The pull-in control is to shift the stop position of the reels 110 to 112 within a certain number of frames (number of symbols) range (pull-in range; here, maximum 4 frames) after each stop button 137 to 139 is operated by the player. Refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Each reel stop data has a permissible control that allows a predetermined combination of winning combinations to be displayed together on the winning line, and a prohibition control that does not display all the symbol combinations of any winning combination on the winning line. It is roughly divided into.

Examples of allowable control are, for example, when an internal winning combination is internally won or when a special winning combination is being internally won (the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is bad, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are displayed together within the range of the above number of frames. However, since it is only "allowed", the symbol combinations may not be aligned depending on the timing of operating each stop button 137 to 139.

For example, when the small winning combination 2 (watermelon 1) is internally won, the watermelon symbol is arranged in more than 4 frames, so if the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon symbol will be a winning line. Does not stop at.

However, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of frames drawn in, 100% may be aligned. For example, since the arrangement interval of the replay symbols corresponding to the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is a maximum of 4 frames, if the replay combination 1 is internally won, 100% of the prizes will be won regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, as an example in which the prohibition control is performed, for example, the internal lottery result is lost and the special role is not being internally elected (the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is good, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are not displayed together within the range of the above number of frames.

<Type of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of the gaming states of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 74A is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a replay low probability state (RT1), a replay high probability state special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a replay high probability state special role 2 internal winning. It has a state (RT3) and a special gaming state (RT4). In the present embodiment, the gaming states roughly divided into these four are referred to as RT-based gaming states. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to the so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as an AT system gaming state), and according to the AT system gaming state determined by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 is designed to set the gaming state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG. 74 (b).

The re-game low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability of operation of the condition device related to the re-game combination does not change (default state), a special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a special combination 2 internal winning state. (RT3) and the special gaming state (RT4) are also states in which the probability of operation of the conditional device related to the replaying combination varies from the default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 75A is a diagram showing a lottery table used for the internal lottery process of the winning combination. The horizontal axis represents each game state (RT-type game state), and the vertical axis shows the lottery value of each winning combination.

The internal winning probability of the winning combination in each gaming state described below is a random number obtained at the time of the internal lottery from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306, numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination. It is obtained by dividing by the numerical data (for example, 65535) in the numerical range. For example, in the re-game low probability state (RT1), the lottery value of the small winning combination 2 is 512, and the winning probability of the small winning combination 1 is 512/65536 × 100 ≈0.8%. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each combination or loss.

It is determined which combination the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is the value corresponding to the lottery data, and the internal lottery combination is determined. For this lottery data, settings 1 to 6 having different winning probabilities for at least one combination are prepared, and a game store clerk or the like can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. The internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example and is not limited to this probability.

Hereinafter, the gaming state of the RT system of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The re-game low probability state is a game state in which the internal winning probability of the re-game is the lowest among other game states (for example, a game state excluding a special game state) (disadvantageous to the player), and is referred to as a normal game state. There is also. In the re-game low probability state, the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT1" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 75 (a).

Re-game The winning combination that is internally won in the low probability state is special role 1 (condition device No. 1. only for 3-card betting game), special role 2 (not shown, only for 2-card betting game), and re-game combination 1 (replaying game). Conditional device No. 2), re-gaming combination 2,4 to 10 (conditional device No. 3), re-gaming combination 3,4,6,8,10 to 13 (conditional device No. 4), small combination 1 to small There is a role 5 (condition device Nos. 5 to 9). If the winning combination is not won, the winning combination will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed. In addition, the fact that the symbol combination related to the winning is not stopped on the winning line may be referred to as "missing". In addition, the fact that the winning combination was not won may be expressed as "winning the loss".

Here, "re-game role 2, 4 to 10" means re-game role 2, re-game role 4, re-game role 5, re-game role 6, re-game role 7, re-game role 8, re-game role 9 , And the replaying combination 10 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, which combination of symbols is displayed is determined according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct answer operation order which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 2 is obtained. It is displayed on the winning line, and in other cases, depending on the stop operation timing of each reel 110 to 112, the re-gaming combination 4, the re-gaming combination 5, the re-gaming combination 6, the re-gaming combination 7, the re-gaming combination 8. The symbol combination corresponding to any one of the replay combination 9 and the replay combination 10 is displayed on the winning line. In addition, a combination in which the winning combination is determined by the operation order, such as this "replaying combination 2, 4 to 10", may be referred to as a "pushing order combination".

In addition, "re-game combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" means re-game combination 3, re-game role 4, re-game role 6, re-game role 8, re-game role 10, re-game role 11. , Re-game combination 12, and re-game combination 13 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, which combination of symbols is displayed is determined according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct answer operation order which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 3 is obtained. It is displayed on the winning line, and in other cases, depending on the stop operation timing of each reel 110 to 112, the re-gaming combination 4, the re-gaming combination 6, the re-gaming combination 8, the re-gaming combination 10, the re-gaming combination A symbol combination corresponding to any of 11, the re-game combination 12, and the re-game combination 13 is displayed on the winning line.

When the "small winning combination 4" is internally won, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (bell) is displayed on the winning line according to the operation order of the player (FIG. 75 (Fig. 75). a) See the remarks column). More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, "Bell-bell-bell" is displayed on the winning line and 11 medals are paid out (11 medals are paid out). Bell prize). On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed according to the correct answer operation order, "Bell-bell-bell" is not displayed on the winning line (loss).

In addition, when "small role 4" is composed of "small role 4a" and "small role 4b" and the "small role 4a" is internally won, "bell-bell-bell" is selected according to the operation order of the player. Is determined whether or not is displayed on the winning line, but if the "small winning combination 4b" is internally won, "bell-bell-bell" is displayed on the winning line regardless of the operation order. It may be configured to be.

Here, the operation order of the correct answer of "small combination 4" will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 75 (b). To be precise, "small role 4" is "small role 4LCR", "small role 4LRC", "small role 4CLR", "small role 4CRL", "small role 4RLC", and "small role 4RCL". It is set to be subdivided into, and different operation orders of correct answers are assigned corresponding to each of the subdivided "small roles 4". The range of lottery data associated with each of the six subdivided "small winning combinations 4" is the same.

For example, when the "small winning combination 4LCR" is internally won among the "small winning combination 4", the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is a correct operation, and the other stop operations are incorrect operations. Further, when the "small winning combination 4 CRL" is internally won among the "small winning combination 4", the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110. The stop operation is the correct operation.

FIG. 74 (a) shows that when the special combination 1 is internally elected (when the condition (A) is satisfied), the system shifts to the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) described later. It is shown that when the special role 2 is internally elected (when the condition (B) is satisfied), the state shifts to the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) described later.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
The special role internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "special role internal winning state") are the replay low probability state (RT1). ), The internal winning probability of the re-game combination is higher than that of), and the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to ON, and the player stops the operation at a predetermined timing. By doing so, it is possible to display the symbol combination corresponding to the special role corresponding to this flag.

In the special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT2" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. In RT3), the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT3" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 75A. The prize-winning roles that are internally won in the special role internal winning state include replaying role 1, replaying role 2,4 to 10, replaying role 3,4,6,8,10 to 13, small role 1 to small role 4 There is. If the winning combination is not won, the winning combination will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed. Further, in FIG. 74 (a), when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is displayed in the special combination internal winning state (when the condition (C) is satisfied), the special game described later is performed. It has been shown to transition to state (RT4).

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the most advantageous gaming state among all the gaming states. In the special game state, the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT4" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 75 (a). In the special game state, the winning combination that is internally won is only the small combination 5. In addition, if the winning combination is not won, it will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed.

FIG. 74 (a) shows that in the special game state (RT4), when the specified number of sheets is paid out (when the condition (D) is satisfied), the game shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT1). ing. Specifically, when the game shifts to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1, when more than 110 medals are paid out, the re-game low probability state (RT1) Move to. In addition, when the game shifts to the special gaming state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2, the game shifts to the replay low probability state (RT1) when more than 55 medals are paid out. ..

In this embodiment, the special game state ends when a predetermined number of payouts are executed, but for example, a game ends when a predetermined combination (for example, a single bonus) is won, or a predetermined number of times (for example, a predetermined number of times). It may be terminated when there is a prize (for example, 8 times) or when a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times) of games are played. That is, the condition (D) shown in FIG. 74 (a) is not limited to this example.

<Transition of AT-based game state>
Next, the game state of the AT system will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (b). FIG. 74 (b) is a transition diagram of the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

As shown in the figure, the AT-type gaming states are roughly classified into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is higher than that in the low navigation state, and is also referred to as an AT mode. Here, the operation navigation is internally elected as a push order combination (in this example, a replay combination 2,4 to 10, a replay combination 3,4,6,8,10 to 13, or a small combination 4). In this case, it refers to the effect of notifying the operation order of the correct answer. That is, the operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the content of the stop operation for acquiring a medal, the content of the stop operation for shifting to an advantageous gaming state or maintaining an advantageous gaming state.

Here, the operation navigation will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 (b) and 76. In the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed by using the payout number display device 127 and the effect image display device 157. FIG. 75 (b) is a diagram for explaining the correct operation order of the push order combination of the slot machine according to the embodiment A1 of the present invention, and FIG. 76 corresponds the display data with the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. It is a figure.

For example, the display data 01 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is set to the left reel 110, the display data 02 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is set to the middle reel 111, and the display data 03 is data suggesting a stop operation. , The data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112.

Therefore, in the AT mode, when the "re-game combination 2,4 to 10" or the "re-game combination 3,4,6,8,10 to 13" is internally won, the first stop reel is set to the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is the correct answer, the display data 03 suggesting that the first stop operation is on the right is selected, and the payout number display 127 displays the lighting mode corresponding to the display data 03 and displays the effect image. The device 157 displays an image (for example, the character "--1") suggesting that the first stop reel is the right reel 112.

Further, the display data 04 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112, and the display data 05 is the first stop reel. The left reel 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, the third stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the display data 06 is the first stop reel as the middle reel 111 and the second stop reel. In the data and display data 07 suggesting a stop operation in which the left reel 110 and the third stop reel are the right reel 112, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left. The data suggesting a stop operation with the reel 110 and the display data 08 are data suggesting a stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third stop reel as the middle reel 112. The display data 09 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110.

Therefore, when the small winning combination 4CLR of "small winning combination 4" is internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is the correct answer, display data 06 suggesting that the first stop operation is in the middle, the second stop operation is on the left, and the third stop operation is on the right is selected, and the display data 06 is displayed on the payout number display 127. The lighting mode corresponding to is displayed, and the effect image display device 157 suggests that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The image to be reeled (for example, the character "213") is displayed.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether the internal winning combination is the replaying combination or the small winning combination 4 based on the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. However, for example, the operation to stop the correct answer of the small winning combination 4 may be set to three options as in the replaying combination, and the small winning combination 4 may also be configured to be notified using the display data 01 to 03. In this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode. Further, the operation of stopping the correct answer of the re-game combination may be set to 6 options as in the small combination 4, and the re-game combination may also be configured to be notified using the display data 04 to 09. Even in this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode.

In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is higher than that in the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed. The high navigation state is more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state because the stop operation according to the operation content of the operation navigation brings a favorable result to the player. Here, the advantage is specifically the total number of game media paid out by the game console with respect to the total number of game media used by the player as a bet number when playing a game for a predetermined period. The ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball payout rate).

In the present embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the low navigation state (for example, when a winning combination other than loss is won), the game shifts to the normal state in the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (c), for example, the transition is made in the order of the finalized notification state → AT1 state → judge state, and the judge state is changed to the normal gaming state or AT2 state via the pullback state. There are routes and routes that directly shift from the judge state to the AT2 state. In the present embodiment, when the transition of the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state) is determined, a predetermined number (for example, 50 games or the like) is given to the number of games in the AT mode (hereinafter referred to as the number of AT games). Further, although the details will be described later, when a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the state shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
FIG. 74B is a diagram showing an effect state in each game state of the AT system. As shown in FIG. 74 (b), each game state of the AT system is further subdivided and managed, and this is called a production state. Specifically, the low navigation state effect state has a normal state, and the high navigation state effect state has a normal state, a confirmed notification state, a judge state, a pullback state, an AT1 state, an AT2 state, and an LMT (limit) state. .. In addition, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state are, in principle, states in which the number of balls to be ejected increases.

Here, the limit state means, in principle, the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, that is, the production state from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state (from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state). It is possible that the production state of is not the limit state, but this case will be described later). In the present embodiment, when the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, an ending effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “ED effect”) suggesting the end of the high navigation state is executed.

<Operation of slot machine>
Based on the above features, the processes of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 77. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 77 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 81, but in this initial setting, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, and various variables stored in the RAM 308 are stored. Initial setting, operation permission to WDT314, setting of initial value, etc. are performed.

In step S102, the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and preparations are made for sending an insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted. If the player wins the re-game combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, a winning line confirmation process is performed in which the number of inserted medals is determined and a valid winning line is determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired, and a winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number value, and the result of this internal lottery is shown. Preparations are made for transmitting the internal lottery command to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the winning combination flag is turned on.

In step S105, a reel stop data selection process for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Further, in step S105, preparations are made for transmitting a reel stop data command including information regarding the selected reel stop data to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S106, the effect state control process A related to the control of the game state of the AT system described above is executed based on the start lever operation. In step S107, the effect processing is executed. In this effect processing, various effects are controlled.

In step S108, the reel rotation start processing is executed, and the rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is started.

In step S109, the reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, the reel stop data stop table is displayed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Refer to it and stop any of the reels 110 to 112 according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. When all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S110. In this step S109, the stop button reception command relating to the stop buttons 137 to 139 for which the stop operation was performed for each stop operation (specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command and the second stop operation). Prepare to send the stop button reception 2 command for the third stop operation, and the stop button reception 3 command for the third stop operation) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel. Reel stop command related to the stop position (specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop for the third stop operation) 3 Command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, a winning determination process for determining a winning is performed. In this winning combination processing, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the player has won the small role 3 (Bell). Further, in this step S110, preparations are made for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, a medal granting process is performed. In the medal granting process, if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S112, the game state control process is performed. In the game state control process, processing related to the transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and the game state is transferred when the start condition or the end condition is satisfied. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the game state of the current RT system.

In step S113, the effect state control process B related to the control of the game state of the AT system described above is executed. In step S114, the high navigation state end processing related to the end of the high navigation state is executed.

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-mentioned process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S2006 in FIG. 78) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 78. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger for the main control unit timer interrupt. The process is started in a predetermined cycle.

In step S2001, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S2002, WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit.

In step S2003, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S2004, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed. In step S2005, the timer update process is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in each time unit.

In step S2006, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S2007, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S2008, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S2003, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out to monitor the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc., and if an error is detected, (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S2009, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S2011, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S2010.

In step S2010, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S2001 is set in each of the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 77.

On the other hand, in step S2011, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 77.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. Note that FIG. 79A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 79B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 79 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 79 (a).

When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S3001. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing the internal winning information, which is information representing the result of the internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state.

In step S3002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S3004, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S3005, the effect control process is performed. Here, the production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing a process such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S3006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S3005, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S3007, the lamp control process is performed based on the process result of step S3005. For example, if there is an instruction to various lamps 420 in the effect data read in step S3005, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S3008, the shutter control process is performed based on the process result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the effect data read in step S3005, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S3009, information output processing is performed in which a command is set to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S3005, a setting is made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S3002.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 79 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S3101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 79 (c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S3201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S3002 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 79 (a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S3002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S3202, a command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S3009, an effect random number value is updated, and the like are performed.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 80. Note that FIG. 80A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 80B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 80 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 80 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 500.

First, in step S4001 of FIG. 80 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S4001. In this initialization process, input / output port initial setting, initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, initialization process of the storage area in the VRAM 536, and the like are performed.

In step S4002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S4004, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S4005, the effect control process is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S4004, the process corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading the effect data for controlling the image of the background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading out the production data from ROM 506 other than this is included, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S4006, image control processing (details will be described later) is performed based on the processing result of step S4005. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S4005, the image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding a display image (notification image, background image) is executed. When this image control process is completed, the process returns to step S4002.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S4101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S4201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S4002 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 80A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S4002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S4202, the effect random number value is updated.

Next, the image control process of step S4006 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (d). The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S4301, an instruction to transfer image data is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 536 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 536), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 534 based on a table such as position information, and then an image from ROM 506 to VRAM 536. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the instructions set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S4302, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S4303. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

In step S4303, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S4301, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 536, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transparency, etc.) are instructed to VDP534. The VDP 534 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S4304, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S4305, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 based on the end of drawing the image is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S5306, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for to be entered.

In step S4306, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Initial setting process>
Next, the initial setting process (step S101) of the main control unit main process described with reference to FIG. 77 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the flow of the initial setting process.

First, in step S201 to be executed first, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, and various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized. ..

In step S202, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 of the voltage monitoring circuit 330 is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). If so, monitor whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), this step S202 is repeatedly executed, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff). To step S203. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, step S202 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S203, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the main control unit timer interrupt process in the counter timer 312 in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, the first). A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S204, it is determined whether or not the setting key has been rotated to the on position, and if the setting key has been rotated to the on position, the process proceeds to step S211. If not, the process proceeds to step S205.

In step S205, the setting change flag is set to off, and then the process proceeds to step S207. In step S207, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the data stored in the RAM 308. The data determined here is the data saved in the RAM 308 due to the power of the slot machine 100 being turned off or a momentary interruption. That is, it is determined in this step S207 whether or not the data is surely saved in the RAM 308. If there is an abnormality in this data, the process proceeds to step S208, and if there is no abnormality, the process proceeds to step S209.

In step S208, RWM error processing is performed. In this RWM error processing, after preparing to clear the storage area of all the RAM (RWM) 308 except the used stack area, the process shifts to the infinite loop state. From this state, the game can be started by operating the setting key switch after turning the power off and then on again.

In step S209, it is determined whether or not the forced RWM clear is in the ON state. Specifically, based on the fact that the power is turned on and the RWM clear button (not shown) is pressed and held (for example, pressed for 5 seconds or longer), the forced RWM clear is turned on. Then, when the forced RWM clear is in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S212, and when the forced RWM clear is in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, the data stored in the RAM 308 is written back to the register of the CPU 304, and the process of returning the register state to the state immediately before the power cut processing is executed is executed. In the next step S213, the power-on setting is performed. After executing the related processing (details will be described later), the process proceeds to step S214.

In step S204, which proceeds when the setting key is rotated to the on position in step S204, the process proceeds to step S212 after performing the RWM clear processing. In step S212, the setting change flag is set to ON, and in the next step S213, the power-on setting-related process (details will be described later) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S214.

In step S214, a process of activating WDT314 is performed. Here, the activation permission of WDT314 and the setting of the initial value are performed. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT314 as an initial value. After that, this initial setting process is terminated.

<Processing related to setting when power is turned on>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83, the power-on setting-related processing (steps S206 and S212) of the initial setting processing described with reference to FIG. 81 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the flow of the setting-related processing at the time of power-on, and FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example of various notifications.

Prior to the explanation of the power-on setting related processing, various means used for various notifications will be described with reference to FIG. 83A. FIG. 83A is a front view schematically showing the appearance of the slot machine 100.

The slot machine 100 is a light emitter 137a of each of the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 described with reference to FIG. 69 as an optical output means capable of outputting light at the time of various notifications. , 138a, 139a, backlights of reels 110 to 112 and the like.

Details will be described later, but in this example, in various notifications, the light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a of the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 are lit in red, and the error is resolved. Lights the light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in pink. Further, the backlights of the reels 110 to 112 in the stopped state are lit in red, and the backlights of the reels 110 to 112 in the stopped state during rotation are lit in blue.

Further, the slot machine 100 has a payout number display device 127, a stored number display device 125, and a liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) described with reference to FIG. 69 as display means capable of displaying various types at the time of various notifications. It is equipped with 157 and the like. Details will be described later, but in this example, an error code is displayed on the payout number display 127 when an error occurs, and when the error is resolved, the error code is erased (cleared). Further, when confirming the setting, the set value is displayed on the payout number display 127.

Further, the slot machine 100 includes speakers 272, 277 and the like described with reference to FIG. 71 as sound output means capable of outputting sound at the time of various notifications. Details will be described later, but in this example, various voices are output from the speakers 272 and 277 according to the contents of various notifications.

The notification mode (color, means, etc.) of various notifications is not limited to this example, and for example, a lamp or LED may be lit in a color other than red or pink, and light output means and sound output means. , In addition to (or in addition to) the display means, various notifications may be performed by, for example, the movement of a movable means such as the shutter 163.

As shown in FIG. 82, in step S301 of the power-on setting-related process, the process proceeds to step S302 after instructing to execute the power-on notification to notify that the power has been turned on.

FIG. 83B is a diagram showing an example of power-on notification. In this example, the backlights of the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the light emitters 137a, 138a, 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the reels 110 to 112 in the stopped state are red, triggered by the instruction of the power-on notification. And outputs the voice "Power is turned on" from the speakers 272 and 277.

If no error has occurred when the power-on notification is executed, the payout number display 127 is hidden (without displaying the error code), and the setting key is turned off when the power-on notification is executed. In this case, the stored number display 125 is used to display the number of credits (the number of medals stored electronically) at the time of the latest power failure.

In step S302, it is determined whether or not a certain error has occurred, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S303, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S310. In step S303, the process proceeds to step S304 after giving an instruction to execute error notification for notifying an error code (identifier) of a certain error that has occurred.

Here, examples of errors that may occur in the slot machine 100 include medal insertion abnormalities 1 to 4, medal payout abnormalities 1 to 3, overflow abnormalities, RAM defects, and winning abnormalities.

The medal insertion abnormality 1 occurs when the inserted medals are retained, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E1. The medal insertion abnormality 1 is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (setting switch in this example) is accepted after the cause of the error is removed. The medal insertion abnormality 2 occurs when the number of medals inserted is equal to or greater than the specified number, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E2. The medal insertion abnormality 2 is resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM.

The medal insertion abnormality 3 occurs when either the insertion sensor 1 or the insertion sensor 2 is turned on other than during the medal insertion process, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E3. The medal insertion abnormality 4 occurs when the inserted medal does not normally pass through the insertion sensor 1 and the insertion sensor 2, and the corresponding error code is, for example, EA. The medal insertion abnormality 3 and the medal insertion abnormality 4 are resolved when the operation of the error release switch (setting switch in this example) is accepted after the cause of the error is removed.

The medal payout abnormality 1 occurs when the medal payout is not paid out for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E4. The medal payout abnormality 2 occurs when medals are accumulated when the medal payout device is driven, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E5. The medal payout abnormality 3 occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or the payout sensor 2 is turned on except during the medal payout process, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E5. All of the medal payout abnormalities 1 to 3 are resolved when the operation of the error canceling switch (setting switch in this example) is accepted after the cause of the error is removed.

The overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage is turned on, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E7. The overflow error is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (setting switch in this example) is accepted after the cause of the error is removed. The RAM failure occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM 308, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E8. The RAM failure is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (setting key in this example) is accepted. The winning abnormality occurs when a winning symbol different from the winning symbol confirmed by the internal lottery is won after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E9. The winning abnormality is resolved when the operation of the error cancellation switch (setting switch in this example) is accepted.

The game console according to the present invention is not limited to the slot machine 100, and can be applied to pachinko machines. Examples of errors that can occur in a pachinko machine include a bottom pan full tank error, a payout device error, a payout excess error, an illegal payout error, a main control unit communication error, a magnetic error, a magnetic field error, a frame opening error, and a RAM clear error. , Impact sensor error, etc., and these errors are also resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after the cause of the error is removed.

FIG. 83 (e) is a diagram showing an example of notification of a certain error and notification of a state in which the setting cannot be changed. In this example, the backlights of the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the light emitters 137a, 138a, 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the reels 110 to 112 in the stopped state are turned red, triggered by the instruction of the error notification. The error code (for example, E1) is displayed by using the payout number display 127 while maintaining the lit state.

In step S304, an instruction is given to execute a setting change impossible state notification for notifying that the setting cannot be changed (first state) even if the setting key is operated as a part of the setting change operation. Later, the process proceeds to step S305. In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display an image including the character string "the setting change is invalid" while maintaining the error notification, triggered by the instruction of the setting change impossible state notification. When a plurality of errors for which the setting change is invalid occur, the display on the liquid crystal display device 157 may be common, or the information that can determine the type of the error is also notified. You may.

In step S305, it is determined whether or not a certain error has been resolved, and if it has not been resolved, the determination process of step S305 is continuously executed, and if it is resolved, the process proceeds to step S306.

The method of resolving a certain error is not particularly limited, but as described above, most of the errors that can occur in the slot machine 100 accept the operation of the error release switch (setting key in this example) after removing the cause of the error. It will be resolved if it happens.

The setting switch is an error release switch that can perform operations for changing settings (setting value change operation) and operation for confirming settings, as well as operations for eliminating various errors (error resolution operation). Since it is an operating means that also functions, if the error is cleared by pressing the setting switch and then the setting is changed to a state where the setting can be changed, the setting value is changed by the wrong pressing operation of the setting switch (for example, +1). There is a risk of being overwhelmed.

However, in this example, in the state where both the setting value change operation and the error resolution operation are possible, the error resolution operation is prioritized and enabled, and the setting value change operation is invalid, so that the setting value is erroneously set. In addition to not being lost, the error can be resolved with priority, and the error can be resolved as soon as possible to start the game.

In step S306, the process proceeds to step S307 after instructing to execute the error code hiding that erases the error code corresponding to the resolved error. In this example, the error code displayed by using the payout number display 127 is erased (cleared) by the instruction of hiding the error code.

In step S307, it is determined whether or not the setting key has been rotated to the on position, and if the setting key has been rotated to the on position, the process proceeds to step S308. End the process. In step S308, the process proceeds to step S309 after instructing to execute the setting confirmation notification to notify that the setting confirmation (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 84) is possible.

FIG. 83 (d) is a diagram showing an example of the setting confirmation notification. In this example, each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is maintained in the state where the backlights of the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the reels 110 to 112 in the stopped state are lit in red, triggered by the instruction of the setting confirmation notification. The illuminants 137a, 138a, and 139a of the above are lit in pink, and the current set value (for example, the number 3 indicating the set value 3) is displayed by using the payout number display 127. In addition, the voice "setting is being confirmed" is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

Further, in step S308, a setting confirmation process is performed. In this setting confirmation process, when the pressing operation of the setting switch is detected, the initial setting value (for example, setting 1) or the setting value set by changing the setting (any of setting 1 to setting 6) Is displayed on the payout number display 127.

In step S309, it is determined whether or not the setting key is off (whether or not it has returned from on to off by the rotation operation of the setting key), and if it is on, it is possible to return to step S307 and check the setting by the setting switch. Continue to be in a good state. On the other hand, when the setting key is off (when the setting key is rotated to return from on to off), the setting-related processing at power-on ends. As a result, the process shifts to the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process (step S102) of the main control unit main process, and the normal game is started.

In step S310, which proceeds when it is determined in step S302 that a certain error has not occurred, it is determined whether or not the setting key has been rotated to the on position, and the setting key has been rotated to the on position. If this is the case, the process proceeds to step S311. If not, the power-on setting-related processing is terminated.

In step S311, it is determined whether the setting change flag is on or off, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S312 to notify that the setting can be changed (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 84). After giving an instruction to execute the setting confirmation notification, the process proceeds to step S314, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S313, and after giving an instruction to execute the setting confirmation notification described with reference to FIG. ..
The determination of whether to proceed to the setting change process of step S313 or the setting confirmation process of step S313 is not limited to the flag, and for example, it is determined whether or not the setting key is turned on after the power is turned on. It may be configured to proceed to the setting confirmation process when it is on (when the setting key is turned on after the power is turned on).

FIG. 83 (c) is a diagram showing an example of setting change notification. In this example, the backlights of the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the light emitters 137a, 138a, 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the reels 110 to 112 in the stopped state are red, triggered by the instruction of the setting change notification. The current set value (for example, the number 3 indicating the set value 3) is displayed by using the payout number display 127 while maintaining the lit state. In addition, the voice "The door is open" is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

Further, in step S312, a setting change process is performed. In this setting change process, every time the pressing operation of the setting switch is detected, the setting value 1 to 6 currently set is incremented and updated by 1, and when the setting value exceeds 6, it returns to 1. Repeat it. Further, it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the set value currently displayed on the payout number display 127 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 308. And confirm the set value.

Further, in step S313, a setting confirmation process is performed. In this setting confirmation process, when the pressing operation of the setting switch is detected, the initial setting value (for example, setting 1) or the setting value set by changing the setting (any of setting 1 to setting 6) Is displayed on the payout number display 127.

In step S314, it is determined whether or not the setting key is off (whether or not it has returned from on to off by the rotation operation of the setting key), and if it is on, the process returns to step S310 and the setting is changed or set by the setting switch. Continue to be able to confirm. On the other hand, when the setting key is off (when it is detected that the setting key has returned from on to off by the rotation operation of the setting key), the process proceeds to step S315.

In step S315, it is determined whether the setting change flag is on or off, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S316. -The process proceeds to the start operation acceptance process (step S102), and the normal game is started.

In step S316, an instruction is given to execute a setting change completion notification to notify that the setting change has been completed, and in the next step S317, after setting the setting change flag to off, the power-on setting-related processing is terminated. The main control unit shifts to the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process (step S102) of the main process, and the normal game is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 83 (c), the voice "setting is completed" is output from the speakers 272 and 277, triggered by the instruction of the setting change completion notification.

<Errors prioritized over setting changes / setting changes and setting confirmation>
Next, the setting change and the setting confirmation that can be executed by the game console according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85.

Here, the setting change means to change the setting value of the game console, and in this example, the operation means (in this example, while displaying the setting value (any of the setting 1 to the setting 6) on the payout number display 127. Every time the pressing operation by the setting switch) is detected, the setting value 1 to 6 currently set is incremented and updated by 1, and when the setting value exceeds 6, it is repeatedly executed to return to 1. It is possible to change the set value with.
When the operation of the start lever 135, which will be described later, is executed without pressing the operating means (setting switch), or by repeating the pressing operation of the operating means (setting switch), the set value is set once (for example, setting 5). → When setting 5) and the operation of the start lever 135 is executed, the setting is the same as the setting before the power failure.

Further, the setting confirmation means to confirm the setting value of the game console, and in this example, the setting value (for example, setting 1) or the setting initially set by the pressing operation by the operation means (setting switch). It is possible to confirm the set value by displaying the set value (any of the settings 1 to 6) set by the change on the payout number display 127.

<Errors prioritized over setting changes / Setting changes and setting confirmation / Normal time>
FIG. 84A is a diagram showing an example of a flow of setting change in a normal time when an error does not occur in the game table, and FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of various notifications.

When the power is turned on (FIGS. 84 (a) and (2)) while the setting key is on (FIGS. 84 (a) and (1)), the setting change flag is set in the initial setting process described with reference to FIG. 81. It is set to ON, and the power-on setting-related process described with reference to FIG. 82 is executed.

In this power-on setting-related process, first, the power-on notification (FIGS. 84 (a) and (3)) as shown in FIG. 85 (a) is executed, and then no error occurs in this example. Moreover, since the setting change flag is on, the setting can be changed by operating the setting switch, and when the setting switch is operated, the setting change notification as shown in FIG. 85 (f) (FIG. 84 (a) (4)) is executed.

Further, when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted and it is detected that the setting key has returned from on to off after the set value is confirmed, the setting change completion notification as shown in the lower part of FIG. 85 (f) ( After executing FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (5) and confirming the set value currently displayed on the set value display, the normal game is started based on the set value (FIG. 84 (a)). (6)).

FIG. 84B is a diagram showing an example of the flow of setting confirmation in a normal time when no error occurs in the game table.
When the power is turned on (FIGS. 84 (b) and (1)) while the setting key is off, the setting change flag is set to off in the initial setting process described with reference to FIG. 81, and FIG. 82 is used. The above-mentioned power-on setting-related processing is executed.

In this power-on setting-related process, first, the power-on notification (FIGS. 84 (b) and (2)) as shown in FIG. 85 (a) is executed, and then no error occurs in this example. And since the setting change flag is off, if the setting key is on (FIG. 84 (b) (3)), the setting confirmation notification as shown in FIG. 85 (d) (FIG. 84 (b)). ) (4)).

When it is detected that the setting key has returned from on to off, the normal game is started based on the current setting value (FIGS. 84 (b) and (5)).

<Errors prioritized over setting changes / Setting changes and setting confirmation / When an error occurs>
FIG. 83 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of setting confirmation when an error occurs in the game console.

When the power is turned on (FIG. 84 (c) (2)) in a state where a certain error has occurred (FIG. 84 (c) (1)), the power-on setting-related described with reference to FIG. The process is executed while an error is occurring in the process.

In this power-on setting-related process, first, the power-on notification (FIG. 84 (c) (3)) as shown in FIG. 85 (a) is executed, and then an error occurs in this example. Therefore, during the preparation of the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the error code (E1 in this example) confirmed by the error determination is displayed as the number of payouts before starting the display of the liquid crystal display device 157. While executing the error notification displayed on the device 127 (FIGS. 84 (c) and (4)), when the preparation of the liquid crystal display device 157 is completed, the setting changeable status notification as shown in FIG. 85 (c) is performed. By executing (FIGS. 84 (c) and (5)), it is notified that an error has occurred and that the setting cannot be changed (first state).

When the error that has occurred is resolved (FIG. 84 (c) (6)), the error notification and the setting changeable status notification are terminated (FIG. 84 (c) (7)), and the setting key is used. If is on, the setting confirmation notification (FIG. 84 (c) (9)) as shown in FIG. 85 (d) is executed, and when it is detected that the setting key has returned from on to off, , The normal game is started based on the current set value (FIGS. 84 (c) and (10)). Further, even when the setting key is off after the error is resolved, the normal game is started based on the current setting value (FIGS. 84 (c) and (8)).

When the setting is continuously changed, the power is turned on again with the setting key turned on, and the operation is performed according to the flow of the setting change described with reference to FIG. 84 (a).

According to this example, even if a certain error is resolved, the setting cannot be changed unless the operation according to the flow of setting change is performed, so that the setting can be changed reliably.

<Errors prioritized over setting changes / Characteristics of the invention>
As described above, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 69) is a game console capable of executing a certain error notification, and the certain error is a certain error. It is at least one error among a plurality of types of errors that can occur in the game console (for example, medal insertion abnormality 1 to 4, medal payout abnormality 1 to 3, overflow abnormality, RAM failure, winning abnormality, etc.). If the error continues when the power is turned on after the power is turned off, the setting key is operated as part of the setting change operation (for example,). A state in which the set value cannot be changed (hereinafter, referred to as “first state”) even if the setting key switch is rotated and turned on as shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (1) (hereinafter referred to as “first state”). It is a game table characterized in that the setting cannot be changed as shown in step S304 of the above.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, a situation occurs in which an error occurs after the operation of changing the set value is completed and the game is started, and the operation of changing the set value becomes useless. It can be avoided and workability can be improved.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 69) is a game console capable of notifying a certain error, and the certain error is caused in the game console. It is at least one of a plurality of types of errors that can occur (for example, medal insertion abnormality 1 to 4, medal payout abnormality 1 to 3, overflow abnormality, RAM failure, winning abnormality, etc.), and the above-mentioned error occurs. If the power is cut off while the power is turned off and the error continues when the power is turned on after the power cut, the setting key is operated as part of the setting change operation (for example, FIG. 84 (a). ) A state in which the set value cannot be changed even by the operation of rotating the setting key switch to be turned on (hereinafter referred to as "first state". For example, in step S304 of FIG. 82). The setting cannot be changed as shown), and after the notification of a certain error (for example, the notification of a certain error shown in FIG. 83D) is started, the notification of the first state is started. (For example, the setting changeable state notification shown in FIG. 83 (d) is performed).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, a situation occurs in which an error occurs after the operation of changing the set value is completed and the game is started, and the operation of changing the set value becomes useless. It can be avoided and workability can be improved. In addition, in order to notify that it is in the first state after the notification of a certain error is started, it is clearly notified that a certain error has occurred and that the set value cannot be changed. It is possible to improve workability.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 69) is a game console capable of notifying a certain error, and the certain error is caused in the game console. It is at least one of a plurality of types of errors that can occur (for example, medal insertion abnormality 1 to 4, medal payout abnormality 1 to 3, overflow abnormality, RAM failure, winning abnormality, etc.), and the above-mentioned error occurs. If the power is cut off while the power is turned off and the error continues when the power is turned on after the power cut, the setting key is operated as part of the setting change operation (for example, FIG. 84 (a). ) A state in which the set value cannot be changed even by rotating the setting key switch (operation shown in (1) to turn it on) (hereinafter, referred to as “first state”. For example, in step S304 of FIG. 82). The setting cannot be changed as shown), and after the power-on notification (for example, the power-on notification shown in FIG. 83B) is started, the notification of the first state is started (for example,). It is a game table characterized in that the setting change impossible state notification shown in FIG. 83 (d) is performed).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, a situation occurs in which an error occurs after the operation of changing the set value is completed and the game is started, and the operation of changing the set value becomes useless. It can be avoided and workability can be improved. In addition, since the first state is notified after the power-on notification is started, it is possible to clearly notify that the power is turned on and that the set value cannot be changed. It can be done, and workability can be further improved.

Further, when a power failure is detected in the first state in which the certain error is resolved and the power is turned on after the power failure, the set value can be changed by the setting change operation (for example). , The setting can be changed as shown in FIG. 17 (f)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to change the set value in a state where the error is surely resolved, and it is possible to prevent unnecessary work from occurring.

Further, the operation means is provided with an operation means (for example, a setting key), and the operation means is an operation means capable of executing a setting value change operation for changing a setting value as a part of the setting change operation, and the operation means is the operation means. It is an operation means capable of executing an error resolution operation for resolving a certain error, and when the operation means is operated in the first state, the error resolution operation is valid and the setting value change operation is invalid. It may be something like.

With such a configuration, the set value is not set by mistake, and the error can be resolved with priority, and the error can be resolved as soon as possible to start the game. ..

Further, in a state where the certain error does not occur when the power is turned on, a state in which the set value can be changed (hereinafter, referred to as a "second state"; for example, shown in FIG. 84A). A state in which the setting can be changed) and a state in which the setting value can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as a "third state"; for example, a state in which the setting can be confirmed as shown in FIG. 84 (b)) are included. The power is turned on while a certain operation using the setting key (for example, the operation of rotating and turning on the setting key switch shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (1)) is performed as a part of the setting change operation. If this is the case, the second state is reached, and after the power is turned on, the certain operation (for example, the operation of rotating the setting key switch shown in FIGS. 84 (b) and (3) to turn it on) is performed. In that case, the third state is reached, and when the power is turned off in the state where the certain error has occurred and the power is turned on in the state where the certain operation is performed after the power failure, the power is turned on. When the first state is reached and the certain error is resolved in the first state, the state may shift to the third state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to check the set value after the error is resolved, so it is certain that the set value has not been changed to an incorrect value due to an error (whether it has malfunctioned). It can be confirmed and workability can be improved.

Further, the certain error may be an error including an error relating to the payout of the game medium (for example, the medal payout abnormality 1 to 3).

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an error will occur even if the game is started.

<Button production that changes the production depending on the operation method>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88, a button effect whose effect changes depending on the operation method will be described.

<Button production whose production changes depending on the operation method / First production>
FIGS. 86 to 87 are diagrams showing an example of a certain effect (pseudo-bonus) in which the first effect (first button effect) is executed in chronological order.

A certain effect is a first operation (in this example, a single pressing operation (single pressing) of the effect button shown in FIG. 69) and a second operation different from the first operation (in this example, in this example). A long press operation (including an automatic operation) or a continuous press operation of the effect button shown in FIG. 69 is at least an effective effect, and when the first operation is performed in the certain effect, the first operation is performed. (In this example, the effect including the operation response display) is executed.

In addition to the pseudo-bonus effects described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88, certain effects include effects such as bonuses, AT games, and mini games. If the game console is a pachinko machine, a big hit. Includes production of games and the like. Further, the first effect includes various effects executed based on the first operation, in addition to the first button effect described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 87.

FIG. 86A shows an example of an effect in a normal game. In this example, in a normal game, by displaying two icons IC1 and IC2 (character images in this example) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the player is notified that two items are given. ing.

Here, the item is a privilege given to the player according to the internal winning combination, the number of addictive games, and the like. In this example, the item given to the player can be digested with a pseudo bonus, and one button effect can be executed for each item. In addition, by acquiring the item, there is a high possibility that the AT game (excluding the pseudo bonus) will be transferred after the pseudo bonus ends, but if the AT game is not transferred after the pseudo bonus ends, the normal game will be performed. ..

Subsequently, FIG. 86 (b) shows an example of a bonus confirmation effect indicating that the transition to the pseudo bonus has been confirmed. In this example, in a normal game, a bonus confirmation effect (in this example, a display including a character string such as "bonus confirmed !!") for notifying that the transition to the pseudo bonus has been confirmed is executed, and the liquid crystal display device 157 is executed. By displaying the four icons IC1 to IC4 (character images in this example) in the display area of the player, the player is notified that the four items are given.

Subsequently, FIG. 86 (c) shows an example of a pseudo-bonus start effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus has started and an item display suggesting the current number of items. In this example, the item display (in this example, a character string such as "4 times chance" to notify the player that four items have been given, and a character image are displayed, triggered by the third stop operation in the game. (Display including) and pseudo-bonus start effect (in this example, display including a character string such as "Press a button to get an item") are started.

Subsequently, FIG. 86 (d) shows an example of the button IN animation 1 foretelling that the first operation is valid before the operation validity period of the first operation. In this example, by displaying the effect image EF1 in the button IN animation 1, the first operation request display (button image BT1) appears (displays) at the display position of the effect image EF1, that is, It is suggested that the first operation of the first time is effective.

Subsequently, FIG. 86 (e) shows an example of the button IN animation 2 that announces that the first operation will be effective before the operation valid period of the first operation. In this example, by displaying the effect image EF2 in the button IN animation 2, the first operation request display (button image BT1) appears (displays) at the display position of the effect image EF2, that is, It suggests that the first operation of the first time is effective.

Subsequently, FIG. 86 (f) shows an example of the first operation request display. In this example, after erasing the effect EF2 of the button IN animation 2, the player starts displaying the button image BT1 imitating the appearance of the effect button and the character string such as "press!" As the operation request display. It suggests that the first operation (single press of the effect button) is effective (the valid period of the first operation has started), and encourages the first operation (single press of the effect button). ..

Subsequently, FIG. 86 (g) shows an example of the operation response display and the result display corresponding to the first operation (single press of the effect button). In this example, when the first operation (single press of the effect button) is accepted, the privilege is given to suggest that the player is given a privilege as an operation response display corresponding to the operation. The display SG1 (in this example, a display including a character string such as "win rate level 1UP") and the result display RG1 composed of the character image of the chief are displayed.

Subsequently, FIG. 86 (h) shows an example of the continuation of the result display RG1 of the operation response display. In this example, the privilege grant display SG1 displayed in the figure (g) is erased, and the result display RG1 displayed in the figure (g) is moved to the center of the liquid crystal display device 157.

Subsequently, FIG. 86 (i) shows an example of the button IN animation 1 foretelling that the continuation of the result display RG1 of the operation response display and the second first operation (single press of the effect button) are effective. ing. In this example, an animation that gradually reduces the size of the result display RG1 is executed, and the effect image EF1 is displayed in the button IN animation 1 so as to overlap in front of the animation, so that the second time. It is suggested that the first operation is valid within the operation valid of one operation (single press of the effect button).

Subsequently, FIG. 86 (j) shows an example of the button IN animation 2 that announces that the continuation of the result display RG1 and the second first operation (single press of the effect button) will be effective. In this example, an animation that gradually reduces the size of the result display RG1 is executed, and the effect image EF2 is displayed in the button IN animation 2 so as to overlap in front of the animation, so that the second time. It is suggested that the first operation is valid within the operation valid period of one operation (single press of the effect button).

Subsequently, FIG. 86 (k) shows an example of the second operation request display. In this example, as the operation request display, the display of a character string such as "press!" Is started, and the appearance of the effect button is imitated so as to overlap in front of the result display RG1 corresponding to the first operation request display. By displaying the button image BT2 that has been performed, it is suggested to the player that the first operation (single press of the effect button) is effective (the effective period of the operation has started), and the first operation (effect). Pressing the button once) is urging.

According to this example, in the case of a single press of the effect button, the previous operation response display (result display RG1) overlaps with the next operation request display (button image BT2). It is possible to perform a corresponding production, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to liven up the game. Further, by making the next operation request display stand out, it is possible to improve the player's motivation to operate.

Subsequently, FIG. 86 (l) shows an example in which the display mode of the second operation request display is changed. In this example, the result display RG1 corresponding to the first operation request display is moved to the lower right of the display area, and the button image BT2 displayed in the figure (k) is displayed as a button image BT3 larger than this button image BT2. It is changed to (Big button). The button image BT3 (deca button) is a display (chance up button display) that makes it easier to derive a result more advantageous than the button image BT2, and in this example, it is configured to increase the winning percentage level by two or more.

According to this example, in the case of a single press of the effect button, a display that makes it easy to derive an advantageous result may be performed, so that it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous and to liven up the game.

Subsequently, FIG. 87 (m) shows an example of the operation response display and the result display corresponding to the second first operation (single press of the effect button). In this example, when the second first operation (single press of the effect button) is accepted, a privilege is given to indicate that the player is given a privilege as an operation response display corresponding to the operation. The display SG2 (in this example, a display including a character string such as "AT addition level 2UP") and the result display RG2 composed of a panda character image are displayed.

FIG. 87 (n) shows an example of the result display corresponding to the first operation (single press of the effect button) of the first to fourth times. In this example, after the end of the first operation of the fourth time (single press of the effect button), the privilege given in the pseudo bonus is suggested as the operation response display corresponding to all the first operations of the first to fourth times. The privilege grant display SGA (in this example, a display including a character string such as "win rate LV4 addition LV3") and the result display RG1 to RG4 of the lottery in the start game of the pseudo bonus are displayed.

FIG. 87 (o) shows an example of the confrontation effect during the pseudo-bonus. In this example, as a confrontation production, an animation including a scene in which Yoshimune and Sora confront each other is executed.

FIG. 87 (p) shows an example of a result determination (winning effect), and FIG. 87 (q) shows an example of an AT game effect. In this example, when the condition for shifting from the pseudo-bonus to the AT game is satisfied (for example, when the number of items exceeding a predetermined number can be acquired in the pseudo-bonus), after the confrontation effect shown in FIG. 87 (o) is executed, As a result judgment, after executing a victory effect (in this example, an animation including a scene in which Yoshimune wins the confrontation) suggesting a transition to the AT game, the AT game is started in the next game.

FIG. 87 (p') shows an example of result determination (defeat effect), and FIG. 87 (q') shows an example of a normal game effect. In this example, when the condition for shifting from the pseudo-bonus to the AT game is not satisfied (for example, when the number of items exceeding a predetermined number cannot be acquired in the pseudo-bonus), the confrontation effect shown in FIG. 87 (o) is executed. Later, as a result judgment, after performing a defeat effect (in this example, an animation including a scene in which Yoshimune loses to the confrontation) suggesting a transition to a normal game, the normal game is continued in the next game.

<Button production whose production changes depending on the operation method / Second production>
FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example of a certain effect (pseudo-bonus) in which the second effect (second button effect) is executed in chronological order. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 88 (d) to (f) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 86 (d) to (f), the description thereof will be omitted.

A certain effect is a first operation (in this example, a single pressing operation (single pressing) of the effect button shown in FIG. 69) and a second operation different from the first operation (in this example, in this example). The long-pressing operation of the effect button shown in FIG. 69 (including the long-pressing operation by auto (long-pressing auto) and the continuous pressing operation) is at least effective, and the second operation is the effect in the certain effect. If so, the second effect (in this example, the effect including the operation response display) is executed.
As will be described later, even when a third operation different from the first operation and the second operation (for example, a continuous pressing operation in which one pressing is continuously performed at short intervals) is performed, the first operation is performed. It may be configured so that the second effect is executed.

In addition to the second button effect described with reference to FIG. 88, the second effect includes various effects executed based on the second operation.

FIGS. 88 (g) and 88 (h) show an example of an operation request display. In this example, as an operation request display, a button image BT1 imitating the appearance of the effect button and a character string such as "press!" Are started to be displayed, so that the player can perform a second operation (hold down the effect button automatically). ) Is valid (the validity period of the operation has started).

Subsequently, FIGS. 88 (i) and 88 (j) show an example of the operation response display and the result display according to the first second operation (long press auto of the effect button). In this example, when the first second operation (long press auto of the effect button) is accepted (automatic operation (automatic operation) is set by the player, and the effect button is long pressed, the game is played. When the control unit of the table considers it), as an operation response display corresponding to the operation, a privilege grant display SG1 (in this example, "win rate level 1 UP") suggesting that a privilege advantageous to the player has been granted has been given. The display including the character string) and the result display RG1 consisting of the character image of the bancho are displayed.

Subsequently, FIG. 88 (k) shows an example of the continuation of the result display RG1 of the operation response display. In this example, the privilege grant display SG1 displayed in the figure (j) is erased, and the result display RG1 displayed in the figure (j) is moved to the center of the liquid crystal display device 157.

Next, FIG. 88 (l) shows the button IN animation 1 for notifying that the second second operation (long press auto of the effect button) is effective, and the second operation (length of the effect button). An example of the operation response display and the result display according to the push auto) is shown.

In this example, by displaying the effect image EF1 in the button IN animation 1, it is suggested that the second first operation (long press auto of the effect button) is effective, and the second second operation is performed. Since the second operation (long press auto of the effect button) is accepted, the privilege grant display SG2 (in this example, suggesting that a privilege advantageous to the player has been granted as the operation response display corresponding to the operation). A display including a character string such as "AT addition level 2 UP") and a result display RG2 composed of a panda character image are displayed.

In this example, by accepting the operation of the operation means before the display imitating the appearance of the operation means is displayed, the next operation response effect can be executed, so that the player who enjoys the game can enjoy the game. The operation request display can be clearly shown to encourage the operation, and the result can be given priority to the player who is in a hurry to play the game, and the satisfaction of the player can be enhanced.

Subsequently, FIG. 88 (m) shows an example of the continuation of the result display RG2 of the operation response display. In this example, the effect image EF1, the result display RG1 and the privilege grant display SG2 displayed in the figure (l) are erased, and the result display RG2 displayed in the figure (l) is placed in the center of the liquid crystal display device 157. You are running an animation to move.

Subsequently, FIG. 88 (n) shows the button IN animation 1 for notifying that the third second operation (long press auto of the effect button) is effective, and the third second operation (length of the effect button). An example of the operation response display and the result display according to the push auto) is shown.

In this example, by displaying the effect image EF1 in the button IN animation 1, it is suggested that the first operation (long press auto of the effect button) of the third time is effective, and the third time is performed. Since the second operation (long press auto of the effect button) is accepted, the privilege grant display SG3 (in this example, suggesting that the privilege is given to the player as the operation response display corresponding to the operation) is accepted. A display including a character string such as "win rate level 1 UP") and a result display RG3 composed of a character image of the chief are displayed.

FIG. 88 (o) shows an example of the result display corresponding to the first to fourth second operation (long press auto of the effect button). In this example, after the end of the 4th second operation (long press auto of the effect button), the privilege given in the pseudo bonus is displayed as the operation response display corresponding to all the 2nd operations of the 1st to 4th times. The suggestion privilege grant display SGA (in this example, a display including a character string such as "win rate LV4 addition LV3") and all result displays RG1 to RG4 in the pseudo bonus are displayed.

<Button production / feature points whose production changes depending on the operation method>
As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 69) according to the present embodiment has an effect means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, a speaker 272, 277) capable of performing a certain effect. The game console is provided with, for example, a first operation (for example, a single press of the effect button) and a second operation different from the first operation (for example, the effect button). The long press auto) is at least an effective effect, and when the first operation is performed in the certain effect, the first effect (for example, FIG. 86 (g), FIG. 87 (m), When the operation response display shown in FIG. (N) or the like is executed and the second operation is performed in the certain effect, the second effect (for example, FIG. 88 (i), FIG. i), the operation response display shown in the figure (i), the figure (o), etc.) is executed, and the first effect and the second effect are characterized in that at least a part thereof is different. It is a game table.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a plurality of types of effects according to the operation by the player in a certain effect, and the effect does not become monotonous, and the game can be lively.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) is provided with an effect means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, a speaker 272, 277, etc.) capable of performing a certain effect. In the game console, the certain effect is a first operation (for example, a single press of the effect button) and a second operation different from the first operation (for example, long press of the effect button). Is at least an effective effect, and when the first operation is performed in the certain effect, the first effect (for example, FIG. 86 (g), FIG. 87 (m), FIG. ) Etc.), and when the second operation is performed in the certain effect, the second effect (for example, FIG. 88 (i), FIG. (J), the same). The operation response display shown in FIGS. (L) and FIG. It is an effect that may be operated a number of times, and is a gaming table characterized in that it is possible to display an operation request display a plurality of times in the certain effect.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a plurality of types of effects according to the operation by the player in a certain effect, and the effect does not become monotonous, and the game can be lively. In addition, since the operation may be performed a plurality of times, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by executing the effect corresponding to the operation.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) is provided with an effect means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, a speaker 272, 277, etc.) capable of performing a certain effect. In the game console, the certain effect is a first operation (for example, a single press of the effect button) and a second operation different from the first operation (for example, long press of the effect button). Is at least an effective effect, and when the first operation is performed in the certain effect, the first effect (for example, FIG. 86 (g), FIG. 87 (m), FIG. ) Etc.), and when the second operation is performed in the certain effect, the second effect (for example, FIG. 88 (i), FIG. (J), the same). The operation response display shown in FIGS. (L) and FIG. It is an effect in which the operation may be performed a number of times, and the operation request display can be displayed a plurality of times in the certain effect. The first operation request display (for example, FIG. 86) is displayed in the multiple operation request display. (F), the operation request display shown in FIG. (K) and the like) and the second operation request display (for example, FIG. 88 (g), FIG. (H)) different from the first operation request display. The operation request display (shown) is included, and the second operation request display is a display that is easier to derive a more advantageous result than the first operation request display.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a plurality of types of effects according to the operation by the player in a certain effect, and the effect does not become monotonous, and the game can be lively. In addition, since the operation may be performed a plurality of times, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by executing the effect corresponding to the operation. Further, since the second operation request display is a display that is easier to derive a more advantageous result than the first operation request display, the player's expectation is raised when the second operation request display is displayed. be able to.

Further, the operation means (for example, an effect button) provided at a position where the player can operate is provided, and the certain effect is an effect in which the operation may be performed a plurality of times, and the certain effect is the effect. It is an effect including an effect of displaying the operation request display of the operation means, the operation request display is a display including an image imitating the appearance of the operation means, and the first operation is performed in the certain effect. In this case, as the first effect, an operation response display corresponding to the first operation (hereinafter referred to as "first operation response display"; for example, FIGS. 86 (g) and 87 (m)). , The operation response display shown in FIG. (N) and the like) may be overlapped with the operation request display, and when the second operation is performed in the certain effect, the second operation is performed. As an effect, an operation response display corresponding to the second operation (hereinafter referred to as "second operation response display"; for example, FIGS. 88 (i), FIG. (J), FIG. (L), FIG. The operation response display) shown in o) and the like may not be overlapped with the operation request display.

With such a configuration, the operation response display may or may not overlap with the operation request display depending on the operation of the player, so that the effect does not become monotonous and the game can be lively.

Further, the first operation response display is a result display based on a lottery by the first operation (hereinafter, referred to as "first lottery"), and the second operation response display is the second operation response display. It is a result display based on a lottery by operation (hereinafter, referred to as "second lottery"), and the first lottery and the second lottery may be executed using the same lottery table. ..

With such a configuration, the player can obtain the same result regardless of his / her own operation, and does not give the player a sense of unfairness.

Further, the first operation is an operation (for example, a single push) in which the operation by the operation means is performed once in the certain effect, and the first effect is the operation request in the certain effect. After the display is executed, the first operation response display is displayed in response to the first operation, the first operation response display is overlapped with the newly generated operation request display, and further. It may be an effect including the content that the next operation response display of the first operation is displayed in response to the first operation of the next time.

With such a configuration, the production content of the first effect executed by the first operation can be easily understood by the player, and the player can perform the first operation or the second operation according to his / her preference. It is possible to decide whether or not to perform the operation, and it is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player.

Further, the second operation is an operation in which a plurality of operations (for example, long press auto) are enabled by continuously pressing the operation means in the certain effect, and the second effect is the above-mentioned or. After the operation request display is executed in the effect, the second operation response display is displayed in response to the second operation, and the appearance of the operation means is imitated as the newly generated operation request display. It may be an effect including the content that the next operation response display is displayed before the image is displayed.

With such a configuration, the production content of the second effect executed by the second operation can be easily understood by the player, and the player can perform the first operation or the second operation according to his / her preference. It is possible to decide whether or not to perform the operation, and it is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player.

Further, in the second effect, a new second operation response is performed after the animation display of the newly generated operation request display is started and before the image imitating the appearance of the operation means is displayed. It may be an effect including the content to be displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly show the operation request display to the player who enjoys the game and urge the operation, but by performing the second operation, the game can be played without waiting for the operation request display. It is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player who wants to advance the game quickly.

Further, the certain effect is an effect in which a third operation (for example, a continuous pressing operation) different from the first operation and the second operation is effective, and in the certain effect, the third operation is performed. When the operation is performed, the second effect is executed, and the third operation is an operation in which the operation by the operation means is performed once in the certain effect, and the operation is performed twice in succession. The interval between operations may be shorter than the interval between the first operations.

With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the effect according to the third operation, so that the effect does not become monotonous and the game can be lively.

Further, it is provided with an operation means (for example, an effect button) provided at a position where the player can operate, and an effect means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, a speaker 272, 277, etc.) capable of executing a certain effect. In the game console, the certain effect includes an effect of prompting the operation of the operation means a plurality of times, and an animation display relating to an operation request display of the operation means is displayed in connection with the certain effect, and the animation. The display includes an animation in which a display imitating the appearance of the operating means is displayed, and when the operating means is operated in the certain effect, an operation response effect is executed, the animation display is started, and the animation display is started. Even if the operation means is operated during the period before the display imitating the appearance of the operation means is displayed (for example, when it is determined that the effect button is pressed and held automatically), the operation response effect is produced. (For example, the operation response display shown in FIG. 88 (l) or the like) may be executed.

With such a configuration, the next operation response effect can be executed by operating the operation means before the display imitating the appearance of the operation means is displayed in the animation display. The operation request display can be clearly shown to the player who enjoys the game to encourage the operation, and the result can be given priority to the player who is in a hurry to play the game, which can increase the satisfaction of the player. can.
Further, it is provided with an operation means (for example, an effect button) provided at a position where the player can operate, and an effect means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, a speaker 272, 277, etc.) capable of executing a certain effect. In the game console, an animation display relating to an operation request display of the operation means is displayed in connection with the certain effect, and the animation display displays a first display imitating the appearance of the operation means. It is a display that may execute an animation, and the animation display is a display that may execute an animation that displays a second display that imitates the appearance of the operation means, and is a display that may execute the first display and the above. The second display is a different display, and when the operation means is operated in the certain effect, the operation response effect is executed, the animation display is started, and the appearance of the operation means is imitated in the animation display. The game console may be characterized in that the operation response effect is executed even when the operation means is operated during the period before the display is displayed.

Further, the operation request display in the certain effect may be a display prompting one operation. Further, the operation request display in the certain effect may be an operation request display for prompting two or more operations, or an operation request display for continuous hits for prompting repeated hits.

Further, the game console according to the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine. It can also be regarded as. Further, even if the operation request display of the button is generated once, the operation valid period of one can be regarded as a certain effect.

Further, although the deca button display is exemplified as another example of the operation request display, the operation request display related to different colors or other operation means may be displayed.

Further, a certain effect may include a plurality of operations, and only any one of them may be a second effect. For example, even if the second operation is performed in a certain period and the first operation is executed in a certain period, the second operation is performed in the second operation. The one in which the production is executed is also included.

Further, the gaming table according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the "enclosed gaming machine" circulates and uses the gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Further, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Further, the range of the game may be further expanded by applying the content described in one configuration to the other configurations among the plurality of configurations described in the above-described embodiment.

[Sixth Embodiment]

The slot machine of the present embodiment starts rotation when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if they do not match, the game medium is used. It is a game table that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

Next, the slot machine of this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 89 to 97. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 89 to 97 are used only for the description of the present embodiment, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals are shown in the description of the present embodiment. Priority is given to the reference numerals 89 to 97. Moreover, each embodiment of this embodiment and each embodiment of other embodiments can be applied in combination with each other.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 89 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which multiple types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit of this optical sensor is provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line. The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 114.

For example, the notification lamp 123 informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in the internal lottery for the winning combination, which will be described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. It is a lamp to inform you. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment is lit until the bonus game is completed after the bonus notification that the bonus confirmation is announced. The notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, a maximum of three bets are inserted, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button capable of starting a certain effect when an operation is accepted. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as an effect button 132.

The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. The payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 110 to 112. ..

More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be pressed. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Further, illuminants 137a, 138a, 139a are provided inside each stop button 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the illuminants 137a, 138a, 139a are turned on. In addition to notifying the player, it may be turned on when various notifications to be described later are performed.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation may be referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation may be referred to as a third stop reel.

Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 as a stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 is called "forward push operation order". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push".

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can grasp that the high navigation state is in the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The upper lamp 142 provided on the upper part of the front door 102 and the side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game, and when various notifications described later are performed. May be turned on.

An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) is in front of the slot machine 100 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding a stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139), and will be described later. May be displayed when performing various notifications.

It should be noted that the device may be configured to be capable of displaying various production images and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, or a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The notification lamp 123 and the high navigation state lamp 190 are designed to notify predetermined information by causing the lamps to emit light, but the notification mode is not limited to the light emission of the lamp. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a part of the area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a slot machine having a full liquid crystal display, an area near reels 110 to 112 may be used). Hereinafter, when it is described as lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high navigation state lamp 190, it is intended to include notification by another effect device (for example, a display device or the like) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 90 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 in a state where the front door 102 is opened. The main body 101 is a box body that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that houses the main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided at the upper part of the back plate 242, and the main control board storage case 210 Three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below. The side plate 260 on the left side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, the side plate 260 on the left side, houses the first sub control board that houses the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit. A case 220 is arranged. Further, an external centralized terminal plate 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals collected in a bucket) is arranged on the bottom plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power supply switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate in the closed state.

The power supply device 252 converts an AC power supply supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each into a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, and the like, which will be described later. It supplies to the control unit and each device. Further, a storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off is provided. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting the power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected to the power cord 265 extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and the effect device 160 and the effect control board (illustrated) for controlling the effect device 160 are on the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 157. Omitted), the upper speaker 272 is provided. At the lower part of the liquid crystal display device 157, a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops an illegal medal or the like onto the medal tray 161 are provided. There is. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 91. The figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of an internal lottery for a winning combination, and a reel stop. ROM 306 for storing positions, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 every interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor or the like and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 starts when the power is turned on and the random number value generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main process of the main control unit described later). To start).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor to be paid out from the medal payout device 180, index sensor of reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number value generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register storing the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 sensor are installed in the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect the input operation of the case. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, L Become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. Drive circuit 326 to drive the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the display 126, the payout number display 127, and the high navigation status lamp 190) is provided.

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted in an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output. Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 has a voltage value of the power supply set to a predetermined value (this implementation). In the embodiment, when the voltage is less than 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. is doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stores a ROM 406 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various indicators, and the like. It is provided.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and the speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via the output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is provided with various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input / output interface. 123 etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and bases the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Information display / summary during switching display>
Next, the outline of the information display during the switching display will be described.

The game console according to the present embodiment (in this example, the slot machine or the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 89) is provided with a display means capable of displaying the first display or the second display, and the display means has a certain effect. There is a case where the switching display is displayed before the display is displayed (first case), and the first display and the second display are displays included in the certain effect display, and the first display is included in the certain effect display. In the case of, the first display is configured to start the display during the display of the switching display.

Here, the "display means" according to the present invention is a means capable of displaying the first display or the second display, and corresponds to, for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 89.

Further, the "first display" and the "second display" according to the present invention are displays included in a certain effect display, for example, a certain effect display is an AT effect display (executed during an AT game). In the case of the effect display), the number of remaining AT games related to this AT effect display is displayed, the number of AT acquired numbers indicating the number of acquired game media in the AT game is displayed, and the number of stored game media in the AT game is displayed. The display of (number of credits), the display of the number of AT initial games, the display of the number of AT sets, the display of the addictive rotation speed at normal times, and the like correspond to the first display or the second display.

In addition, when a certain effect display is a bonus effect display (effect display executed during the bonus game), the display of the number of remaining bonus games related to this bonus effect display and the number of game media acquired in the bonus game are displayed. The display of the number of bonus acquisitions and the display of the number of stored game media (number of credits) in the bonus game correspond to the first display or the second display. The combination of the first display and the second display described above is not particularly limited.

It should be noted that the first display and the second display are displays related to game information and include numerical information, that is, displays related to game information that is important for the player in the progress of the game. Is preferable.

Further, the "switching display" according to the present invention is a display that may be displayed before a certain effect display is displayed. For example, an AT winning notification suggesting a winning of an AT game and an AT game start time. The switching display displayed between the AT start effect (certain effect display) and the switching display, inserted image, etc. temporarily displayed between the AT start effect (certain effect display) and a certain effect display executed in one or more games are applicable. do. Further, the switching display is not limited to the case where a certain display is erased and a new switching display is displayed. For example, when the switching display is displayed overlapping with a certain display or when the switching display is displayed with a certain display layer. It also includes the case of switching the layer of the switching display.

<Information display during switching display / Example 1>
Next, the first embodiment of the information display during the switching display will be described with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an example of the switching display performed at the start of AT in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 92A is a state in which the AT winning notification is started using the liquid crystal display device 157.

In this example, the AT winning notification is started when the start of the AT game is confirmed. The mode of the AT winning notification is not particularly limited, but in this example, three images imitating the blue 7 symbols applied to the reels 110 to 112 are displayed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 92 (b) to (e) are states in which the switching display is executed before the AT effect display (certain effect display) shown in FIG. 92 (f) is displayed.

In this example, the switching display has four types of display: the first switching display (1), the first switching display (2), the second switching display (1), and the second switching display (2). It is composed of, and is displayed in this order before a certain effect display is displayed. The number of switching displays is not limited to this example, and for example, only the second switching display (2) of the four types of displays may be displayed, or switching between the four types of displays may be performed. A display other than the display may be inserted.

In the switching display of this example, as the first switching display (1), as shown in the figure (b), an image in which the character of the palace holds the sword is displayed, and as the subsequent first switching display (2). As shown in the figure (c), an image of the character of the palace swinging his sword is displayed.

On the other hand, in the subsequent second switching display (1) and (2), as shown in the figures (d) and (e), a display (whiteout) in which the display area is a single color (single color) is displayed. In this example, the number of color types displayed in the second switching display (1 in this example) is smaller than the number of color types displayed in the first switching display. is doing.

According to this example, since the number of color types displayed in the second switching display is smaller than the number of color types displayed in the first switching display, it is displayed during the second switching display. By making the first display (in this example, the display of the number of remaining AT games) conspicuous, the player can be surely notified of the first display, which is important information, and the second display. By making the first switching display stand out more than the switching display, the player can pay attention to the display means before the second switching display is displayed.

The mode of the first switching display and the second switching display is not particularly limited. For example, the first switching display is wipe A, the second switching display is wipe B, and wipe B is the color. It may be configured so that the number of types is reduced. Further, the number of color types displayed in the display area around the first display in the second switching display is larger than the number of color types displayed in the corresponding display area in the first switching display. It may be configured to be less.

Further, in this example, as shown in the figure (e), the display of the AT remaining game number display (first display) RD is started during the display of the second switching display (2). This AT remaining game number display (first display) RD is a display corresponding to the AT effect display (certain effect display) shown in FIG. 3F, and in this example, the number of AT remaining games in the AT game is the display. It is displayed including the character string of "remaining 29G" suggesting that it is 29.

The state shown in FIG. 92 (f) following is a state in which the display of the AT effect display (a certain effect display) is started following the second switching display (2) in the figure (e).

In this example, the AT effect display (a certain effect display) is started with the start of the AT game as an opportunity.

In the AT effect display (certain effect display) of this example, the AT remaining game number display (first display) RD, which started to be displayed in the second switching display (2), is continuously displayed and the AT is displayed. The display of the AT acquisition number display (second display) GD indicating the number of medals acquired in the game and the display of the stored number of medals in the AT game (second display) CD have started.

According to this example, the first display (in this example, the AT remaining game number display RD) continues to be displayed even while a certain effect display is being displayed, and the second display (in this example, the AT acquisition number display GD) is displayed. , The number of stored cards (number of credits) display CD) starts to be displayed while a certain effect display is being displayed. Therefore, by starting the display of the first display before the second display, the player is first displayed. You can pay attention to the display of.

Also, after the first switching display is displayed, the second switching display is displayed and a certain effect display is displayed, and the first display is started while the second switching display is being displayed. By changing the switching display to a two-stage display, the player can pay attention to the display means before the second switching display is displayed, and the display is started during the second switching display. By making the display (in this example, the display of the number of remaining AT games) conspicuous, it is possible to surely inform the player of the first display, which is important information.

In this example, in the case of the start of the AT game, the switching display is performed before a certain effect display is displayed, and the first display corresponding to the certain effect display is started during the switching display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a scene is changed or a scene is switched during a normal game, a switching display is performed before a new scene or scene is displayed, and the switching display is in progress. The first display corresponding to a new scene or scene may be started.

If the game console is a pachinko machine, switching display is performed before a certain effect display (special effect, etc.) is displayed, triggered by the occurrence of super reach, etc., and the certain effect display is displayed during the switch display. The first display corresponding to may be started.

Further, all or a plurality of the first switching display, the second switching display, and a certain effect display may be executed during the period of one game, and the display may be performed over a plurality of games. Not limited to.

<Information display during switching display / Example 2>
Next, the second embodiment of the information display during the switching display will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an example of information display during switching display performed during an AT game in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 93A is a state in which the AT effect display (a certain effect display) is started by using the liquid crystal display device 157.

In the AT effect display (a certain effect display) of this example, the AT remaining game number display RD is displayed, the AT acquisition number display GD indicating the number of medals acquired in the AT game, and the medal storage number display CD in the AT game. , The operation navigation suggesting the pressing order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 93 (b) that follows is a state in which the button effect is started during the AT effect display (certain effect display).

In the button effect of this example, the button image BD that prompts the pressing operation of the effect button 132 triggered by the third stop operation in a certain game (in this example, the character "press" is displayed on the image imitating the appearance of the effect button 132. The production is performed including the display of the image).

In the subsequent states shown in FIGS. 93 (c) to (e), the AT effect display (certain effect display) is difficult to visually recognize because the effect button 132 is pressed (a certain condition is satisfied). After that, the switching display is displayed.

In this example, the switching display is composed of three types of displays: the first switching display (display that also serves as a button response effect), the second switching display (1), and the second switching display (2). The display is performed in this order before a certain effect display is displayed.

In the switching display of this example, the button response effect shown in FIG. 3C is displayed as the first switching display. In the button response effect of this example, an effect including a display for notifying the number of AT additional games given to the player (in this example, a display including the character string of "+ 100G") triggered by the pressing operation of the effect button 132 is performed. Is going. Further, in this example, the AT effect display (certain effect display) is temporarily difficult to see (invisible) by performing the button response effect in all the display areas of the liquid crystal display device 157.

On the other hand, in the subsequent second switching display (1) and (2), as shown in the figures (d) and (e), a display (whiteout) in which the display area is a single color (single color) is displayed. In this example, the number of color types displayed in the second switching display (1 in this example) is smaller than the number of color types displayed in the first switching display. is doing. Further, in this example, the AT effect display (certain effect display) is temporarily difficult to see (invisible) by performing the whiteout display in all the display areas of the liquid crystal display device 157.

According to this example, since the number of color types displayed in the second switching display is smaller than the number of color types displayed in the first switching display, it is displayed during the second switching display. By making the first display (in this example, the display of the number of remaining AT games) conspicuous, the player can be surely notified of the first display, which is important information, and the second display. By making the first switching display stand out more than the switching display, the player can pay attention to the display means before the second switching display is displayed.

Further, in this example, as shown in the figure (e), the display of the AT remaining game number display (first display) RD is started during the display of the second switching display (2). This AT remaining game number display (first display) RD is a display corresponding to the AT effect display (certain effect display) shown in the figure (f), and in this example, an AT of 100 G is added to the button response effect. The display includes the character string "remaining 129G", which suggests that the number of AT remaining games has increased from 29 to 129.

The state shown in FIG. 93 (f) that follows is a state in which the display of the AT effect display (certain effect display) is restarted.

In this example, since the display of the second switching display (2) shown in the figure (e) is completed, the AT effect display (a certain effect display) that is temporarily difficult to see due to the switching display is displayed. It has resumed and the display is visible.

In the AT effect display (certain effect display) after restarting, the display of the number of remaining AT games after the addition of the number of AT added games (first display) RD, which started the display in the second switching display (2), is displayed. Is continuously displayed, and the AT acquisition number display (second display) GD showing the number of medals acquired in the AT game after the addition of the medals acquired in the game, and the storage number display of the medals in the AT game (second display). Second display) The CD is restarting.

<Information display / summary during switching display>
As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 89) according to the present embodiment has the first display (for example, the AT shown in FIGS. 92 (e) and 93 (e)). A gaming table provided with a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) capable of displaying the remaining game number display RD), and a switching display (for example, FIG. 92) before a certain effect display is displayed on the display means. There is a case (hereinafter referred to as "first case") in which (b) to the same figure (e) and the switching display shown in FIGS. 93 (c) to the same figure (e) are displayed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), and the first display is described above. Is a display included in the certain effect display, and in the first case, the first display is a gaming table characterized in that the display is started during the display of the switching display. ..

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, by making the first display, which is started to be displayed, conspicuous during the switching display, it is possible to surely inform the player of the first display, which is important information.

Further, the switching display is a first switching display (for example, the first switching display shown in FIGS. 92 (b) to (c)) and a second switching display different from the first switching display. (For example, the second switching display shown in FIGS. 92 (d) to 92 (e)) is included, and in the first case, the second switching display is displayed after the first switching display is displayed. Is displayed and the certain effect display is displayed, and in the first case, the first display may be started during the display of the second switching display.

With such a configuration, by changing the switching display to a two-stage display, the player can pay attention to the display means before the second switching display is displayed, and during the second switching display, the player can pay attention to the display means. By making the first display at which the display starts stand out, it is possible to surely inform the player of the first display, which is important information.

Further, the number of color types displayed in the second switching display may be smaller than the number of color types displayed in the first switching display. Further, the second switching display may be a single color (for example, white only, black only) display.

With such a configuration, by making the first display, which is started to be displayed during the second switching display, conspicuous, the player can be surely notified of the first display, which is important information. In addition, by making the first switching display stand out more than the second switching display, the player can pay attention to the display means before the second switching display is displayed.

Further, the display means can display the AT acquisition number display GD and the medal storage number display CD shown in the second display (for example, FIG. 92f), and the second display is the certain effect display. In the first case, the first display (for example, the AT remaining game number display RD shown in FIG. 92 (e)) continues to be displayed even during the display of the certain effect display. The second display may be started during the display of the certain effect display.

With such a configuration, the first display continues to be displayed even while a certain effect display is being displayed, and the second display is started while the certain effect display is being displayed, so that the second display is displayed. By starting the display of the first display first, the player can pay attention to the first display.

Further, in the first case, the first display continues to be displayed even during the display of the certain effect display, and the second display may be other than the display of the certain effect display. The display may start.

Further, the first display and the second display are displays related to game information (for example, display of the number of remaining AT games, display of the number of AT acquisitions indicating the number of acquisitions of the game medium in the AT game, display of the number of AT acquisitions, and the game medium in the AT game. (Display of the number of stored cards (number of credits), display of the number of AT initial games, display of the number of AT sets), and is a display including number information, and the first display and the second display are different. It may be a display related to game information.

With such a configuration, by making the information important to the player stand out, the important information can be surely notified to the player, and the player is not disadvantaged.

Further, in the first case, it may occur in connection with the start of a certain game state (for example, AT game, button response effect, bonus, super reach).

With such a configuration, the player can grasp the timing at which the first display is started, and the player can be surely notified of the first display, which is important information.

Further, in the first case, when a certain condition is satisfied while the certain effect display is displayed, the certain effect display is once difficult to see (for example, the certain effect display disappears). A part of a certain effect display is covered by a movable body arranged in front of the display means, in which another display overlaps with a part of a certain effect display), and the switching display is displayed. After that, the certain effect display may become visible.

With such a configuration, the player can grasp the timing at which the first display is started, and the player can be surely notified of the first display, which is important information.

<Information display / summary after switching display ends>
Next, the outline of the information display after the switching display is completed will be described.

The game console according to the present embodiment (in this example, the slot machine or the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 89) is provided with a display means capable of displaying the first display, the second display, or the third display. There is a case (first case) in which a switching display is displayed before a certain effect display is displayed on the display means, and the first display, the second display, and the third display are It is a display corresponding to the certain effect display, and in the first case, the second display becomes visible when the certain effect display is displayed after the display of the switching display is finished. It is configured as follows.

Here, the "display means" according to the present invention is a means capable of displaying the first display, the second display, or the third display, for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 89 and the like. Applies to.

Further, the "first display", "second display", and "third display" according to the present invention are displays corresponding to a certain effect display, for example, a certain effect display. In the case of the AT effect display (effect display executed during the AT game), the display of the number of remaining AT games corresponding to (related to) this AT effect display and the number of AT acquisitions indicating the number of game media acquired in the AT game. The display of, the display of the number of stored game media (number of credits) in AT games, the display of the number of AT initial games, the display of the number of AT sets, the display of the addictive rotation speed at normal times, etc. are the first. Corresponds to the display, the second display, or the third display.

In addition, when a certain effect display is a bonus effect display (effect display executed during the bonus game), the display of the number of remaining bonus games corresponding to (related to) this bonus effect display and the game medium in the bonus game The display of the number of bonus acquisitions indicating the number of acquisitions, the display of the number of stored game media (number of credits) in the bonus game, and the like correspond to the first display, the second display, or the third display. The combination of the first display, the second display, and the third display described above is not particularly limited.

The second display and the third display are displays related to game information and include numerical information, that is, displays related to game information that is important for the player in the progress of the game. Is preferable. Further, the first display is a display related to game information, and it is preferable that the display is started during the display of the switching display and is continued even during the display of the certain effect display.

Further, the "switching display" according to the present invention is a display that may be displayed before a certain effect display is displayed. For example, an AT winning notification suggesting a winning of an AT game and an AT game start time. The switching display displayed between the AT start effect (certain effect display) and the switching display, inserted image, etc. temporarily displayed between the AT start effect (certain effect display) and a certain effect display executed in one or more games are applicable. do. Further, the switching display is not limited to the case where a certain display is erased and a new switching display is displayed. For example, when the switching display is displayed overlapping with a certain display, or when a certain display layer is displayed. It also includes the case of switching the layer of the switching display.

<Information display after switching display / Example>
Next, an example of information display after the end of switching display will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an example of information display after the end of switching display performed during the AT game in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 94 (a) is a state in which the AT effect display (certain effect display) is started using the liquid crystal display device 157.

In the AT effect display (a certain effect display) of this example, the AT remaining game number display RD is displayed, the AT acquisition number display GD indicating the number of medals acquired in the AT game, and the medal storage number display CD in the AT game. , The operation navigation suggesting the pressing order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 94 (b) that follows is a state in which the button effect is started during the AT effect display (certain effect display).

In the button effect of this example, the button image BD that prompts the pressing operation of the effect button 132 triggered by the third stop operation in a certain game (in this example, the character "press" is displayed on the image imitating the appearance of the effect button 132. The production is performed including the display of the image).
The state shown in FIG. 94 (c) that follows is a state in which the button response effect is started.

In the button response effect of this example, an effect including a display for notifying the number of AT additional games given to the player (in this example, a display including the character string of "+ 100G") triggered by the pressing operation of the effect button 132 is performed. Is going.

In the state shown in FIG. 94 (d), since the effect button 132 is pressed (a certain condition is satisfied), the AT effect display (a certain effect display) becomes difficult to visually recognize in the figure (c). After that, the switching display is displayed.

In the switching display of this example, a display (whiteout) in which the display area is a single color (single color) is displayed, and in this example, it is second than the number of color types displayed in the first switching display. It is configured so that the number of color types displayed in the switching display of is smaller.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 3D, the display of the AT remaining game number display (first display) RD is started during the display of the switching display. This AT remaining game number display (first display) RD is a display corresponding to the AT effect display (certain effect display) shown in the figure (e), and in this example, an AT of 100 G is added to the button response effect. Is displayed, which includes the character string "remaining 129G", which suggests that the number of AT remaining games has increased from 29 to 129.

The state shown in FIG. 94 (e) that follows is a state in which the display of the AT effect display (a certain effect display) is restarted.

In this example, since the display of the switching display shown in the figure (d) has ended, the display of the AT effect display (a certain effect display) that is temporarily difficult to see due to the button response effect or the switch display is restarted. , The display is visible.

In the AT effect display (certain effect display) after restarting, the display of the AT remaining game number display (first display) RD after the addition of the number of AT additional games, which started the display in the switching display, is continuously displayed. At the same time, the AT acquisition number display (second display) GD indicating the number of medals acquired in the AT game after the addition of the medals acquired in the game is restarted so that the GD can be visually recognized.

According to this example, it is important information by making the second display (in this example, the AT acquisition number display GD) visible after the player is focused on the display means by the switching display. Can be reliably notified to the player.

The state shown in FIG. 94 (f) that follows is a state in which the display of the stored number of medals (third display) CD in the AT game is resumed.

In the AT effect display (certain effect display) of this example, the AT remaining game number display (first display) RD after the addition of the AT additional games number and the AT acquisition number indicating the number of medals acquired in the AT game are displayed. The display (second display) GD is continuously displayed, and the display of the number of medals stored in the AT game (third display) CD is resumed so that it can be visually recognized.

According to this example, by displaying the second display (in this example, the AT acquisition number display GD) and the third display (in this example, the medal storage number display CD) in order, each display is displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from overlooking it, and it is possible to surely inform the player of the display regarding important information.

In this example, the display of the AT acquisition number display (second display) is restarted after the switching display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, before the switching display, the AT acquisition number display is resumed. The display (second display) may not be displayed, and the display of the number of AT acquired sheets (second display) may be newly started after the switching display.

<Information display / summary after switching display>
As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 89) according to the present embodiment has a second display (for example, the AT acquisition number display GD shown in FIG. 94 (e)). A gaming table provided with a display means capable of displaying (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and a switching display (for example, a switching display shown in FIG. 94 (d)) is displayed before a certain effect display is displayed on the display means. ) Is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the second display is a display included in the certain effect display, and in the first case, the second display. The display is a gaming table characterized in that it becomes visible (or is started to be displayed) when the display of the switching display is finished and the certain effect display is displayed.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the player is made to be able to visually recognize the second display after paying attention to the display means by the switching display, so that the player can see the second display, which is important information. You can be sure to let us know.

Further, the display means can display a third display (for example, a CD for displaying the number of stored medals in the AT game shown in FIG. 94 (f)), and the third display may be used for the certain effect display. It is a corresponding display, and in the first case, the third display starts the display after the second display becomes visible (or after the display is started). You may.

With such a configuration, by displaying the second display and the third display in order, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking each display, and the player can display important information. You can be sure to let us know.

Further, the display means can display the first display, and the first display (for example, the AT remaining game number display RD shown in FIGS. 94 (d) to 94 (e)) is the above. It is a display included in the effect display, the first display is a display related to game information, and the first display starts to be displayed during the display of the switching display, and is displaying the certain effect display. May continue to be displayed.

With such a configuration, the first display continues to be displayed even during the display of a certain effect display, so that the player can pay attention to the first display.

Further, in the first case, the first display continues to be displayed even during the display of the certain effect display, and the second display may be other than the display of the certain effect display. The display may start.

Further, the second display and the third display are displays related to game information (for example, display of the number of remaining AT games, display of the number of AT acquisitions indicating the number of acquisitions of the game medium in the AT game, display of the number of AT acquisitions, and the game medium in the AT game. (Display of the number of stored cards (number of credits), display of the number of AT initial games, display of the number of AT sets), and is a display including number information, and the second display and the third display are different. It may be a display related to game information.

With such a configuration, by making the information important to the player stand out, the important information can be surely notified to the player, and the player is not disadvantaged.

Further, in the first case, it may occur during the execution of a certain game state (for example, AT game, button response effect, bonus, super reach).

With such a configuration, the player can grasp the timing at which the second display is started, and the player can be surely notified of the second display, which is important information.

Further, in the first case, when a certain condition is satisfied while the certain effect display is displayed, the certain effect display is once difficult to see (for example, the certain effect display disappears). A part of a certain effect display is covered by a movable body arranged in front of the display means, in which another display overlaps with a part of a certain effect display), and the switching display is displayed. After that, the certain effect display may become visible.

With such a configuration, the player can grasp the timing at which the second display is started, and the player can be surely notified of the second display, which is important information.

<Two-step error notification / overview>
Next, the outline of the two-step error notification will be described.

The game console according to the present embodiment (in this example, the slot machine or the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 89) is provided with a notification means capable of executing error notification regarding an error, and when a certain error occurs, the certain error occurs. There is a period during which the error cannot be canceled (first period) and a period during which the certain error can be canceled (second period).

Here, as errors that can occur in the game console according to the present embodiment, there are door open error, hopper empty error, medal insertion abnormality 1 to 4, medal payout abnormality 1 to 3, overflow abnormality, RAM failure, winning abnormality, and the like. Can be mentioned.

The door open error is an error that notifies the opening of the door of the game table, occurs when the front door 102 is opened, and is resolved when the front door 102 is closed. The hopper empty error is a payout error related to the payout of medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper housed inside the main body 101 becomes less than the specified number, and more than the specified number of medals are sent to the hopper. It will be solved by replenishing.

The medal insertion abnormality 1 occurs when the inserted medals are retained, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. The medal insertion abnormality 2 occurs when the number of medals inserted is equal to or greater than the specified number, and is resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM.

The medal insertion abnormality 3 occurs when either the insertion sensor 1 or the insertion sensor 2 is turned on except during the medal insertion processing, and the medal insertion abnormality 4 occurs when the inserted medals are inserted into the insertion sensor 1 and the insertion sensor 2. It occurs when the error is not passed normally, and it is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error.

The medal payout abnormality 1 occurs when the medal is not paid out for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven, and the medal payout abnormality 2 occurs when the medal stays while the medal payout device is driven, and the medal payout abnormality 3 occurs. Occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or the payout sensor 2 is turned on except during the medal payout process, and both of them are resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. ..

The overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage is turned on, and is resolved when the error release switch operation is accepted after removing the cause of the error. The RAM failure occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted. The winning abnormality occurs when a winning symbol different from the winning symbol confirmed by the internal lottery is won after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted.

The game console according to the present invention is not limited to slot machines, and can also be applied to pachinko machines. Errors that can occur in the pachinko machine include, for example, a bottom pan full tank error, a payout device error, a payout excess error, an illegal payout error, a main control unit communication error, a magnetic error, a magnetic field error, a frame opening error, and a RAM clear error. , Impact sensor error, etc., and these errors are also resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after the cause of the error is removed.

Further, the "notification means" according to the present invention is a means capable of executing error notification regarding an error, and for example, a display means capable of displaying an error notification (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 95). , Sound output means capable of error notification by sound (speaker 272, 277 shown in FIG. 91 in this example), and light emitting means capable of error notification by light emission (upper lamp shown in FIG. 95 in this example). 142, side lamp 144, each light emitter 137a, 138a, 139a of stop buttons 137 to 139, backlight of each reel 110 to 112), and a movable means capable of error notification by the movement of the movable body (in this example, The reels 110 to 112) shown in FIG. 95 are applicable.

Further, the "first period" according to the present invention is a period during which a certain error cannot be canceled. For example, a period during reel rotation, a gaming period during which a game can be played, or a game progressing. When a certain error occurs in the first period, the first error notification can be executed in relation to the certain error.

Further, the "second period" according to the present invention is a period in which a certain error can be canceled, for example, a period in which the reel is stopped, a non-gaming period in which the game is impossible, or a game. When a certain error occurs in the second period, such as a period of suspension, the second error notification can be executed in relation to the certain error.

<Two-step error notification / notification means>
Next, prior to the explanation of the two-step error notification, the notification means used for the error notification will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example of the mode of the notification means in a normal game in chronological order, and each diagram is a front view schematically showing the appearance of the slot machine 100.

The slot machine 100 includes a liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157, a payout number display device 127, and the like described with reference to FIG. 89 as display means capable of notifying an error by display. Details will be described later, but in this example, when an error occurs, information about the error is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and an error code is displayed on the payout number display 127.

Further, the slot machine 100 includes speakers 272, 277 and the like described with reference to FIG. 91 as sound output means capable of sound error notification. Details will be described later, but in this example, when an error occurs, various voices for notifying the error are output from the speakers 272 and 277.

Further, the slot machine 100 has light emitting bodies 137a and 138a of the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 described with reference to FIG. 89 as light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light. , 139a, and the backlights of the reels 110 to 112 are provided. Details will be described later, but in this example, when an error occurs, the light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a of the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 are lit in red, and each of them is in the stopped state. Turn off the backlight of reels 110 to 112.

The mode of notification of error notification (color, means, etc.) is not limited to this example, and for example, a lamp or LED may be lit in a color other than red, and may be used as a light emitting means, a sound output means, or a display means. Alternatively (or in addition), the error notification may be performed by, for example, the movement of a movable means such as the shutter 163 or the reels 110 to 112.

The state shown in FIG. 95 (a) is a state after the previous game is completed and before the medal of the next game is bet.

In the same state, until the next game medal is bet, for example, a normal effect is performed using the liquid crystal display device 157, and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 emit, for example, yellow light while paying out. The display of the number display 127 is erased, and the light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are turned off.

The following state shown in FIG. 95 (b) is a state in which the medal of the next game is bet and the start lever 135 is pressed.

In the same state, when the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started, and the normal production is continued using the liquid crystal display device 157, from the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144. , Light is emitted by the light emission pattern for production. Further, since the reels 110 to 112 can be stopped, for example, orange light is emitted from the light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed. Notify that it is possible.
The state shown in FIG. 95 (c) that follows is a state in which the first stop operation has been performed.

In the same state, when the operation of pressing the left stop button 137 is accepted as the first stop operation, the rotation of the left reel 110 is stopped, and for example, blue light is emitted from the light emitter 137a of the stop button 137. Notifies that the pressing operation of the stop button 137 has been accepted.

Further, when the operation of pressing the left stop button 137 is accepted as the first stop operation, the effect sound (in this example, the voice "chance") is output from the speakers 272 and 277. The normal effect of the liquid crystal display device 157 and the light emission of the effect emission pattern by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 continue.
The state shown in FIG. 95 (d) that follows is a state in which the third stop operation has been performed.

In the same state, when the third stop operation is accepted, the rotation of all the reels 110 to 112 is stopped, and blue light is emitted from the light emitters 137a, 138a, 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139, for example. It emits light and notifies that the pressing operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 has been accepted. Further, when the third stop operation is accepted, for example, green light is emitted from the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144.
The state shown in FIG. 95 (e) that follows is a state in which medals have been paid out.

In the same state, when the medal is paid out, for example, yellow light is emitted from the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144, and a number indicating the number of payouts is displayed on the payout number display 127.

In this example, the period from the acceptance of the third stop operation shown in FIG. 3D to the acceptance of the pressing operation of the start lever 135 shown in FIG. The period from the acceptance of the pressing operation of the start lever 135 shown in FIG. 3B to the acceptance of the third stop operation shown in FIG. 3D is the period during reel rotation.

<Two-step error notification / Example 1>
Next, the first embodiment of the two-step error notification will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of the mode of the notification means in the two-stage error notification 1 in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 96A is a state in which the first stop operation is performed in a certain game.

In the same state, when the operation of pressing the left stop button 137 is accepted as the first stop operation, the rotation of the left reel 110 is stopped, and for example, blue light is emitted from the light emitter 137a of the stop button 137. Notifies that the pressing operation of the stop button 137 has been accepted.

Further, although not shown, the speaker 272, 277 outputs a production sound (for example, a voice of "chance") when the operation of pressing the left stop button 137 is accepted as the first stop operation. The normal effect of the liquid crystal display device 157 and the light emission of the effect emission pattern by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 continue the state before the first stop operation.

The state shown in FIG. 96 (b) that follows is a state in which a certain time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the selector error (a certain error) occurred. The selector error (certain error) in this example is an error that occurs when, for example, a fraudster (so-called Goto teacher) illegally opens the front door 102 and malfunctions the internal medal selector. be.

Since the same state is a period during reel rotation (first period in which a certain error cannot be canceled), the liquid crystal display device 157 (first effect means) executes the first error notification. On the other hand, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 (second effect means) continue to emit the light of the effect emission pattern, and the speaker (second effect means) continues to output the effect sound.

In the first error notification by the liquid crystal display device 157 (first effect means) of this example, a display including the character string "An error has occurred. Details will be displayed after the game is completed." Is executed. This first error notification is a notification that can identify that an error has occurred, but is a notification that cannot identify a selector error (a certain error) that is a type of error.

In addition, the first error notification is a notification that calls a clerk at a game store (for example, a display such as "Call a clerk") and a notification that suggests an inspection location (for example, a display such as "Please check the selector"). ) And an error notification that does not include a notification suggesting that the error can be cleared (for example, a display such as "error can be cleared").

Further, in the same state, the error code (E3 in this example) corresponding to the selector error (certain error) is displayed on the payout number display 127 controlled by the main control unit 300.

With such a configuration, the player is less likely to notice the occurrence of the error displayed on the payout number display 127, so that the player can continue the game without being so concerned about the occurrence of the error. In addition to preventing the player's motivation to play, it is possible to notify the clerk of the game store who is accustomed to displaying the game table of the occurrence of an error.

The mode of the first error notification is not limited to this example, and for example, the semi-transparent first error notification overlaps with the production being executed by the liquid crystal display device 157 (first effect means). It may be possible to visually recognize the effect being executed from the front by displaying the display.

With such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize the effect even if an error occurs, the player can continue the game, and the player's motivation to play can be prevented from diminishing.

Further, in this example, even during the execution of the first error notification by the liquid crystal display device 157 (first effect means), for example, orange light is emitted from the light emitters 138a and 139a of the stop buttons 138 and 139, respectively. , Notifies that the stop buttons 138 and 139 can be pressed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to operate the operating means even if an error occurs, the player can continue the game, and the player's motivation to play can be prevented from diminishing.

The state shown in FIG. 96 (c) is a state in which the third stop operation is performed in the game.

Since the same state is a period in which the reel is stopped (a second period in which a certain error can be canceled), the liquid crystal display device 157 (first effect means) has a first mode of error notification. In addition to executing the second error notification by changing the above, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144 (second effect means), and the light emitters 137a, 138a, 139a (second) of the stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively. Also, the error notification is performed by emitting light of the error emission pattern (in this example, emission of red light).

In the second error notification by the liquid crystal display device 157 (first effect means) of this example, "E3: Selector error Please call a staff member near you. The error can be cleared. Check the selector." Executes the display including the character string. This second error notification is a notification that can identify a selector error (certain error).

In addition, the second error notification is a notification that calls a clerk at a game store (in this example, a display such as "Call a staff member") and a notification that suggests an inspection location (in this example, "Please check the selector"). This is an error notification that includes a notification (in this example, a display such as "Error cancellation is possible") that suggests that the error can be cleared.

According to this example, in the first period, although the first error notification can be executed in relation to a certain error, the certain error cannot be canceled, so that the fraudulent act is performed. It is possible to notify the surroundings that (goto, etc.) has occurred, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent activities. Further, in the second period, the second error notification can be executed in relation to a certain error, the certain error can be canceled, and the first error notification has a notification mode. Since they are different, it is possible to take a different response from the first error notification, and it is possible to appropriately respond to the error.

Further, the second error notification is more detailed error notification than the first error notification, and the second error notification is an error notification capable of identifying a certain error. Therefore, it is possible to respond more appropriately to the error.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 3C, an error code (E3 in this example) corresponding to a selector error (certain error) is continuously displayed on the payout number display 127 controlled by the main control unit 300. do. In this example, the error code display is started 5 seconds after the selector error occurs, but the display may be started at the timing when the third stop operation is accepted.

Further, in the same state, the backlights of the reels 110 to 112 in the stopped state are turned off to notify the error regarding the selector error (certain error).

According to this example, when a certain error (selector error in this example) occurs in the second period, the first effect means (liquid crystal display device 157 in this example) provides an mode of error notification. Instead, the second error notification is executed, and the second effect means (in this example, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144) also execute the error notification in relation to the certain error, so that the error of a certain error is executed. It can be surely notified that it is the second period that can be canceled. Further, when a certain error occurs in the first period, the first effect means executes the first error notification, and the second effect means executes before the certain error occurs. Since the effect that has been performed is continued, it is possible to notify that it is the first period in which it is impossible to cancel a certain error, and it is possible to prevent unnecessary error canceling operations.

The timing of the first error notification is not limited to this example, and may be a case where a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of a certain error, or may be simultaneous with the occurrence of a certain error. Further, the timing of the second error notification is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, after the third stop operation, if the medal is paid out, before the payout is started. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent payouts by fraudsters.

Further, when a certain error occurs in the second period, only the second error notification may be executed (the first error notification may not be executed). Further, the combination of the notification means used for the first error notification and the second error notification is not particularly limited, and for example, the combination of the notification means used for the first error notification is the notification means used for the second error notification. It may be different from the combination.

<Two-step error notification / Example 2>
Next, the second embodiment of the two-step error notification will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (d).

FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (d) are diagrams showing an example of the mode of the notification means in the case of executing the third error notification in the two-stage error notification in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 97 (a), 97 (c), and (d) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 96 (a) to 96 (c), the description thereof is omitted. do.

The state shown in FIG. 97 (b) is a state in which one minute has elapsed without performing the stop operation after the first stop operation shown in FIG. 97 (a).

In the same state, the reel rotating state continues for 1 minute, and an error during reel rotation (an error different from a certain error) has occurred. In the example, the notification including the character string "Please stop the reel" is executed.

The state shown in FIG. 97 (c) that follows is a state in which a certain time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the selector error (certain error) occurred.

In the same state, a selector error (certain error) occurs while an error during reel rotation (an error different from a certain error) occurs and a notification prompting a stop operation (third error notification) is being executed. Since it has occurred, the first error notification is executed so that the notification prompting the stop operation (third error notification) becomes difficult to identify (invisible).

On the contrary, when a selector error (certain error) occurs and an error during reel rotation (an error different from a certain error) occurs, a notification prompting a stop operation (third error) It may be configured so as not to perform (notification) (become invisible).
FIG. 97 (g) is a diagram showing a modified example of the first error notification.

In the two-step error notification described with reference to FIG. 96, 5 seconds after the occurrence of the selector error (certain error), the second error including the character string "An error has occurred. Details will be displayed after the game is completed." An example of executing one error notification is shown.

However, the first error notification is not limited to this example, and as shown in FIG. 97 (g), the first error notification including the character string "Please stop the reel", that is, during reel rotation. A first that includes a notification prompting the transition from a period (the first period in which an error cannot be cleared) to a period in which the reels are stopped (a second period in which an error can be cleared). Error notification may be executed.

With such a configuration, by stopping the reel, it is possible to shift to a second period in which a certain error can be cleared. Therefore, in the second period, the error can be dealt with promptly. Can be done. In particular, when an important error occurs as a certain error, if such a first error notification is performed, the error notification is given priority to fraudulent acts and the like, and then appropriate for the error. You can take action.

<Two-step error notification / summary>
As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 89) according to the present embodiment has an error (for example, in the case of a slot machine, a door open error, a hopper empty error, and a medal insertion abnormality). 1-4, medal payout error 1-3, overflow error, RAM failure, winning error, etc. If it is a pachinko machine, the lower saucer full tank error, payout device error, payout excess error, illegal payout error, main control unit communication error, Notification means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 95, speaker 272, 277 shown in FIG. 91) capable of executing error notification regarding magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, frame opening error, RAM clear error, impact sensor error, etc. , Upper lamp 142 shown in FIG. 95, side lamp 144, light emitters 137a, 138a, 139a of stop buttons 137 to 139, backlights of reels 110 to 112, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 95, etc.). In the game table provided, when a certain error (for example, the selector error shown in FIG. 96B) occurs, the certain error cannot be canceled (hereinafter, referred to as "first period"). For example, there is a period during which the reel is stopped) and a period during which the certain error can be cleared (hereinafter referred to as a "second period"; for example, a period during reel rotation), and the error notification is the first. One error notification (for example, the first error notification shown in FIG. 96 (b)) and a second error notification different from the first error notification (for example, the second error shown in FIG. 96 (c)). Notification) is included, and when the certain error occurs in the first period, the first error notification can be executed in relation to the certain error, and the certain error occurs in the second period. When an error occurs, the second error notification can be executed in relation to the certain error, and the first error notification and the second error notification notification mode are different notification modes. It is a game table characterized by that.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, in the first period, although the first error notification can be executed in relation to a certain error, the certain error cannot be canceled, so that it is illegal. It is possible to notify the surroundings that a fraudulent act (goto, etc.) has occurred by the actor, and it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act. Further, in the second period, the second error notification can be executed in relation to a certain error, the certain error can be canceled, and the first error notification has a notification mode. Since they are different, it is possible to take a different response from the first error notification, and it is possible to appropriately respond to the error.

Further, the second error notification has more detailed information about the certain error than the first error notification (for example, a notification including an error name and an error code, a notification for calling a clerk of a game store (for example). , Error notification including "Call a staff member" and voice), error notification including notification suggesting an inspection location (for example, display and voice such as "Please check the selector"), and error cancellation are possible. It may be an error notification including a notification (for example, a display such as "error can be canceled" or a voice) suggesting that the period is long.
With such a configuration, it is possible to respond more appropriately to the error.

Further, the first error notification is a notification that can identify that an error has occurred, but the notification cannot identify the certain error, and the second error notification is the above-mentioned or It may be an error notification capable of identifying an error.
With such a configuration, it is possible to respond more appropriately to the error.

Further, the notification means is a means including a plurality of effect means, and the plurality of effect means are different from the first effect means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157) and the first effect means. 1 The effect means executes the first error notification, the second effect means continues the effect that was executed before the certain error occurred, and the certain error occurs in the second period. When the above occurs, the first effect means changes the mode of error notification to execute the second error notification, and the second effect means also performs error notification in relation to the certain error. It may be something to do.

With such a configuration, when a certain error occurs in the second period, the second effect means also executes the error notification in relation to the certain error, so that the certain error can be canceled. You can be sure that it is the second period. Further, when a certain error occurs in the first period, the first effect means executes the first error notification, and the second effect means executes before the certain error occurs. Since the effect that has been performed is continued, it is possible to notify that it is the first period in which it is impossible to cancel a certain error, and it is possible to prevent unnecessary error canceling operations.

Further, the first period is a period during which the game is in progress (for example, a period during reel rotation), and the second period is a period during which the game is stopped (for example, the reel is stopped). Period).

With such a configuration, during a period in which the game is in progress (for example, a period during reel rotation), the first error notification can be executed in relation to a certain error, but the certain error. Since it is impossible to cancel the error, it is possible to notify the surroundings that a fraudulent act (such as a goto) has occurred by a fraudulent person, and it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act. Further, during the period when the game is stopped (for example, the period when the reel is stopped), a second error notification can be executed in relation to a certain error, and the certain error can be canceled. Moreover, since the notification mode is different from that of the first error notification, it is possible to take a different response from the first error notification, and it is possible to appropriately respond to the error.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 89, the pachinko machine) according to the present embodiment has an error (for example, in the case of a slot machine, a door open error, a hopper empty error, a medal insertion abnormality 1 to 4, etc.). Medal payout error 1-3, overflow error, RAM failure, winning error, etc. If it is a pachinko machine, the bottom tray full tank error, payout device error, payout excess error, illegal payout error, main control unit communication error, magnetic error, In the notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 95, the speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. 91, and FIG. 95) capable of executing error notification related to a magnetic field abnormality error, a frame opening error, a RAM clear error, an impact sensor error, etc. A game table equipped with the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the light emitters 137a, 138a, 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the backlights of the reels 110 to 112, the reels 110 to 112) shown in FIG. The notification means is a means including a plurality of effect means, and when a certain error (for example, the selector error shown in FIG. 96B) occurs, the certain error cannot be canceled. A period (hereinafter referred to as "first period"; for example, a period during which the reel is stopped) and a period during which the certain error can be cleared (hereinafter referred to as "second period"; for example, during reel rotation). There is a period), and the error notification includes a first error notification (for example, the first error notification shown in FIG. 96B) and a second error notification (for example, different from the first error notification). The second error notification shown in FIG. 96 (c) is included, and when the certain error occurs in the first period, the first error notification can be executed in relation to the certain error. Yes, when the certain error occurs in the second period, the second error notification can be executed in relation to the certain error, and the first error notification and the second error The notification mode of the notification is a different notification mode, and the first error notification is an error notification executed by using the first number of effect means among the plurality of effect means, and the second error notification is performed. The notification is an error notification executed by using the second number of effect means among the plurality of effect means, and the game console is characterized in that the first number and the second number are different. Is.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, in the first period, although the first error notification can be executed in relation to a certain error, the certain error cannot be canceled, so that it is illegal. It is possible to notify the surroundings that a fraudulent act (goto, etc.) has occurred by the actor, and it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act. Further, in the second period, the second error notification can be executed in relation to a certain error, the certain error can be canceled, and the first error notification has a notification mode. Since they are different, it is possible to take a different response from the first error notification, and it is possible to appropriately respond to the error. In addition, since the number of effect means used for error notification is different, it is possible to distinguish between the first period and the second period, and it is recognized that the second period in which the error can be cleared has started. This makes it possible to respond quickly to errors and improve the convenience of clerk at a game store.
Further, the second number may be larger than the first number.

With such a configuration, by increasing the number of effect means used in the second error notification rather than the first error notification, the second period in which the error can be cleared has started. It can be recognized reliably and the error can be dealt with promptly.

Further, the plurality of effect means include a first effect means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) and a second effect means (for example, an upper lamp 142, a side lamp 144, and a speaker) different from the first effect means. 272,277, backlights of reels 110 to 112), the first effect means is an effect means used for the first error notification and the second error notification, and the second effect means. May be an effect means used for the second error notification.

With such a configuration, when a certain error occurs in the second period, the second effect means also executes the error notification in relation to the certain error, so that the certain error can be canceled. You can be sure that it is the second period. Further, when a certain error occurs in the first period, the first effect means executes the first error notification, and the second effect means executes before the certain error occurs. Since it is possible to continue the effect that has been performed, it is possible to notify that it is the first period in which it is impossible to cancel a certain error, and it is possible to prevent unnecessary error canceling operations.

Further, the first effect means executes the first error notification in the first notification mode in the first period, and the second error notification in the second notification mode in the second period. The first notification mode and the second notification mode may be different from each other.

With such a configuration, it is possible to distinguish between the first period and the second period, and it is possible to recognize that the second period in which the error can be cleared has started, and the error can be resolved. It is possible to respond quickly and improve the convenience of the clerk of the amusement store.

Further, the first effect means may be a means including a display means, and the second effect means may be a means including a light emitting means and a sound output means.

Further, the first period is a period during which the game is in progress (for example, a period during reel rotation), and the second period is a period during which the game is stopped (for example, the reel is stopped). Period).

With such a configuration, during a period in which the game is in progress (for example, a period during reel rotation), the first error notification can be executed in relation to a certain error, but the certain error. Since it is impossible to cancel the error, it is possible to notify the surroundings that a fraudulent act (such as a goto) has occurred by a fraudulent person, and it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act. Further, during the period when the game is stopped (for example, the period when the reel is stopped), a second error notification can be executed in relation to a certain error, and the certain error can be canceled. Moreover, since the notification mode is different from that of the first error notification, it is possible to take a different response from the first error notification, and it is possible to appropriately respond to the error.

Further, the error notification by the first effect means (for example, display such as "an error has occurred") is switched to the notification by the second effect means (for example, a voice such as "an error has occurred"). May be good.

Further, the first error notification is an error notification that does not include a notification that calls a clerk of a game store (for example, a display or voice such as "Please call a clerk"), and the second error notification is a game store. It may be an error notification including a notification that calls a clerk of.

Further, the first error notification is an error notification that does not include a notification suggesting an inspection location (for example, a display or voice such as "Please check the selector"), and the second error notification is an inspection location. It may be an error notification including a notification suggesting.

Further, the second error notification may be an error notification including a notification suggesting that the error can be canceled (for example, a display such as "error can be canceled" or a voice).

Further, the first error notification is an error notification including a notification suggesting that the error cannot be canceled (for example, a display or voice such as "error cannot be canceled"), and the second error notification is described above. The error notification may be an error notification that does not include a notification suggesting that the error cannot be cleared.

Further, in the first period or the second period, an error different from the certain error may occur, and the other error is a predetermined time (for example, 1) when the reel starts to rotate. It may be an error in which a notification prompting a reel stop operation (for example, a notification prompting a stop operation (third error notification) shown in FIG. 97 (b)) is performed when the minute) has elapsed.

Further, when the certain error occurs and the other error occurs, the third error notification may not be performed (become invisible).

Further, when the other error occurs and the certain error (for example, the selector error (certain error) shown in FIG. 97 (c)) occurs while the third error notification is being executed. The first error notification may be executed so that the third error notification becomes difficult to identify.

In addition, when the timings of a plurality of error notifications overlap, or when the effect and the error notification overlap, at least one of them may be made translucent so that both can be visually recognized, or one of them is overlaid on the other. By wrapping and displaying, both may be visible.

Further, the gaming table according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the "enclosed gaming machine" circulates and uses the gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Further, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, the range of the game may be further expanded by applying the content described in one configuration to the other configurations among the plurality of configurations described in the examples.

[7th Embodiment]

The slot machine of the present embodiment starts rotation when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if they do not match, the game medium is used. It is a game table that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

Next, the slot machine of this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 98 to 110. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 98 to 110 are used only for the description of the present embodiment, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals are shown in the description of the present embodiment. Priority is given to the reference numerals 98 to 110. Moreover, each embodiment of this embodiment and each embodiment of other embodiments can be applied in combination with each other.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 98 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which multiple types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit of this optical sensor is provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line. The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 114.

For example, the notification lamp 123 informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in the internal lottery for the winning combination, which will be described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. It is a lamp to inform you. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment is lit until the bonus game is completed after the bonus notification that the bonus confirmation is announced. The notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted.

The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect, and may be turned on when checking the operation of the effect means described later.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, a maximum of three bets are inserted, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button capable of starting a certain effect when an operation is accepted, and as an operation means for satisfying a pattern transition condition described later. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as an effect button 132.

The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. The payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 110 to 112. ..

More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be pressed. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation may be referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation may be referred to as a third stop reel.

Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 as a stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 is called "forward push operation order". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push".

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can grasp that the high navigation state is in the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The upper lamp 142 provided on the upper part of the front door 102 and the side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game, and the operation check of the effect means described later is performed. It may be turned on even when the above is performed.

An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a sub liquid crystal (liquid crystal display device) 163 composed of two right sub liquid crystal 163a and a left sub liquid crystal 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a main liquid crystal 157 arranged behind the sub liquid crystal. (Liquid crystal display device) is provided.

The right sub liquid crystal 163a and the left sub liquid crystal 163b are individually configured to be slidable in the horizontal direction by a drive device (not shown) equipped with a stepping motor, gears, etc., and the right sub liquid crystal 163a and the left sub liquid crystal 163b are configured. When opened horizontally in front of the main liquid crystal 157, the display screen of the main liquid crystal 157 (not shown) appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the player side).

The main liquid crystal 157 and the sub liquid crystal 163 of the present embodiment also function as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information related to the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139), and the effect means described later. May be displayed while checking the operation of, or while changing or checking the settings.

The main liquid crystal 157 and the sub liquid crystal 163 may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display) or a dot. It may be a matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The notification lamp 123 and the high navigation state lamp 190 are designed to notify predetermined information by causing the lamps to emit light, but the notification mode is not limited to the light emission of the lamp. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a part of the area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a slot machine having a full liquid crystal display, an area near reels 110 to 112 may be used). Hereinafter, when it is described as lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high navigation state lamp 190, it is intended to include notification by another effect device (for example, a display device or the like) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 99 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 in a state where the front door 102 is opened. The main body 101 is a box body that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that houses the main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided at the upper part of the back plate 242, and the main control board storage case 210 Three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below. The side plate 260 on the left side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, the side plate 260 on the left side, houses the first sub control board that houses the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit. A case 220 is arranged. Further, an external centralized terminal plate 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting key that can be switched on and off by a rotation operation is provided. This setting key is an operation means for starting setting change and setting confirmation of the setting value (setting 1 to setting 6 in this example) of the slot machine 100. Further, inside the main body 101, there is provided a setting switch capable of performing an operation for changing the setting (setting value changing operation) and an operation for confirming the setting by a pressing operation. These setting keys and setting switches can be operated by opening the front door 102, and are difficult or impossible to operate in the closed state (the operating means cannot be operated by the player).

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals collected in a bucket) is arranged on the bottom plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power supply switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate in the closed state.

The power supply device 252 converts an AC power supply supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each into a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, and the like, which will be described later. It supplies to the control unit and each device. Further, a storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off is provided. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting the power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected to the power cord 265 extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and the effect device 160 and the effect control board (illustrated) for controlling the effect device 160 are on the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 157. Omitted), the upper speaker 272 is provided. At the lower part of the liquid crystal display device 157, a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops an illegal medal or the like onto the medal tray 161 are provided. There is. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 100. The figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of an internal lottery for a winning combination, and a reel stop. ROM 306 for storing positions, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 every interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor or the like and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 starts when the power is turned on and the random number value generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main process of the main control unit described later). To start).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor to be paid out from the medal payout device 180, index sensor of reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number value generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register storing the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 sensor are installed in the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect the input operation of the case. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, L Become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. Drive circuit 326 to drive the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the display 126, the payout number display 127, and the high navigation status lamp 190) is provided.

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted in an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output. Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 has a voltage value of the power supply set to a predetermined value (this implementation). In the embodiment, when the voltage is less than 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. is doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stores a ROM 406 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various indicators, and the like. It is provided.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and the speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via the output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is provided with various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, reel panel lamp 128, title panel) via an input / output interface. 162 lamp, notification lamp 123, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and bases the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Setting change / setting confirmation mode>
Next, the setting change / setting confirmation mode will be described.

In the game console according to the present embodiment, the setting can be changed or the setting can be confirmed by turning on the power with the front door 102 opened and the setting key provided inside the main body 101 turned on. It is possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode (certain state).

Here, the setting change means to change the setting value of the game console, and in this example, the operation means (in this example, while displaying the setting value (any of the setting 1 to the setting 6) on the payout number display 127. Every time the pressing operation by the setting switch) is detected, the setting value 1 to 6 currently set is incremented and updated by 1, and when the setting value exceeds 6, it is repeatedly executed to return to 1. It is possible to change the set value with.

Further, in the setting change / setting confirmation mode (in a certain state), when the pressing operation by the operating means (start lever 135 in this example) is accepted, the set value is confirmed and the setting change is completed, and the normal game is played. Move to a possible normal game state.

When the operation of the operation means (start lever 135) is executed without pressing the operation means (setting switch), or by repeating the pressing operation of the operation means (setting switch), the set value is set once (for example). , Setting 5 → Setting 5) When the operation of the operating means (start lever 135) is executed, the setting is the same as the setting before the power failure.

Further, the setting confirmation means to confirm the setting value of the game console, and in this example, the setting value (for example, setting 1) or the setting initially set by the pressing operation by the operation means (setting switch). It is possible to confirm the set value by displaying the set value (any of the settings 1 to 6) set by the change on the payout number display 127.

FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a transition example of an inspection pattern in the setting change / setting confirmation mode.

As shown in FIG. 101, in the setting change / setting confirmation mode of this example, it is possible to shift to five types of inspection patterns of patterns 0 to 4, and each pattern 0 to 4 is an operation of the effect means. They are classified according to the pattern (operation mode). Needless to say, the types of inspection patterns are not limited to five.

<Setting change / setting confirmation mode / Sub LCD operation pattern>
Next, the operation pattern of the sub liquid crystal 163 will be described prior to the description of the patterns 0 to 4.

FIG. 103A is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal 163 is moved to the initial position (fully open state).

In this state, the sub liquid crystal 163 is fully opened by moving the right sub liquid crystal 163a and the left sub liquid crystal 163b horizontally to the outer edge of the main liquid crystal 157. All display areas are visible from the front (player side) of the slot machine 100.

FIG. 103 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal 163 is moved to the fully closed state.

In this state, the sub liquid crystal 163 is fully closed by moving the right sub liquid crystal 163a and the left sub liquid crystal 163b inward in the horizontal direction to the center of the main liquid crystal 157. All the display areas of the liquid crystal 157 become invisible from the front (player side) of the slot machine 100.

FIG. 103 (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal 163 is moving to the half-open state.

In this state, the sub liquid crystal 163 is half-opened by moving the right sub liquid crystal 163a and the left sub liquid crystal 163b halfway to the outside (or inside) in the horizontal direction. A part of the display area can be visually recognized from the front (player side) of the slot machine 100.

<Setting change / setting confirmation mode / transition conditions>
Next, the conditions for shifting the pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 102 (a). FIG. 102 (a) is a diagram showing details of the transition conditions of the inspection pattern.

One of the transition conditions, condition 1, is a condition related to the operating means. In this example, the condition 1 is satisfied when the effect button 132 is operated once and then the effect button 132 is pressed and held.

The condition 1 is not limited to this example, and may be a condition that is satisfied when the effect button 132 is operated once or a plurality of times (for example, three times), or the effect button 132 may be pressed. It may be a condition that is satisfied when the effect button 132 is pressed and held, or a condition that is satisfied when the effect button 132 is continuously operated (continuously pressed operation) a certain number of times within a certain time period. It may be a condition relating to the operation means of.

That is, the "operation means" according to the present invention is not limited to the effect button 132, and can be operated by a player, for example, the start lever 135, the stop buttons 137 to 139, the bet buttons 130 to 131, etc. shown in FIG. It may be an operating means, or it may be an operating means that the player cannot operate, such as a setting key arranged inside the housing.

One of the transition conditions, condition 2, is also a condition related to the operating means, and in this example, the condition 2 is satisfied when the effect button 132 is operated twice within 3 seconds. Condition 2 and condition 1 are conditions that involve the operation of the operating means (in this example, the effect button 132), and the operating modes of the operating means are different from each other.

The condition 2 is not limited to this example, and may be a condition that is satisfied when the effect button 132 is operated once or a plurality of times (for example, three times), or the effect button 132 may be pressed. It may be a condition that is satisfied when the effect button 132 is pressed and held, or a condition that is satisfied when the effect button 132 is continuously operated (continuously pressed operation) a certain number of times within a certain time period. It may be a condition related to the operating means of the above, and may not be a condition related to the operating means.

One of the transition conditions, condition 3, is also a condition related to the operating means. In this example, the condition 3 is satisfied when the effect button 132 is operated once within 3 seconds after the effect button 132 is pressed and held. Condition 3 and condition 1 are conditions that involve the operation of the operating means (in this example, the effect button 132), and the operating modes of the operating means are different from each other. Further, the condition 3 and the condition 2 are also conditions that involve the operation of the operating means (in this example, the effect button 132), and the operating modes of the operating means are different from each other.

According to this example, the operation modes of condition 1 and condition 3 (in this example, condition 1 operates the effect button 132 once, then press and hold the effect button 132, and condition 3 press and hold the effect button 132. After that, by operating the effect button 132 once within 3 seconds), it is possible to prevent the pattern from shifting to an unintended pattern due to an operation error of the operation means, and the operation of the effect means can be confirmed. Etc. can be improved in efficiency.

Further, by sharing the operation means of the condition 1 and the condition 3 (in this example, the effect button 132), the operation of the operation means can be simplified and the efficiency of checking the operation of the effect means can be improved. can.

Further, by making the conditions related to the operation means of the condition 1, the condition 2, and the condition 3 different from each other, it is possible to prevent the pattern from being transferred to an unintended pattern due to an operation error of the operation means, and to surely perform the pattern transfer. This makes it possible to improve the efficiency of checking the operation of the effect means.

The condition 3 is not limited to this example, and may be a condition that is satisfied when the effect button 132 is operated once or a plurality of times (for example, three times), or the effect button 132 may be pressed. It may be a condition that is satisfied when the effect button 132 is pressed and held, or a condition that is satisfied when the effect button 132 is continuously operated (continuously pressed operation) a certain number of times within a certain time period. It may be a condition relating to the operation means of.

One of the transition conditions, condition 4, is also a condition related to the operation means, and in this example, the condition 4 is satisfied when the effect button 132 is pressed and held.

The condition 4 is not limited to this example, and may be a condition that is satisfied when the effect button 132 is operated once or a plurality of times (for example, three times), or the effect button 132 may be satisfied. It may be a condition that is satisfied when the long press is completed, or it may be a condition that is satisfied when the effect button 132 is continuously operated (continuously pressed operation) a certain number of times within a certain time. However, it may be a condition related to other operating means.

According to this example, condition 1, condition 2, condition 3, and condition 4 are conditions that involve the operation of the operating means (in this example, the effect button 132), and the operating modes of the operating means are different from each other. Since it is a condition, it is possible to prevent the pattern from shifting to an unintended pattern due to an operation error of the operation means, and it is possible to improve the efficiency of checking the operation of the effect means.

The present invention is not limited to this, and all of the conditions 1 to 4 may be the same condition, or one or a plurality of the conditions 1 to 4 may be different conditions.

Further, the condition 3 and the condition 4 are conditions that involve a series of operations of the operating means, and when the condition 3 is satisfied by a series of operations (for example, long pressing of the operating means), a certain period (for example, the length of the operating means) is satisfied. The effect based on the pattern 3 may be executed in the pressing period), and the condition 4 may be satisfied when the certain period elapses (for example, when the long pressing of the operating means ends).

With such a configuration, the transition from the pattern 3 to the pattern 2 (cycle) can be smoothly performed.

<Setting change / setting confirmation mode / Transition of each pattern 0 to 4 and operation pattern of production means>
Next, the transition of each pattern 0 to 4 and the operation pattern of the effect means in each pattern 0 to 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 101, 102 (b), and 103 to 106. FIG. 102B is a diagram showing details of the operation patterns of the effect means in each of the patterns 0 to 4.

The operation pattern of the effect means in each pattern 0 to 4 is not particularly limited, but in this example, an inspection is performed in which the main liquid crystal 157, the sub liquid crystal 163, the side lamp 144, and the reel panel lamp 128 are operated in a predetermined manner. ..

<Setting change / setting confirmation mode / pattern 0>
Pattern 0 is one of the setting change / setting confirmation modes (certain state), and the setting can be changed or the setting can be confirmed. In the setting change / setting confirmation mode (certain state), it is possible to shift to a state in which an effect based on pattern 0 is executed (hereinafter, referred to as "pattern 0 state" or simply "pattern 0").

When the power is turned on with the setting key turned on, the game console shifts to the setting change / setting confirmation mode (certain state) as shown by the reference numeral (A) in FIG. 101, and the inspection mode is pattern 0. Move to. That is, pattern 0 is an inspection pattern that is initially set when the mode shifts to the setting change / setting confirmation mode.

Further, as shown by the reference numeral (B) in FIG. 101, the power is cut off and restored during the execution of the inspection cycle (in this example, the cycle of repeating pattern 1 → pattern 2 → pattern 4 → pattern 1 → ...). When electricity is generated, the inspection cycle is terminated and pattern 0 is entered.

FIGS. 103 (d) to 103 (f) are diagrams showing operation patterns of the effect means in pattern 0.

In the state of pattern 0 of this example, the sub liquid crystal 163 is moved from the fully closed state shown in FIG. 3E to the fully open state shown in FIG. Hold.

In addition, the characters "setting is being changed" are displayed in the display area of the main liquid crystal 157, and the side lamp 144 (first effect means) is made to emit red light after the power is turned on, and then the initial operation of the sub liquid crystal 163 is completed. If it is (moved to the fully open state), the light emission is stopped. Further, in the state of pattern 0, the reel panel lamp 128 (second effect means) does not emit light.

The "directing means" according to the present invention is not limited to the main liquid crystal 157, the sub liquid crystal 163, the side lamp 144, and the reel panel lamp 128, and for example, the upper lamp 142 shown in FIG. 98, various lamps shown in FIG. 99, and the like. Light emitting means capable of emitting light, movable means such as reels 110 to 113 shown in FIG. 98, and sound output means capable of outputting sound such as speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 99. And so on.

<Setting change / setting confirmation mode / Pattern 1>
Pattern 1 is one of the setting change / setting confirmation modes (certain state), and the setting can be changed or the setting can be confirmed. In the setting change / setting confirmation mode (certain state), it is possible to shift to a state in which the effect based on the pattern 1 is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “pattern 1 state” or simply “pattern 1”).

As shown by the reference numeral (C) in FIG. 101, if the condition (condition 1) relating to the operating means is satisfied in the state of the pattern 0, the pattern 0 can be shifted to the pattern 1. In this example, the effect button 132 is pressed. When the effect button 132 is pressed and held for a long time after the operation once, the condition 1 is satisfied and the pattern 0 is changed to the pattern 1.

Further, as shown by the reference numeral (D) in FIG. 101, if the condition (condition 2) relating to the operating means is satisfied in the state of the pattern 4, the pattern 4 can be shifted to the pattern 1. In this example, the effect button is displayed. When 132 is operated twice within 3 seconds, the condition 2 is satisfied, and the pattern 4 shifts to the pattern 1.

Further, as shown by the reference numeral (E) in FIG. 101, if the condition (condition 4) relating to the operating means is satisfied in the state of the pattern 3, the pattern 3 can be shifted to the pattern 1. In this example, the effect button is displayed. When 132 is pressed and held for a long time, the condition 4 is satisfied, and the pattern 3 shifts to the pattern 1.

FIGS. 103 (g) to 103 (h) are views showing operation patterns of the effect means in pattern 1.

In the state of pattern 1 of this example, the sub liquid crystal 163 is controlled so as to repeat the fully closed state shown in the figure (g) and the fully open state shown in the figure (h), and the display area of the sub liquid crystal 163 is displayed as “ The text "Settings are being changed" is displayed.

Further, in order to display the characters "setting is being changed" in the display area of the main liquid crystal 157, the side lamp 144 and the reel panel lamp 128 (second effect means) are used to indicate that the pattern 1 is in the inspection mode. , Makes it emit light in blue.

In the state where the sub liquid crystal 163 is neither in the fully closed state nor in the fully open state (for example, in the middle of moving from the fully closed state to the fully open state), when the sub liquid crystal 163 shifts from the pattern 1 to another pattern, the sub liquid crystal is displayed. The transition may be performed after moving the 163 to the fully closed state or the fully open state, or the transition may be performed immediately regardless of the state of the sub liquid crystal 163.

<Setting change / setting confirmation mode / pattern 2>
Pattern 2 is one of the setting change / setting confirmation modes (certain state), and the setting can be changed or the setting can be confirmed. In the setting change / setting confirmation mode (certain state), it is possible to shift to a state in which the effect based on the pattern 2 is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “pattern 2 state” or simply “pattern 2”).

As shown by the reference numeral (F) in FIG. 101, if the condition (condition 2) relating to the operating means is satisfied in the state of the pattern 1, the pattern 1 can be shifted to the pattern 2. In this example, the effect button 132 is pressed. When the operation is performed twice within 3 seconds, the condition 2 is satisfied, and the pattern 1 shifts to the pattern 2.

Further, as shown by the reference numeral (G) in FIG. 101, if the condition (condition 4) relating to the operating means is satisfied in the state of the pattern 3, the pattern 3 can be shifted to the pattern 2. In this example, the effect button is displayed. When 132 is pressed and held for a long time, the condition 4 is satisfied, and the pattern 3 shifts to the pattern 2.

According to this example, if the condition (condition 4) relating to the operating means is satisfied in the state of the pattern 3, the pattern 3 can be transferred to the pattern 2, so that the effect is produced at an arbitrary timing based on the operation of the operating means. The means can be shifted from the pattern 3 to the pattern 2, and the convenience of checking the operation of the effect means can be enhanced.

FIGS. 104 (a) to 104 (b) are views showing an operation pattern of the effect means in the pattern 2.

In the state of pattern 2 of this example, the sub liquid crystal 163 is controlled so as to repeat the semi-closed state shown in FIG. 3A and the fully opened state shown in FIG. Display a part of the characters "Settings are being changed".

Further, in order to display the characters "setting is being changed" in the display area of the main liquid crystal 157, the side lamp 144 and the reel panel lamp 128 (second effect means) are used to indicate that the pattern 2 is in the inspection mode. , Makes it emit light in red.

When the sub liquid crystal 163 is in a state where it is neither in the half open state nor in the fully open state (for example, in the middle of moving from the half open state to the fully open state), when the sub liquid crystal 163 shifts from the pattern 2 to another pattern, the sub liquid crystal 163 is used. It may shift after moving to the half-open state or the fully open state, or it may shift immediately regardless of the state of the sub liquid crystal 163.

<Setting change / setting confirmation mode / pattern 3>
Pattern 3 is one of the setting change / setting confirmation modes (certain state), and the setting can be changed or the setting can be confirmed. In the setting change / setting confirmation mode (certain state), it is possible to shift to a state in which an effect based on the pattern 3 is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “pattern 3 state” or simply “pattern 3”).

As shown by the reference numeral (H) in FIG. 101, if the condition (condition 3) relating to the operating means is satisfied in the state of the pattern 1, the pattern 1 can be changed to the pattern 3, and in this example, the effect button 132 is pressed. When the effect button 132 is operated once within 3 seconds after the long press, the condition 3 is satisfied and the pattern 1 is changed to the pattern 3.

According to this example, if the condition (condition 3) relating to the operating means is satisfied in the state of the pattern 1, the pattern 1 can be shifted to the pattern 3, so that the effect is produced at an arbitrary timing based on the operation of the operating means. In addition to being able to shift the means from pattern 1 to pattern 3, at least three types of patterns 1 to 3 can be used as inspection modes for the effect means, which enhances convenience such as checking the operation of the effect means. can.

Further, as shown by the reference numeral (I) in FIG. 101, if the condition (condition 3) relating to the operating means is satisfied in the state of the pattern 2, the pattern 2 can be changed to the pattern 3, and in this example, the effect button. When the effect button 132 is operated once within 3 seconds after pressing and holding the 132, the condition 3 is satisfied and the pattern 2 is changed to the pattern 3.

Further, as shown by the reference numeral (J) in FIG. 101, if the condition (condition 3) relating to the operating means is satisfied in the state of the pattern 4, the pattern 4 can be changed to the pattern 3, and in this example, the effect button. When the effect button 132 is operated once within 3 seconds after pressing and holding the 132, the condition 3 is satisfied and the pattern 4 shifts to the pattern 3.

As described above, the pattern 3 is a pattern that shifts when the condition (condition 3) relating to the operating means is satisfied in the state of the pattern 1, the pattern 2, or the pattern 4, and shifts when the condition 3 is not satisfied. It is a pattern that does not.

Further, in this example, the condition 2 for shifting from the pattern 1 to the pattern 2 (reference numeral (see F)), the condition 2 for transitioning from the pattern 2 to the pattern 4 (see the reference numeral (K)), and the pattern 4 to the pattern 1 The transition condition 2 (see the code (D)) is all the same, and after the condition 1 (see the code (C)) is satisfied, the pattern 1, the pattern 2, and the pattern 4 are changed each time the condition 2 is satisfied. It is possible to shift as a cycle (inspection cycle) for shifting to any one of a plurality of types of patterns including.

According to this example, the pattern transition conditions (condition 2 in this example) within the cycle (in the inspection cycle of pattern 1 → pattern 2 → pattern 4 → pattern 1 → ... In this example) are the same. As a result, the operation of the operating means can be simplified, and the efficiency of checking the operation of the effecting means can be improved.

Further, when the condition 2 is satisfied and the pattern (in this example, pattern 1 → pattern 2 → pattern 4 → pattern 1 → ...) is transitioned as a cycle, the intention is based on the operation of the operating means or the like. Since the effect means can be transferred from the pattern 1 to the pattern 3, it is possible to perform a special inspection of the effect means in the pattern 3, and the pattern 3 is used as a special pattern different from other patterns. Can be made to work.

The pattern in the cycle is updated by lottery or in the background, and when the condition 4 (see the reference numerals (E), (G), and (L)) is satisfied, the updated pattern in the cycle (in this example). , Pattern 1, Pattern 2, or Pattern 4), it is possible to give randomness to the pattern transition and prevent it from becoming a rut such as checking the operation of the effect means. can.

FIGS. 104 (c) to 104 (f) are views showing an operation pattern of the effect means in the pattern 3.

In the state of the pattern 3 of this example, the sub liquid crystal 163 repeats the operations of the pattern 1 and the pattern 2, that is, the fully closed state shown in FIG. While controlling to repeat the half-closed state shown in e) → the fully opened state shown in the figure (f), all or all of the characters "setting is being changed" in the display area of the sub liquid crystal 163 according to patterns 1 and 2. Display a part.

Further, in order to display the characters "setting is being changed" in the display area of the main liquid crystal 157, the side lamp 144 and the reel panel lamp 128 (second effect means) are used to indicate that the pattern 3 is in the inspection mode. , Makes it emit light in green.

When the sub liquid crystal 163 is not in the fully open state, the half open state, or the fully open state (for example, the state in the middle of moving from the half open state to the fully open state), the pattern 3 is changed to another pattern. The sub liquid crystal 163 may be moved to any of the fully open state, the half open state, and the fully open state, and then the transition may be performed, or the sub liquid crystal 163 may be immediately transitioned regardless of the state of the sub liquid crystal 163.

<Setting change / setting confirmation mode / Pattern 4>
Pattern 4 is one of the setting change / setting confirmation modes (certain state), and the setting can be changed or the setting can be confirmed. In the setting change / setting confirmation mode (certain state), it is possible to shift to a state in which an effect based on the pattern 4 is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “pattern 4 state” or simply “pattern 4”).

As shown by the reference numeral (K) in FIG. 101, if the condition (condition 2) relating to the operating means is satisfied in the state of the pattern 2, the pattern 2 can be changed to the pattern 4, and in this example, the effect button 132 is pressed. When the operation is performed twice within 3 seconds, the condition 2 is satisfied, and the pattern 2 is changed to the pattern 4.

As shown by the reference numeral (L) in FIG. 101, if the condition (condition 4) relating to the operating means is satisfied in the state of the pattern 3, the pattern 3 can be changed to the pattern 4, and in this example, the effect button 132 is pressed. When the button is pressed and held for a long time, the condition 4 is satisfied, and the pattern 3 shifts to the pattern 4.

FIGS. 105 (e) to 105 (g) and 106 (a) to (c) are views showing operation patterns of the effect means in pattern 4.

In the state of pattern 4 of this example, the right sub liquid crystal 163a and the left sub liquid crystal 163b are controlled to alternately repeat the fully open state and the fully closed state, and when each moves to the fully closed state, the display area is displayed as " Display a part of the characters "Settings are being changed".

Further, in order to display the characters "setting is being changed" in the display area of the main liquid crystal 157, the side lamp 144 and the reel panel lamp 128 (second effect means) are used to indicate that the pattern 3 is in the inspection mode. , Blue → red → green in that order.

In a state where the right sub liquid crystal 163a or the left sub liquid crystal 163b is neither in the fully closed state nor in the fully open state (for example, in the process of moving from the fully closed state to the fully open state), the pattern 4 shifts to another pattern. In some cases, the right sub liquid crystal 163a or the left sub liquid crystal 163b may be moved to either the fully open state or the fully open state and then moved, or may be transferred regardless of the state of the right sub liquid crystal 163a or the left sub liquid crystal 163b. In addition, it may be migrated immediately.

Further, as described above, in this example, the condition 2 for shifting from the pattern 1 shown in FIGS. 105 (a) and 105 (b) to the pattern 2 shown in FIGS. 105 (c) and 105 (d), from this pattern 2 to the figure. The condition 2 for shifting to the pattern 4 shown in FIGS. 105 (e) to 106 (c) and the condition 2 for shifting from the pattern 4 to the pattern 1 shown in FIGS. 105 (a) and 105 (b) are all the same. , After the condition 1 (see the symbol (C)) is satisfied, every time the condition 2 is satisfied, the cycle shifts to any one of a plurality of types of patterns including the pattern 1, the pattern 2, and the pattern 4 (see the symbol (C)). It can be migrated as an inspection cycle).

The inspection cycle is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a cycle in which pattern 1 and pattern 2 are repeated, or a cycle may be configured by adding other patterns to patterns 1, 2, and 4. ..

According to the setting change / setting confirmation mode of this example, the setting can be changed or the setting can be confirmed regardless of the state of the pattern 0, the pattern 1, the pattern 2, or the pattern 3 as the effect means. , While changing or confirming the settings, it is possible to confirm the operation of the production means, etc., and it is possible to improve the convenience of the clerk of the amusement store.

Further, in the state of pattern 0, the second effect means (reel panel lamp 128 in this example) does not emit light, and in the state of any of the patterns 1, pattern 2, and pattern 3, the second effect is produced. Since the means emit light, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the pattern is 0 depending on the light emitting mode of the second effect means, and it is possible to enhance the convenience of confirming the operation of the effect means.

<Setting change / setting confirmation mode / Inspection pattern interrupt 1>
Next, interrupt 1 of the inspection pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 (d) to 106 (g). FIGS. 106 (d) to 106 (g) are diagrams showing an example of the interrupt 1 of the inspection pattern.

As described above, the pattern 3 is a pattern that shifts when the condition (condition 3) relating to the operating means is satisfied in the state of the pattern 1, the pattern 2, or the pattern 4, but the effect based on the pattern 1 or the pattern 2 is produced. Even if the execution is in progress, it is possible to shift to the pattern 3 when the condition 3 is satisfied.

For example, as shown in FIG. 106 (d), when the condition (condition 1) relating to the operating means is satisfied and the process shifts to the pattern 1 in the state of the pattern 0, FIGS. 103 (g) to 103 (h). As described with reference to, the sub liquid crystal 163 is controlled to repeat the fully closed state and the fully open state, and the characters "setting is being changed" are displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal 163.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 106 (e), even during the operation of the sub liquid crystal 163 in the pattern 1, it is possible to shift to the pattern 3 when the condition 3 is satisfied, and in the middle of the production based on the pattern 0, the figure is shown. The production based on the pattern 3 described with reference to 104 (c) to (f) is started.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 106 (f), when the condition (condition 2) relating to the operating means is satisfied and the process shifts to the pattern 2 in the state of the pattern 1, FIGS. 104 (a) to FIG. As described with reference to (b), the sub liquid crystal 163 is controlled to repeat the half-open state and the fully open state, and a part of the characters "setting is being changed" is displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal 163.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 106 (g), even during the operation of the sub liquid crystal 163 in the pattern 2, it is possible to shift to the pattern 3 when the condition 3 is satisfied, and in the middle of the production based on the pattern 2, the figure is shown. The production based on the pattern 3 described with reference to 104 (c) to (f) is started.

According to this example, since it is possible to shift to the pattern 3 even during the execution of the effect based on the pattern 1 or the pattern 2, it is possible to quickly confirm the operation of the pattern 3 of the effect means.

<Setting change / setting confirmation mode / Inspection pattern interrupt 2>
Next, the interrupt 2 of the inspection pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of the interrupt 2 of the inspection pattern.

As described above, the pattern 3 is a pattern that shifts when the condition (condition 3) relating to the operating means is satisfied in the state of the pattern 1, the pattern 2, or the pattern 4, but the effect based on the pattern 1 or the pattern 2 is produced. Even during execution, it is possible to shift to pattern 3 when condition 3 is satisfied, and in the state of pattern 3, when condition (condition 4) related to the operating means is satisfied, pattern 3 shifts to pattern 1 (first). (In the case of) and the case of shifting from pattern 3 to pattern 2 (second case).

For example, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), when the condition (condition 1) relating to the operating means is satisfied and the process shifts to the pattern 1 in the state of the pattern 0, FIGS. 103 (g) to 103 (h). As described with reference to, the sub liquid crystal 163 is controlled to repeat the fully closed state and the fully open state, and the characters "setting is being changed" are displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal 163.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), even during the operation of the sub liquid crystal 163 in the pattern 1, it is possible to shift to the pattern 3 when the condition 3 is satisfied, and in the middle of the production based on the pattern 0, the figure is shown. The production based on the pattern 3 described with reference to 104 (c) to (f) is started.

According to this example, since it is possible to shift to the pattern 3 even during the execution of the effect based on the pattern 1, it is possible to quickly confirm the operation of the pattern 3 of the effect means.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), in the state of the pattern 3, when the condition (condition 4) relating to the operating means is satisfied and the process shifts to the pattern 2 (second case), the figure is shown in the figure. As described with reference to 104 (a) to FIG. (B), the sub liquid crystal 163 is controlled to repeat the half-open state and the fully open state, and the characters "setting is being changed" are displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal 163. Display a part.

According to this example, since it is possible to shift to the pattern 2 even during the execution of the effect based on the pattern 3, it is possible to quickly confirm the operation of the pattern 2 of the effect means.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), in the state of the pattern 3, when the condition (condition 4) relating to the operating means is satisfied and the process shifts to the pattern 1 (first case), FIG. 103 (g). As described with reference to FIG. 3H, the sub-liquid crystal display 163 is controlled to repeat the fully closed state and the fully open state, and the characters “setting is being changed” are displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display 163.

According to this example, when the condition (condition 4) relating to the operating means is satisfied in the state of the pattern 3, there are a case of shifting to the pattern 1 (first case) and a case of shifting to the pattern 2 (second case). Therefore, it is possible to give randomness to the pattern transition, prevent the operation confirmation of the effect means from becoming a rut, and reliably execute the operation confirmation and the like.

If it is not possible to specify whether it will be the first case or the second case, it is possible to give more randomness and prevent the operation confirmation of the production means from becoming a rut. can.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 98) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, an effect button 132 shown in FIG. 98) and an effect means (for example, FIG. Light emitting means capable of emitting light, such as the main liquid crystal 157, the sub liquid crystal 163, the side lamp 144, the reel panel lamp 128 shown in 103, the upper lamp 142 shown in FIG. 98, and various lamps shown in FIG. 99, FIG. 98. A game table provided with movable means such as reels 110 to 113 shown in the above, and sound output means capable of outputting sound such as speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 99, wherein the effect means. Can produce effects based on a plurality of types of patterns, and the plurality of types of patterns include pattern 0, pattern 1, pattern 2, and pattern 3 (for example, patterns 0 to 3 shown in FIG. 102 (b)). Is included, and the effect means can shift to a state (hereinafter, referred to as "pattern 0 state") in which an effect based on the pattern 0 is executed in a certain state (for example, setting is being changed or setting is being confirmed). Yes, in the state of the pattern 0, when the condition relating to the operating means (hereinafter referred to as "condition 1"; for example, the condition 1 shown in FIG. 102 (a)) is satisfied, the state of the pattern 0 is based on the pattern 1. It is possible to shift to a state in which the effect is executed (hereinafter referred to as "state of pattern 1"), and in the state of pattern 1, a certain condition (hereinafter referred to as "condition 2"; for example, FIG. 102 (a)). When the condition 2) shown is satisfied, it is possible to shift from the state of the pattern 1 to the state of executing the effect based on the pattern 2 (hereinafter, referred to as “the state of the pattern 2”), and the operation in the state of the pattern 1. When a condition relating to the means (hereinafter referred to as "condition 3"; for example, condition 3 shown in FIG. 102 (a)) is satisfied, a state in which an effect based on the pattern 3 is executed from the state of the pattern 1 (hereinafter referred to as "pattern 3"). The game table is characterized in that it is possible to shift to the state of the pattern 2), and when the condition 3 is satisfied in the state of the pattern 2, the state of the pattern 2 can be shifted to the state of the pattern 3. Is.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, if the condition (condition 3) relating to the operating means is satisfied in the state of the pattern 1, the pattern 1 can be shifted to the pattern 3, and therefore, based on the operation of the operating means and the like, In addition to being able to shift the effect means from pattern 1 to pattern 3 at any timing, at least three types of patterns 1 to 3 can be used as inspection modes for the effect means, which is convenient for checking the operation of the effect means. It can enhance the sex.

Further, after the condition 1 is satisfied, each time the condition 2 is satisfied, the cycle can be changed to any one of the plurality of types of patterns including the pattern 1 and the pattern 2. The pattern 3 may be a pattern that does not shift when the condition 3 is not satisfied.

With such a configuration, when the condition 2 is satisfied and the pattern shifts as a cycle, the effect means can be intentionally shifted from the pattern 1 to the pattern 3 based on the operation of the operating means or the like. Therefore, in the pattern 3, it is possible to perform a special inspection of the effect means, and the pattern 3 can be made to function as a special pattern different from other patterns.

Further, the condition 1 and the condition 3 may be conditions that involve the operation of the operating means, and the operating modes of the operating means may be different from each other.

With such a configuration, by making the operation modes of condition 1 and condition 3 different, it is possible to prevent the pattern from shifting to an unintended pattern due to an operation error of the operation means, and the operation of the effect means. It is possible to improve the efficiency of confirmation and the like.

Further, the condition 1 and the condition 3 may be the same conditions relating to the operating means.

With such a configuration, by sharing the operation means of the condition 1 and the condition 3, the operation of the operation means can be simplified and the efficiency of checking the operation of the effect means can be improved.

Further, the condition 2 is a condition relating to the operating means, the condition 1 and the condition 2 are different conditions, and the condition 2 and the condition 3 may be different conditions.

With such a configuration, by making the conditions related to the operation means of condition 1, condition 2, and condition 3 different, it is possible to prevent the pattern from shifting to an unintended pattern due to an operation error of the operation means. Can be reliably performed, and the efficiency of checking the operation of the effect means can be improved.

Further, the condition 2 in the cycle may be the same regardless of the type of the pattern constituting the cycle.

With such a configuration, by making the pattern transition conditions in the cycle the same, it is possible to simplify the operation of the operating means and improve the efficiency of checking the operation of the effecting means.
Further, the certain state may be a state in which the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to check the operation of the effecting means even while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, and the burden on the clerk of the game store may be reduced.

Further, even if the effect means is in the state of any of the pattern 0, the pattern 1, the pattern 2, and the pattern 3, the setting may be changed or the setting may be confirmed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to check the operation of the production means while changing the setting or checking the setting, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the clerk of the amusement shop or the like.

Further, a second effect means capable of emitting light (for example, the reel panel lamp 128 shown in FIG. 98) is provided, and when the effect means is in the state of the pattern 0, the second effect means does not emit light and the effect means. The second effect means may emit light in any of the patterns 1, the pattern 2, and the pattern 3.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the pattern is 0 depending on the light emitting mode of the second effect means, and it is possible to enhance the convenience of confirming the operation of the effect means.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine or the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 98) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, the effect button 132 shown in FIG. 98) and an effect means (for example, the main effect shown in FIG. 103). Light emitting means capable of emitting light such as liquid crystal 157, sub liquid crystal 163, side lamp 144, reel panel lamp 128, upper lamp 142 shown in FIG. 98, various lamps shown in FIG. 99, reel 110 shown in FIG. The game console is provided with movable means such as 113 and the like, and sound output means capable of outputting sound such as speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 99), and there are a plurality of types of the effect means. The plurality of types of patterns include pattern 0, pattern 1, pattern 2, and pattern 3 (for example, patterns 0 to 3 shown in FIG. 102 (b)). The effect means can shift to a state in which an effect based on the pattern 0 is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “pattern 0 state”) in a certain state (for example, setting is being changed or setting is being confirmed), and the pattern is described. When the condition related to the operating means (hereinafter referred to as "condition 1"; for example, the condition 1 shown in FIG. 102 (a)) is satisfied in the state of 0, the effect based on the pattern 1 is executed from the state of the pattern 0. It is possible to shift to a state (hereinafter referred to as "state of pattern 1"), and in the state of pattern 1, a certain condition (hereinafter referred to as "condition 2"; for example, condition 2 shown in FIG. 102 (a)). When is satisfied, it is possible to shift from the state of the pattern 1 to the state of executing the effect based on the pattern 2 (hereinafter, referred to as “the state of the pattern 2”), and the condition regarding the operating means in the state of the pattern 1 (hereinafter referred to as “the state of the pattern 2”). Hereinafter, it is referred to as “condition 3”. For example, when the condition 3) shown in FIG. 102 (a) is satisfied, a state in which an effect based on the pattern 3 is executed from the state of the pattern 1 (hereinafter referred to as a “state of pattern 3”). ), And if the condition 3 is satisfied in the state of the pattern 2, the state of the pattern 2 can be changed to the state of the pattern 3, and the pattern 3 does not satisfy the condition 3. In this case, the pattern does not shift, and even during the execution of the effect based on the pattern 1 or the pattern 2, the game can shift to the state of the pattern 3 when the condition 3 is satisfied. It is a stand.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, if the condition (condition 3) relating to the operating means is satisfied in the state of the pattern 1, the pattern 1 can be shifted to the pattern 3, and therefore, based on the operation of the operating means and the like, In addition to being able to shift the effect means from pattern 1 to pattern 3 at any timing, at least three types of patterns 1 to 3 can be used as inspection modes for the effect means, which is convenient for checking the operation of the effect means. It can enhance the sex. Further, since the effect means can be intentionally transferred from the pattern 1 to the pattern 3 based on the operation of the operation means, it is possible to perform a special inspection of the effect means in the pattern 3 and the pattern. 3 can function as a special pattern different from other patterns. Further, since it is possible to shift to the pattern 3 even during the execution of the effect based on the pattern 1 or the pattern 2, it is possible to quickly confirm the operation of the pattern 3 of the effect means.

Further, the condition 1 and the condition 2 may be conditions that involve the operation of the operating means, and the operating modes of the operating means may be different from each other.

With such a configuration, by making the operation modes of condition 1 and condition 2 different, it is possible to prevent the pattern from shifting to an unintended pattern due to an operation error of the operation means, and the operation of the effect means. It is possible to improve the efficiency of confirmation and the like.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine or the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 98) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, the effect button 132 shown in FIG. 98) and an effect means (for example, the main effect shown in FIG. 103). Light emitting means capable of emitting light such as liquid crystal 157, sub liquid crystal 163, side lamp 144, reel panel lamp 128, upper lamp 142 shown in FIG. 98, various lamps shown in FIG. 99, reel 110 shown in FIG. The game console is provided with movable means such as 113 and the like, and sound output means capable of outputting sound such as speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 99), and there are a plurality of types of the effect means. The plurality of types of patterns include pattern 0, pattern 1, pattern 2, and pattern 3 (for example, patterns 0 to 3 shown in FIG. 102 (b)). The effect means can shift to a state in which an effect based on the pattern 0 is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “pattern 0 state”) in a certain state (for example, setting is being changed or setting is being confirmed), and the pattern is described. When the condition related to the operating means (hereinafter referred to as "condition 1"; for example, the condition 1 shown in FIG. 102 (a)) is satisfied in the state of 0, the effect based on the pattern 1 is executed from the state of the pattern 0. It is possible to shift to a state (hereinafter referred to as "state of pattern 1"), and when a certain condition (hereinafter referred to as "condition 2") is satisfied in the state of pattern 1, the pattern 1 to the pattern 2 are satisfied. It is possible to shift to a state in which the effect based on the above is executed (hereinafter referred to as “the state of pattern 2”), and a condition relating to the operating means in the state of pattern 1 (hereinafter referred to as “condition 3”), for example, FIG. 102 (a). ) Satisfies the condition 3), it is possible to shift from the state of the pattern 1 to the state of executing the effect based on the pattern 3 (hereinafter referred to as “the state of the pattern 3”), and in the state of the pattern 3. When the condition relating to the operating means (hereinafter referred to as "condition 4"; for example, the condition 4 shown in FIG. 102 (a)) is satisfied, the state of the pattern 3 may shift to the state of the pattern 2. It is a game table featuring.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, if the condition (condition 4) relating to the operating means is satisfied in the state of the pattern 3, the pattern 3 can be shifted to the pattern 2, and therefore, based on the operation of the operating means and the like, The effect means can be transferred from the pattern 3 to the pattern 2 at an arbitrary timing, and the convenience of checking the operation of the effect means can be enhanced.

Further, the effect means may be able to shift from the pattern 1 to the pattern 2 when a certain condition (hereinafter referred to as "condition 2") is satisfied in the state of the pattern 1.

Further, the condition 2 is a condition relating to the operating means, and the condition 2 and the condition 3 are conditions involving the operation of the operating means, even if the operating modes of the operating means are different from each other. good.

Further, the condition 3 and the condition that can shift from the state of the pattern 2 to the state of the pattern 3 may be the same condition.

Further, the condition 1, the condition 2, the condition 3, and the condition 4 may be conditions that involve the operation of the operating means, and the operating modes of the operating means may be different from each other.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the pattern from shifting to an unintended pattern due to an operation error of the operating means, and it is possible to improve the efficiency of checking the operation of the effecting means.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine or the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 98) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, an effect button 132 shown in FIG. 98) and an effect means (for example, the main effect shown in FIG. 103). Light emitting means capable of emitting light such as liquid crystal 157, sub liquid crystal 163, side lamp 144, reel panel lamp 128, upper lamp 142 shown in FIG. 98, various lamps shown in FIG. 99, reel 110 shown in FIG. It is a game table provided with movable means such as 113 and the like, and sound output means capable of outputting sound such as speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 99), and there are a plurality of types of the effect means. The plurality of types of patterns include pattern 0, pattern 1, pattern 2, and pattern 3 (for example, patterns 0 to 3 shown in FIG. 102 (b)). The effect means can shift to the state of the pattern 0 in a certain state (for example, the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed), and the state of executing the effect based on the pattern 0 (hereinafter, “the state of the pattern 0””. ), When the condition relating to the operating means (hereinafter referred to as "condition 1"; for example, the condition 1 shown in FIG. 102 (a)) is satisfied, the effect based on the pattern 1 is executed from the state of the pattern 0. It is possible to shift to a state (hereinafter referred to as "state of pattern 1"), and when a certain condition (hereinafter referred to as "condition 2") is satisfied in the state of pattern 1, the state of pattern 1 is described as described above. It is possible to shift to a state in which the effect based on the pattern 2 is executed (hereinafter referred to as "the state of the pattern 2"), and a condition relating to the operating means in the state of the pattern 1 (hereinafter referred to as "condition 3"), for example, FIG. 102. When the condition 3) shown in (a) is satisfied, it is possible to shift from the state of the pattern 1 to the state of executing the effect based on the pattern 3 (hereinafter referred to as "the state of the pattern 3"), and the state of the pattern 3 In the state, when the condition relating to the operating means (hereinafter referred to as “condition 4”; for example, the condition 4 shown in FIG. 102 (a)) is satisfied, the state of the pattern 3 may shift to the state of the pattern 2. The gaming table is characterized in that, even during the execution of the effect based on the pattern 1, if the condition 3 is satisfied, the state of the pattern 1 can be changed to the state of the pattern 3.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, if the condition (condition 4) relating to the operating means is satisfied in the state of the pattern 3, the pattern 3 can be shifted to the pattern 2, and therefore, based on the operation of the operating means and the like, The effect means can be transferred from the pattern 3 to the pattern 2 at an arbitrary timing, and the convenience of checking the operation of the effect means can be enhanced. Further, since it is possible to shift to the pattern 3 even during the execution of the effect based on the pattern 1, it is possible to quickly confirm the operation of the pattern 3 of the effect means.

Further, even during the execution of the effect based on the pattern 3, if the condition 4 is satisfied, the state of the pattern 3 may be changed to the state of the pattern 2.

With such a configuration, since it is possible to shift to the pattern 2 even during the execution of the effect based on the pattern 3, it is possible to quickly confirm the operation of the pattern 2 of the effect means.

Further, the condition 3 and the condition 4 are conditions that involve a series of operations of the operating means, and when the condition 3 is satisfied by the series of operations, an effect based on the pattern 3 is executed in a certain period. After the lapse of a certain period, the condition 4 may be satisfied.

With such a configuration, the transition from the pattern 3 to the pattern 2 (cycle) can be smoothly performed.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine or the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 98) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, an effect button 132 shown in FIG. 98) and an effect means (for example, the main effect shown in FIG. 103). Light emitting means capable of emitting light such as liquid crystal 157, sub liquid crystal 163, side lamp 144, reel panel lamp 128, upper lamp 142 shown in FIG. 98, various lamps shown in FIG. 99, reel 110 shown in FIG. It is a game table provided with movable means such as 113 and the like, and sound output means capable of outputting sound such as speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 99), and there are a plurality of types of the effect means. The plurality of types of patterns include pattern 0, pattern 1, pattern 2, and pattern 3 (for example, patterns 0 to 3 shown in FIG. 102 (b)). The effect means can shift to the state of the pattern 0 in a certain state (for example, the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed), and the state of executing the effect based on the pattern 0 (hereinafter, “the state of the pattern 0””. ), When the condition relating to the operating means (hereinafter referred to as "condition 1"; for example, the condition 1 shown in FIG. 102 (a)) is satisfied, the effect based on the pattern 1 is executed from the state of the pattern 0. It is possible to shift to a state (hereinafter referred to as "state of pattern 1"), and a condition related to the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "state of pattern 2") in a state of executing an effect based on the pattern 2 (hereinafter referred to as "state of pattern 2"). It is referred to as "condition 3". For example, when the condition 3) shown in FIG. 102 (a) is satisfied, a state in which an effect based on the pattern 3 is executed from the state of the pattern 2 (hereinafter referred to as "the state of the pattern 3"). When the condition relating to the operating means (hereinafter referred to as "condition 4"; for example, the condition 4 shown in FIG. 102 (a)) is satisfied in the state of the pattern 3, the state of the pattern 3 is changed to the above. There is a case of shifting to the state of pattern 1 (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"), and when the condition 4 is satisfied in the state of pattern 3, the state of pattern 3 shifts to the state of pattern 2. It is a game table characterized in that there is a case (hereinafter referred to as "second case").

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, if the condition (condition 4) relating to the operating means is satisfied in the state of the pattern 3, the pattern may be transferred to the pattern 1 or the pattern 2 at random. It is possible to impart sexuality, prevent the operation confirmation of the effect means from becoming a rut, and reliably execute the operation confirmation and the like.
Further, in the state of the pattern 1, when a certain condition (hereinafter referred to as "condition 2"; for example, the condition 2 shown in FIG. 102 (a)) is satisfied, the state of the pattern 1 shifts to the state of the pattern 2. It may be possible.

Further, it may not be possible to specify whether the case is the first case or the second case.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further give randomness, and it is possible to prevent a rut such as confirmation of the operation of the effect means.

Further, the pattern in the cycle may be updated by lottery or in the background, and when the condition 4 is satisfied, the pattern may shift to the updated pattern in the cycle.

With such a configuration, randomness can be added to the pattern transition, and it is possible to prevent the operation of the effecting means from becoming a rut.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine or the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 98) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, an effect button 132 shown in FIG. 98) and an effect means (for example, the main effect shown in FIG. 103). Light emitting means capable of emitting light such as liquid crystal 157, sub liquid crystal 163, side lamp 144, reel panel lamp 128, upper lamp 142 shown in FIG. 98, various lamps shown in FIG. 99, reel 110 shown in FIG. It is a game table provided with movable means such as 113 and the like, and sound output means capable of outputting sound such as speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 99), and there are a plurality of types of the effect means. The plurality of types of patterns include pattern 0, pattern 1, pattern 2, and pattern 3 (for example, patterns 0 to 3 shown in FIG. 102 (b)). The effect means can shift to the state of the pattern 0 in a certain state (for example, the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed), and the state of executing the effect based on the pattern 0 (hereinafter, “the state of the pattern 0””. ), When the condition relating to the operating means (hereinafter referred to as "condition 1"; for example, the condition 1 shown in FIG. 102 (a)) is satisfied, the effect based on the pattern 1 is executed from the state of the pattern 0. It is possible to shift to a state (hereinafter referred to as "state of pattern 1"), and in the state of pattern 1, a certain condition (hereinafter referred to as "condition 2"; for example, condition 2 shown in FIG. 102 (a)). When is satisfied, it is possible to shift from the state of the pattern 1 to the state of executing the effect based on the pattern 2 (hereinafter, referred to as “the state of the pattern 2”), and the condition regarding the operating means in the state of the pattern 1 (hereinafter referred to as “the state of the pattern 2”). Hereinafter, it is referred to as “condition 3”. For example, when the condition 3) shown in FIG. 102 (a) is satisfied, a state in which an effect based on the pattern 3 is executed from the state of the pattern 1 (hereinafter referred to as a “state of pattern 3”). ), And in the state of the pattern 3, when the condition relating to the operating means (hereinafter referred to as “condition 4”; for example, the condition 4 shown in FIG. 102 (a)) is satisfied, the state of the pattern 3 is satisfied. There is a case of shifting from the state of the pattern 1 to the state of the pattern 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “the first case”), and when the condition 4 is satisfied in the state of the pattern 3, the state of the pattern 3 is changed to the state of the pattern 2. It is a game table characterized in that there is a case of shifting to (hereinafter referred to as "second case").

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, if the condition (condition 3) relating to the operating means is satisfied in the state of the pattern 1, the pattern 1 can be shifted to the pattern 3, and therefore, based on the operation of the operating means and the like, In addition to being able to shift the effect means from pattern 1 to pattern 3 at any timing, at least three types of patterns 1 to 3 can be used as inspection modes for the effect means, which is convenient for checking the operation of the effect means. It can enhance the sex. Further, when the condition (condition 4) relating to the operation means is satisfied in the state of the pattern 3, the pattern may be transferred to the pattern 1 or the pattern 2, so that the pattern transfer can be given randomness, and the effect can be obtained. It is possible to prevent the operation confirmation of the means from becoming a rut, and to reliably execute the operation confirmation and the like.
Further, in the state of the pattern 1, when a certain condition (hereinafter referred to as "condition 2"; for example, the condition 2 shown in FIG. 102 (a)) is satisfied, the state of the pattern 1 shifts to the state of the pattern 2. It may be possible.

The configuration of the game console according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the game console according to the above embodiment. For example, the "certain state" according to the present invention is a state other than the setting being changed or the setting being confirmed. For example, it may be in a state where an error has occurred.

Here, as errors that can occur in the game console according to the present embodiment, there are door open error, hopper empty error, medal insertion abnormality 1 to 4, medal payout abnormality 1 to 3, overflow abnormality, RAM failure, winning abnormality, and the like. Can be mentioned.

The door open error is an error that notifies the opening of the door of the game table, occurs when the front door 102 is opened, and is resolved when the front door 102 is closed. The hopper empty error is a payout error related to the payout of medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper housed inside the main body 101 becomes less than the specified number, and more than the specified number of medals are sent to the hopper. It will be solved by replenishing.

The medal insertion abnormality 1 occurs when the inserted medals are accumulated, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. The medal insertion abnormality 2 occurs when the number of medals inserted is equal to or greater than the specified number, and is resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM.

The medal insertion abnormality 3 occurs when either the insertion sensor 1 or the insertion sensor 2 is turned on except during the medal insertion processing, and the medal insertion abnormality 4 occurs when the inserted medals are inserted into the insertion sensor 1 and the insertion sensor 2. It occurs when the error is not passed normally, and it is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error.

The medal payout abnormality 1 occurs when the medal is not paid out for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven, and the medal payout abnormality 2 occurs when the medal stays while the medal payout device is driven, and the medal payout abnormality 3 occurs. Occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or the payout sensor 2 is turned on except during the medal payout process, and both of them are resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. ..

The overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage is turned on, and is resolved when the error release switch operation is accepted after removing the cause of the error. The RAM failure occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted. The winning abnormality occurs when a winning symbol different from the winning symbol confirmed by the internal lottery is won after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted.

The game console according to the present invention is not limited to slot machines, and can also be applied to pachinko machines. Errors that can occur in the pachinko machine include, for example, a bottom pan full tank error, a payout device error, a payout excess error, an illegal payout error, a main control unit communication error, a magnetic error, a magnetic field error, a frame opening error, and a RAM clear error. , Impact sensor error, etc., and these errors are also resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after the cause of the error is removed.

<Mute mode>
Next, prior to the description of the mute mode, pattern 0 of the setting change / setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 108.

When the power is turned on with the setting key turned on, the game console shifts to the setting change / setting confirmation mode (certain state), and the inspection mode shifts to pattern 0. That is, pattern 0 is an inspection pattern that is initially set when the mode shifts to the setting change / setting confirmation mode.

FIGS. 108A to 108C are diagrams showing operation patterns of the effect means in pattern 0.

In the state of pattern 0 of this example, the sub liquid crystal 163 is moved from the fully closed state shown in FIG. 3B to the fully open state shown in FIG. Hold.

In addition, the characters "setting is being changed" are displayed in the display area of the main liquid crystal 157, and the side lamp 144 (first effect means) is made to emit red light after the power is turned on, and then the initial operation of the sub liquid crystal 163 is completed. If this happens, the light emission will be stopped. Further, the reel panel lamp 128 (second effect means) does not emit light. In addition, the upper speaker 272 repeatedly outputs a notification sound (in this example, a voice saying "setting is being changed") notifying that the state of the game console is in the setting change / setting confirmation mode (certain state). ..

In the setting change / setting confirmation mode (in a certain state), when a pressing operation by the operating means (start lever 135 in this example) is accepted, the set value is confirmed and the setting change is completed, and normal game is possible. It shifts to the normal game state.

FIG. 108 (d) is a diagram showing an operation pattern of the effect means after the setting change is completed.

In the normal game state, the normal game background and the like are displayed in the display area of the main liquid crystal 157, and the side lamp 144 is made to emit light in the form of light emission for production. In addition, from the upper speaker 272, a notification sound (in this example, "setting change is completed"" is heard to notify that the setting change / setting confirmation mode (certain state) is completed and the normal game state is entered. ) Is output.

<Mute mode / Example 1>
FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of shifting from pattern 0 of the setting change / setting confirmation mode to the mute mode. Since the states shown in FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (c) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 108 (a) and 108 (c), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the condition (condition 1) related to the operation means is satisfied in the setting change / setting confirmation mode (certain state), the pattern 0 can be changed to the pattern 1. In this example, after the effect button 132 is operated once, the effect button 132 is operated. When the effect button 132 is pressed and held for a long time, the condition 1 is satisfied, and the pattern 0 shifts to the pattern 1.

FIGS. 109 (d) to 109 (e) are diagrams showing operation patterns of the effect means in pattern 1.

In the state of pattern 1 of this example, the sub liquid crystal 163 is controlled to repeat the fully closed state shown in FIG. 3D and the fully open state shown in FIG. The text "Settings are being changed" is displayed.

Further, the characters "setting is being changed" are displayed in the display area of the main liquid crystal 157, and the side lamp 144 (first effect means) and the reel panel lamp 128 (second effect means) are displayed in the inspection mode of pattern 1. It emits light in blue to suggest that it is.

In this example, pattern 0 is a pattern including the effect mode (only the side lamp 144 emits light) of the first number (1 in this example), and pattern 1 is a second number larger than the first number. It is a pattern including (in this example, 2) the effect mode (both the side lamp 144 and the reel panel lamp 128 emit light), and the pattern 1 has more types of effect patterns by the effect means than the pattern 0. It is configured in.

The setting change / setting confirmation mode (certain state) is continued during the period (second period) in which the effect based on this pattern 1 is executed, but the patterns shown in FIGS. Notification that the state of the game console is in the setting change / setting confirmation mode (certain state) when the period (first period) in which the effect based on 0 is executed is changed to the second period. The sound is configured to disappear, and the audio output from the upper speaker 272 is stopped.

According to this example, the effect means can be shifted from the first period (pattern 0) to the second period (pattern 1) at an arbitrary timing based on the operation of the operating means, and the second after the transition. In the second period, the operation of the effect means can be confirmed in a quiet environment where the notification sound is extinguished. Therefore, the effect based on the pattern 1 can be made to function as a pattern for confirming the operation of the effect means. In addition, the first period (pattern 0) and the second period (pattern 1) can be clearly distinguished according to the size of the effect pattern of the effect means, which enhances the convenience of checking the operation of the effect means. be able to.

In the setting change / setting confirmation mode (in a certain state), when a pressing operation by the operating means (start lever 135 in this example) is accepted, the set value is confirmed and the setting change is completed, and normal game is possible. It shifts to the normal game state.

FIG. 109 (d) is a diagram showing an operation pattern of the effect means after the setting change is completed.

In the normal game state, the normal game background and the like are displayed in the display area of the main liquid crystal 157, and the side lamp 144 is made to emit light in the form of light emission for production. On the other hand, in this example, since the mute mode is entered, the audio output from the upper speaker 272 is stopped even after the setting change is completed.

<Mute mode / Example 2>
FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example in which the pattern 0 of the setting change / setting confirmation mode is shifted to the mute mode and then returned to the setting change / setting confirmation mode again. Since the states shown in FIGS. 110 (a) to 110 (c) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 109 (c) to 109 (e), the description thereof will be omitted.

The game console according to this example is from a certain state in the period (second period) in which the effect based on pattern 1 is executed to in the period (first period) in which the effect based on pattern 0 is executed. It is provided with a return means for returning to the normal state.

In this example, when the effect button 132 is operated 10 times (10 times in a row) within 5 seconds, or when a power failure / recovery occurs, the period during which the effect based on pattern 1 is executed (second). From a certain state in the period), it returns to a certain state in the period (first period) in which the effect based on the pattern 0 is executed.

FIG. 110 (d) is a diagram showing an operation pattern of the effect means after returning to the pattern 0.

In this example, since the initial operation end state of the pattern 0 shown in the figure (a) is shifted to the mute mode of the pattern 1 shown in the figures (b) and (c), the effect button 132 is set to 5. When the operation is performed 10 times within a second, or when a power failure / recovery occurs, the pattern 0 returns to the initial operation end state shown in FIG.

In the state where the initial operation of pattern 0 of this example is completed, the sub liquid crystal 163 is held in the fully open state, the characters "setting is being changed" are displayed in the display area of the main liquid crystal 157, and the light emission of the side lamp 144 is stopped. , The reel panel lamp 128 (second effect means) does not emit light. In addition, the upper speaker 272 repeatedly outputs a notification sound (in this example, a voice saying "setting is being changed") notifying that the state of the game console is in the setting change / setting confirmation mode (certain state). ..

According to this example, the effect means can be shifted from the first period (pattern 0) to the second period (pattern 1) at an arbitrary timing based on the operation of the operating means, and the second after the transition. In the second period, the operation of the effect means can be confirmed in a quiet environment where the notification sound is extinguished. Therefore, the effect based on the pattern 1 can be made to function as a pattern for confirming the operation of the effect means. In addition, the first period (pattern 0) and the second period (pattern 1) can be clearly distinguished according to the size of the effect pattern of the effect means, which enhances the convenience of checking the operation of the effect means. be able to. Further, since the setting change and setting confirmation in the second period can be returned to the setting change and setting confirmation in the first period, the convenience of setting change and setting confirmation can be enhanced.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 98) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, an effect button 132 shown in FIG. 98) and an effect means (for example, FIG. Light emitting means capable of emitting light, such as the main liquid crystal 157, the sub liquid crystal 163, the side lamp 144, the reel panel lamp 128 shown in 103, the upper lamp 142 shown in FIG. 98, and various lamps shown in FIG. 99, FIG. 98. A game table provided with movable means such as reels 110 to 113 shown in the above, and sound output means capable of outputting sound such as speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 99, wherein the effect means. Can produce effects based on a plurality of types of patterns, and the plurality of types of patterns include pattern 0 and pattern 1 (for example, patterns 0 and 1 shown in FIG. 102 (b)), and the setting is changed or set. A certain notification sound can be output in a state related to confirmation (hereinafter referred to as "a certain state"), and the effect means executes an effect based on the pattern 0 in the certain state (hereinafter referred to as "a certain state"). , "Pattern 0 state"), the certain notification sound is output in the pattern 0 state, and the condition relating to the operating means (hereinafter, "condition") in the pattern 0 state. 1 ”(for example, when the condition 1 shown in FIG. 102 (a) is satisfied, the state of the pattern 0 is changed to the state of executing the effect based on the pattern 1 (hereinafter referred to as the“ state of the pattern 1 ”). The transition is possible, and the certain state is continued during the period in which the effect means is in the state of the pattern 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “second period”), and the effect means is in the state of the pattern 0. When the transition from (hereinafter, referred to as "first period") to the second period, the output certain notification sound disappears, and the pattern 1 is more effective than the pattern 0. It is a game table characterized by the fact that there are many types of production patterns by means.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the effect means can be shifted from the first period (pattern 0) to the second period (pattern 1) at an arbitrary timing based on the operation of the operation means. In the second period after the transition, the operation of the effect means can be confirmed in a quiet environment where the notification sound disappears. Therefore, the effect based on pattern 1 functions as a pattern for confirming the operation of the effect means. be able to. In addition, the first period (pattern 0) and the second period (pattern 1) can be clearly distinguished according to the size of the effect pattern of the effect means, which enhances the convenience of checking the operation of the effect means. be able to.

Further, the pattern 0 is a pattern including the first number of effect modes, the pattern 1 is a pattern including the second number of effect modes, and the second number is from the first number. May be large.

With such a configuration, the first period (pattern 0) and the second period (pattern 1) can be clearly distinguished according to the size of the type of effect mode of the effect means, and the operation of the effect means can be confirmed. It is possible to enhance convenience such as.
Further, the effect means may be a means including a light emitting means capable of emitting light.

With such a configuration, the first period (pattern 0) and the second period (pattern 1) can be clearly distinguished according to the size of the effect pattern of the light emitting means, and the operation of the light emitting means can be confirmed. It is possible to enhance convenience such as.

Further, even before the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed, the certain notification sound may be extinguished when the condition 1 is satisfied.

With such a configuration, even if the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, the operation of the effecting means can be confirmed in a quiet environment where the notification sound is extinguished, which is convenient for confirming the operation of the effecting means. It can enhance the sex.

Further, the certain state may be terminated when the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed while the certain notification sound is turned off.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine or the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 98) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, the effect button 132 shown in FIG. 98) and an effect means (for example, the main effect shown in FIG. 103). Light emitting means capable of emitting light such as liquid crystal 157, sub liquid crystal 163, side lamp 144, reel panel lamp 128, upper lamp 142 shown in FIG. 98, various lamps shown in FIG. 99, reel 110 shown in FIG. It is a game table provided with movable means such as 113 and the like, and sound output means capable of outputting sound such as speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 99), and there are a plurality of types of the effect means. The plurality of types of patterns include pattern 0 and pattern 1 (for example, patterns 0 and 1 shown in FIG. 102 (b)), and a state related to setting change or setting confirmation (for example, a state related to setting change or setting confirmation). Hereinafter, a certain notification sound can be output in a certain state), and the effect means executes an effect based on the pattern 0 in the certain state (hereinafter, “pattern 0”). It is possible to shift to the "state"), the certain notification sound is output in the state of the pattern 0, and the condition relating to the operating means (hereinafter, referred to as "condition 1") in the state of the pattern 0. For example, when the condition 1) shown in FIG. 102 (a) is satisfied, it is possible to shift from the state of the pattern 0 to the state of executing the effect based on the pattern 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “the state of the pattern 1”). The certain state is continued during the period in which the effect means is in the state of the pattern 1 (hereinafter referred to as “second period”), and the period in which the effect means is in the state of pattern 0 (hereinafter referred to as “first period”). When the transition from "one period" to the second period, the output certain notification sound disappears, and the pattern 1 is more of the effect pattern by the effect means than the pattern 0. The gaming table is characterized in that there are many types and the gaming table is provided with a return means for returning from the certain state in the second period to the certain state in the first period.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the effect means can be shifted from the first period (pattern 0) to the second period (pattern 1) at an arbitrary timing based on the operation of the operation means. In the second period after the transition, the operation of the effect means can be confirmed in a quiet environment where the notification sound disappears. Therefore, the effect based on pattern 1 functions as a pattern for confirming the operation of the effect means. be able to. In addition, the first period (pattern 0) and the second period (pattern 1) can be clearly distinguished according to the size of the effect pattern of the effect means, which enhances the convenience of checking the operation of the effect means. be able to. Further, since the setting change and setting confirmation in the second period can be returned to the setting change and setting confirmation in the first period, the convenience of setting change and setting confirmation can be enhanced.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine or the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 98) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, the effect button 132 shown in FIG. 98) and an effect means (for example, the main effect shown in FIG. 103). Light emitting means capable of emitting light such as liquid crystal 157, sub liquid crystal 163, side lamp 144, reel panel lamp 128, upper lamp 142 shown in FIG. 98, various lamps shown in FIG. 99, reel 110 shown in FIG. It is a game table provided with movable means such as 113 and the like, and sound output means capable of outputting sound such as speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 99), and there are a plurality of types of the effect means. The plurality of types of patterns include pattern 0 and pattern 1 (for example, patterns 0 and 1 shown in FIG. 102 (b)), and a state related to setting change or setting confirmation (for example, a state related to setting change or setting confirmation). Hereinafter, a certain notification sound can be output in a certain state), and the effect means executes an effect based on the pattern 0 in the certain state (hereinafter, “pattern 0”). It is possible to shift to the "state"), the certain notification sound is output in the state of the pattern 0, and the condition relating to the operating means (hereinafter, referred to as "condition 1") in the state of the pattern 0. For example, when the condition 1) shown in FIG. 102 (a) is satisfied, it is possible to shift from the state of the pattern 0 to the state of executing the effect based on the pattern 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “the state of the pattern 1”). The certain state is continued during the period in which the effect means is in the state of the pattern 1 (hereinafter referred to as “second period”), and the period in which the effect means is in the state of pattern 0 (hereinafter referred to as “first period”). When the transition from "one period" to the second period, the output certain notification sound disappears, and the pattern 0 is a pattern including the first number of effect means. The pattern 1 is a pattern including a second number of effect means, and the second number is larger than the first number.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the effect means can be shifted from the first period (pattern 0) to the second period (pattern 1) at an arbitrary timing based on the operation of the operation means. In the second period after the transition, the operation of the effect means can be confirmed in a quiet environment where the notification sound disappears. Therefore, the effect based on pattern 1 functions as a pattern for confirming the operation of the effect means. be able to. In addition, the first period (pattern 0) and the second period (pattern 1) can be clearly distinguished according to the size of the effect pattern of the effect means, which enhances the convenience of checking the operation of the effect means. be able to.

Further, the effect means having a plurality of the effect means, and one of the plurality of effect means is a first light emitting means (for example, the side lamp 144 shown in FIG. 103), and the effect means has a plurality of effect means. One effect means is a second light emitting means (for example, the reel panel lamp 128 shown in FIG. 103), and in the pattern 0, the first of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means. Only one light emitting means may emit light, and in the pattern 1, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may emit light.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine or the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 98) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, the effect button 132 shown in FIG. 98) and an effect means (for example, the main effect shown in FIG. 103). Light emitting means capable of emitting light such as liquid crystal 157, sub liquid crystal 163, side lamp 144, reel panel lamp 128, upper lamp 142 shown in FIG. 98, various lamps shown in FIG. 99, reel 110 shown in FIG. It is a game table provided with movable means such as 113 and the like, and sound output means capable of outputting sound such as speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 99), and there are a plurality of types of the effect means. The plurality of types of patterns include pattern 0 and pattern 1 (for example, patterns 0 and 1 shown in FIG. 102 (b)), and a state related to setting change or setting confirmation (for example, a state related to setting change or setting confirmation). Hereinafter, a certain notification sound can be output in a certain state), and the effect means executes an effect based on the pattern 0 in the certain state (hereinafter, “pattern 0”). It is possible to shift to the "state"), the certain notification sound is output in the state of the pattern 0, and the condition relating to the operating means (hereinafter, referred to as "condition 1") in the state of the pattern 0. For example, when the condition 1) shown in FIG. 102a) is satisfied, it is possible to shift from the state of the pattern 0 to the state of executing the effect based on the pattern 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “the state of the pattern 1”). The certain state is continued during the period in which the means is in the state of the pattern 1 (hereinafter referred to as "second period"), and the period in which the effect means is in the state of the pattern 0 (hereinafter referred to as "first period"). When the transition from "period") to the second period, the output certain notification sound disappears, and the pattern 0 is a pattern including the first number of effect means, and the pattern 1 is included. Is a pattern including a second number of directing means, wherein the second number is larger than the first number, from the certain state in the second period to the or in the first period. It is a game table characterized by being equipped with a return means for returning to a normal state.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the effect means can be shifted from the first period (pattern 0) to the second period (pattern 1) at an arbitrary timing based on the operation of the operation means. In the second period after the transition, the operation of the effect means can be confirmed in a quiet environment where the notification sound disappears. Therefore, the effect based on pattern 1 functions as a pattern for confirming the operation of the effect means. be able to. In addition, the first period (pattern 0) and the second period (pattern 1) can be clearly distinguished according to the size of the effect pattern of the effect means, which enhances the convenience of checking the operation of the effect means. be able to. Further, since the setting change and setting confirmation in the second period can be returned to the setting change and setting confirmation in the first period, the convenience of setting change and setting confirmation can be enhanced.

The configuration of the game console according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the game console according to the above embodiment. For example, "the notification sound disappears" according to the present invention means that the output of the notification sound is stopped. The output of the notification sound may be continuously muted, or the volume of the notification sound may be lowered to a volume that cannot be heard by humans.

Further, the "effect means" according to the present invention also includes a movable body such as an accessory, and the effect mode (effect pattern) of the effect means includes vibration, rotation, movement, and the like of the movable object. In addition, the "state related to setting change or setting confirmation" includes the state in which the setting key or setting switch is being operated, the state in which an error related to the setting value has occurred, etc., in addition to the state in which the setting is being changed or confirmed. Is done.

Further, the gaming table according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the "enclosed gaming machine" circulates and uses the gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Further, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, the range of the game may be further expanded by applying the content described in one configuration to the other configurations among the plurality of configurations described in the examples.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and variations to the embodiments of the present invention can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. Modifications can be made and those accompanied by such modifications and alterations are also within the technical scope of the invention. Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to things.

100 Slot machine 110, 111, 112 Reel 113 Reel window 123 Notification lamp 127 Payout number indicator 130, 131, 132 Medal insertion button 135 Start lever 137, 138, 139 Stop button 157 Directional image display device 192 Directional button 272, 277 Speaker 300 Main control unit 400 1st sub control unit 500 2nd sub control unit

Claims (2)

Multiple reels with multiple types of patterns and rotational drive,
The start lever that starts the rotation of the plurality of reels and
An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
A bet number setting means capable of setting any bet number among a plurality of bets including a first bet number and a second bet number smaller than the first bet number, and a bet number setting means.
A game execution means for executing a game based on the bet number set by the bet number setting means, and a game execution means.
It is a game console equipped with a production means that can at least execute the first production and the second production .
The game table is recommended to be a game in which the first bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "first bet number game").
The effect means is a means capable of executing the first effect in the first bet number game.
The first effect is an effect that is started in connection with the stoppage of all reels.
The first effect is a judge effect that suggests whether or not to shift to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.
The judge effect is configured to include an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the operation means and an operation response effect that is executed in connection with the operation of the operation means.
The second effect is an effect of notifying that a game in which the second bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "second bet number game") has been executed.
The effect means is a means for executing the operation response effect when the operation promotion effect is started as the first effect in a certain game and the operation means is operated.
In the effect means, the operation promotion effect is started as the first effect in a certain game, the operation means is not operated, and then the second bet number game is executed in the next game of the certain game . When this is done (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), it is a means for not executing the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect in the first effect.
In the second bet number game in the first case, after all the reels are stopped, the first effect not including the operation promotion effect is executed, and the second bet number game following the second bet number game is executed. In the first bet number game in which the start lever is operated, there is a case where the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player without performing the judge effect (hereinafter referred to as "second case").
In the second case, the effect is different from that of the judge effect, and the effect of recognizing that the player has moved to a favorable gaming state is started.
A game table featuring that. The game console according to claim 1.
The effect means is a means for executing the second effect until all reels are stopped in the second bet number game in the first case.
A game table featuring that.

Images